Home

Magellan Reference Manual

1. cccccsseeecceeeeeceeseeeceeeeeeneneeeees 185 Glossary Of TeErmS cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 277 H MEAN Dialog saiesasneciuivviadounermenieaviedsinsmeuecnts 42 ICI UL OM enea aE 31 a E Seer reer re ener cern mere 20 21 37 225 l eea e E T T 28 ICX calculation osnoennonnoennonnnennsnnennnonnrennrennnnne 67 identifiers csiscsuntwccerenetaccwnnemosevedaibedederwneevuaewnts 63 64 if then else logical expression 235 TOLRLOIKSI O PEITEEEEEEEEEEEE 242 Import Raw Data ccccccesceeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Import sample ID liSt ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 Import edit a sample ID list cceeeeeeeee 112 In argument 00 eccc cs eeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeees 236 Initial PASSWOMK ccccesceceeeeseeeeeeeeteneeseeeeees 33 Insert Sample ID List cc cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 Installation SON VAIN oE REA 18 Installation Qualification 1Q ececcceeeeeeeeeeeees 19 IMSTUMENT COMO wiicieicsaicansteevernewtinaceeseansencusts 41 instrument DATA scecccxctce sedcusaccomueceboenceeteertiaees 156 AT CARO UIVCTAL seice 236 SIA AIC a 242 K Kinetic Data Reduction ccccccseeeeeeeeeeneeees 76 Kinetic Parameters ccceceecceseeeeeeeeeseeeeees 157 Kinetic transformations c c cccceeeeeeeeees 80 85 Kinetics Graph cccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 167 L Levenberg Marquardt algorithm 0 2
2. ccccccssccsecseeseesseesees 80 4 3 10 Concentrations Standard Curve cccccccccssccseecsssesseeseneesseees 81 4 3 11 Concentrations Transformations Add New Concentration Transformations ccccccccceecseeeees 85 4 3 12 Evaluate Data Cutoff Definition ccccccccseecseeeceescneesanees 86 4 3 13 Evaluate Data QC Validation cccccccecccseeccseeessneeseaneesenes 87 4 3 14 Data Handling Data Export ccccccscccseccsecseseceeeeseeneeseneees 89 4 3 15 Data Handling Printed Repott cccccseecseeccseecseeseneesenees 93 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 7 TECAN 4 3 16 Data Handling Automated Data Handling 1 cccceeee 98 4 3 17 Miscellaneous User Prompts 1cccccccseeesesecssereseeeeees 102 4 3 18 Miscellaneous Number Forimat ccccccccccccseccececsesseceeeeees 102 4 3 19 Miscellaneous Method Notes ccccccecceceeceeceececeeseeees 103 4 4 Saving the Method ccsscccsseecssseeseseeceneecenseeeeeeeenseeeeseesennenes 103 4 4 1 Password Protection Of Methods cccccccccceceececsecseceeeeees 104 4 5 Multiplate Methods ccccccceseeeseceseeeeeesenseeesesenseenseneneeonsenensens 105 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard cccssssseeeeesseeseeeees 109 5 1 NT OG CUO oraire ESEESE 109 5 2 Create Edit a Sample ID LiSt ccccceseseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeseees 109 5 2 1 Create New Sample ID LISt cccccc
3. The displayed screenshot shows the wizard list page when magellan Tracker is installed With magellan Standard the Attach signature wizard is not available Each wizard can be started either by double clicking or by selecting it and clicking the Next gt button 2 3 1 Start Measurement Wizard For a detailed description refer to chapter 6 Start Measurement Wizard The following choices are available e Obtain Raw Data is used to generate raw data quickly and easily by setting the required measurement parameters and starting a measurement The Obtain raw data wizard creates a new workspace in which the obtained values are presented and stored e Run Strip Layout is used to collect strips from different methods combine the strips to one method and run this method e Use Predefined Method is used to perform measurements based on previously defined methods The wizard creates a new workspace containing the selected method which consists of all measurement parameters and evaluation definitions and enables you to insert a sample ID list After the measurement the workspace is completed with the obtained raw data that will be evaluated e Start Favorite is used to select one of the most frequently used methods from the list of numbered icons 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 27 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 After the measurement is f
4. 2 0 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example Automated Data Handling In the control bar select Automated data handling from the Data handling item Automatic load sample ID list export to ASCII file export to Excel print view results after measurement Select export to ASCII file and view results after measurements In magellan Tracker save workspace is selected by default and cannot be modified Save the Method Click FINISH to open the Save as window Enter the method filename and complete any other field if appropriate Create Edit a Method Save ini mth Remarks Status Filename Method mth File remarks Audit trail comment Method pazzword Help C Run this method now SAVE gt Cancel I 5 z007 Tecan Filename A filename must be entered A default filename is text field suggested automatically but can be changed File remarks Comments entered here will be saved and displayed text field with the filename 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 271 14 Application Example Audit trail comment text field Audit trail button Organize Favorites button Signatures button Method password Run this method now check box Audit Trail TECAN Comments entered here will be stored in the audit trail This option is only
5. 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Levy Jennings Graph In the File menu click Plate to Plate QC and the Levy Jennings Graph window appears The Levy Jennings Graph displays the trend of the control values fe Plate to Plate OC L Single points Time range VIEW SUMMARY 2007 Tecan On the y axes the data values raw data concentrations etc as set in the method definition are applied and on the x axes the time range in days is applied The control values are displayed together with the mean value and the distance lines of the standard deviations 1s 2s 3s When the cursor is placed on a measurement point a tool tip shows additional information workspace name measurement date and time and rule violated if any Use the check boxes of the single elements of the Show list to select various controls to be displayed Time Range Beside the graph next to Show various controls can be selected to be displayed Click Time range and the following window appears Recalculate OC Time range From 71 05 2007 Calendar Calendar To 22 05 2007 Calendar Cancel _ Select an appropriate time range to be displayed 150 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Select Workspaces Click En Disable to enable or disable certain workspaces for evaluation Enable Disable workspaces ivf 200 70521 0071 wep ivf 200 70521 0002 w
6. The average of all the samples in the first experimental group will be formed Furthermore the replicates of a value can be averaged avg ST1_1 Averages all replicates of the first standard This function determines the median of argument The argument must be an identifier The individual replicates are ordered in terms of size and the median determined by taking the middle value in the order If the number of values is an even number the average of the two middle values will be determined Example Median NC1 Assume NC1_1 0 1 NC1_2 0 05 NC1_3 0 04 The median value of these negative controls will be determined as follows The order of the values gives 0 04 0 050 1 The median is therefore 0 05 The median of the whole plate can be determined using this function The individual values are ordered in terms of size and the median determined by taking the middle value in the order If the number of values is an even number the average of the two middle values will be determined Example medianPlate Assume BL1 1 NC1 2 PC1 3 SM1_1 4 SM1_2 5 and no other wells defined The median of the whole plate is 3 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 237 TECAN 13 Calculations max argument and min argument This function calculates the minimum maximum of argument The argument must be an identifier Example max SM1 The maximum of all the samples in the first experimental group will
7. The graph displays data of selected well s The raw data versus well IDs is displayed The graph of the kinetic measurement is displayed for the selected well s The graph of the multilabel kinetics measurement is displayed for the selected well s The graph of the spectra is displayed for the selected well s The graph of the dilution series is displayed for the selected well s Toggle switch that masks or unmasks measurement values in the selected well If the user selects to mask a well in a kinetic or multilabel measurement a dialog box appears asking whether the user wants to mask unmask all data of the well No calculations are performed for the masked well Toggle switch to show or hide the graph or measurement values in the individual wells The information will not be printed or exported Where information has been blanked out the word Hidden will appear on the relevant well The Show Hide Layout button opens no window or dialog box the Show Hide Layout process is executed instantly as a background process 2013 08 TECAN if ln l 4 i Summary Dialog Details Dialog 2013 08 y EXPERT S KNOW HOW 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Setting different kinetic parameters for different wells is only possible when using the context sensitive menu of a well in the plate layout window or when using the context sensitive menu in the kinetic graph dialog By editing the kinetic parameters on the Edit meth
8. gct Back et D 2006 Tecan 3 3 Log Files During working with magellan log files are created The communication between the software and the instrument and the communication between components of the software are stored in these log files They can be found in the following paths e magellan Log files communication between single components of magellan C Documents and Settings AllUsers Documents Tecan LogFiles e Infinite Series Log files communication between magellan and Infinite series instrument C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan LogFiles Magellan V x y e Rdr OLE Log files Communication between magellan and Radr ole Instrument by default C Documents and Settings CurrentUser Local Settings Temp e Collection of necessary Log files Log files can be saved as zip archive by selecting the Save Logfiles button in the File handling dialog Miscellaneous File Handling The zip archive can now be named and saved in a defined directory In case of any magellan measurement or status error s this archive contains all well data status e g overflow lamp low or calculation error s and can be easily sent to Expertline at tecan com for support request For further information please refer to chapter 11 2 File Handling Save Log Files 50 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 1 Introduction The Create Edit a Method
9. 0eeee 26 Five Parameters Marquardt 00008 254 Folder Handling c ccscccccceessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 POW Ms i A O 233 Basic FUNCIONS scccccccscciccecdeseatasncearneaedeaderditeer 236 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 283 Index Elimination FUNCTIONS ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 239 FONCIONS edoscnaecszetecnsceoknbaesceds rasciacetacsnesusdeeacecnaess 235 How to write a formula ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 Logical EXPreSSIONS c scsceccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 235 OD ST ANOS seeen atte saneneeacuenadeestaeenasieneeesasants 234 Other FUNCIONS wiscsccinncccnariudsacssandsonnaiovecawiuunasenns 242 Spectra Functions viiiasicnicsinsinnsinsirniieosisssienenssosneisinsins 243 Statistical FUNCTtIONS cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 237 Variables eecevene evscerattemacatsuecenssecauacesacneissevonceen 233 Four ParaMeters cccceeceeeeeeeeeeteneeteneeeeues 252 Four Parameters Marquardt 00008 253 frac argument ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 236 G Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced CONNECTING tO c cee eeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeess 186 Data Displayed in Status Bal cccccccseeeeees 188 Data Logging sesesuctiescrmseswetietiseenntencbeeatedeheerineesantet 186 Importing Logged Data Into Microsoft Excel 188 Precautions before Starting a Measurement 189 Prerequisites
10. H 3 Concentrations A a i C F z Standard curve Exp group 1 A hos poygaw Ipa ayees gt v Replicates afr Fix number Ea fas Conc transformed d 7 Add new conc transformati i oJ Evaluate data Cutoff definition LJ i2 2 ow Oal QC Validation S ST Def identif F I j2 2h G Data handling 4 Fill Delete i selection selection ST1_2 ST1_6 j2 Data export Printed report Automated data handling Miscellaneous User prompts Number Format Method notes Control Bar Data Information Window emis D Cancel _ _ lt Back lt lt Back 2004 Tecan Toolbar On top of the window a Toolbar is displayed with the most common functions depending on the currently selected options In the central area of the window the Plate Layout window displays a schematically layout of a microplate Rows are marked alphabetically columns numerically If anew method has been generated all wells are empty A mouse click selects an individual well Wells that will not be measured as given by the part of the plate settings are displayed in grey color When defining the layout transformations etc the identifiers formulas etc are displayed in the corresponding wells 56 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Toolbar Buttons Undo button Redo button Select all unused button Zoom to 10 butto
11. OTECAN Instructions for Use for magellan Reference Guide Document Part No 30066407 2013 08 Document Revision No 1 3 Software Revisions magellan Standard 7 2 C magellan Tracker 7 2 30066407 01 TECAN Tecan Customer Support If you have any questions or need technical support for your Tecan product contact your local Tecan Customer Support organization Go to http www tecan com for contact information Prior to contacting Tecan for product support prepare the following information for the best possible technical support see name plate e Model name of your product e Serial number SN of your product e Software and software version if applicable e Description of the problem and contact person e Date and time when the problem occurred e Steps that you have already taken to correct the problem e Your contact information phone number fax number e mail address etc 2 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN A WARNING CAREFULLY READ AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED IN THIS MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING THE INSTRUMENT Notice Every effort has been made to avoid errors in text and diagrams however Tecan Austria GmbH assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in this publication It is the policy of Tecan Austria GmbH to improve products as new techniques and components beco
12. S1 S Samples 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 257 TECAN 14 Application Example Measurement and Evaluation Read plate at a wavelength of 492nm reference at 620nm Blank reader plate on well A1 Concentrations of the Calibrators Standards Calibrator 1 5 UA mL Calibrator 2 10 UA mL Calibrator 3 20 UA mL Calibrator 4 40 UA mL Calibrator 5 80 UA mL Calibrator 6 160 UA mL After the blank correction the optical densities OD492 OD620 are plotted versus the concentration The regression line that goes through these points is the standard curve Interpretation of the test results IgM lt 18 UA mL Negative 18 UA mL lt IgM lt 22 UA mL Intermediate IgM gt 22 UA mL Positive The calculated IgM concentration of both negative controls must be under 8 UA mL Data Handling After the measurement the data file workspace is stored automatically and a report containing the measurement parameters plate layout blanked values standard curve IgM concentrations cutoff definition qualitative results of the samples and validations is created Additionally the layout and the qualitative results are be stored as ASCII file 258 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example 14 2 2 Create a Method In the Wizard List dialog box select Create edit a method and click OK Click next on the Welcome page of the Cre
13. 168 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Graph Spectra Dialog The Graph Spectra dialog box displays the spectrum of a scan measurement Context Sensitive Menu of 2D Spectra Graph By right clicking on the graph a context sensitive menu is displayed Crosshair cursor Copy to Clipboard Save as Bitmap Save as JCAMP DX Save as ASCII Print Printer Setup Zoom to 100 Spectra Data Reduction Spectra Reduced Data Data as Table Spectrum masked Show Prim Spectrum Properties Help A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on particular points on the graph Copies the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Saves the graph as a bitmap Select this command to save the graph as a JCAMP DX 4 24 file Select this button to save the graph as a tab separated ASCII file Opens the Print dialog box from which the graph can be printed Opens the Printer Setup dialog box in which the printer settings can be defined Sets the graph display back to 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph Select this command to change the Spectra Data Reduction parameters settings Select this command to display a list of reduced spectra data Note This command is enabled
14. Copy in ASCIl Format In the Edit menu click Copy in ASCII format or press CTRL C Additionally in sample ID list documents Copy in ASCII format can be accessed via the context sensitive menu Select Copy in ASCII format to copy the data which is contained in the selected wells of the plate layout to the clipboard This function allows transferring the well data to other software applications The copied data can be pasted into any suitable kind of file The necessary options regarding the style of the data which is copied to the clipboard can be defined in the Options dialog box Refer to chapter 11 3 2 Copy Export Options First the relevant wells must be selected with the mouse If more than one non adjacent well field must be selected press the Control key while clicking on the requested fields Once all desired wells are selected the Copy in ASCII format function transfers the well data into the clipboard The data can be pasted into any other software application if the application provides the paste function and accepts data in ASCII format Paste from ASCIl Format In the Edit menu click Paste or press CTRL V The contents of selected data will be pasted from the clipboard using the ASCII data format The function allows the transferring of data from other software applications for example Excel into the wells First the relevant data has to be selected with the mouse in the other software application Then t
15. Custom formulas check box Calibration check box Available results elements Peak parameters Input data Normalized spectrum Wavelength range from 400 nrm to E00 rim Ignore peaks below 0 OD AFU Calculate width and area at 50 OF max intensity Help Use this option to find the peak with the highest intensity within a defined wavelength The threshold OD RFU value and the calculation criteria for calculation of width and area can be defined as well The following data will be calculated for the found path e peak intensity e wavelength of the peak e peak width Select this check box to enter formulas to calculate the spectrum using given functions e g smooth Refer to chapter 13 3 Spectra Data Reduction for further information Transformation must either return a spectrum or a single data for all wells it is not possible to mix both Using this option functions can be defined which are not available in the standard selection E g to find more peaks within a spectrum or to create a derivation of a spectrum Use this check box to calibrate the curve at a certain wavelength using a calibration factor Calibration Parameters Calibration Spectrum Wavelength nm Calibration Factor Heb Eee zeal EA 8l EES _10 a l See Note below when connected to a Safire instrument Available results of all data are listed S is a spectrum V is a val
16. OK button Cancel button Help button This button confirms settings applies and saves changes accordingly and closes the dialog box This button closes the dialog box without saving any changes to settings or documents Click the Help button to open the magellan online help Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Status Bar Information The status bar displays the following information e Current command info e User name of the currently logged in user e Name of connected instrument For example Sunrise e Method measurement mode and unit For example Absorbance OD e Workspace date and time of measurement For example 27 11 2002 14 13 03 Number of selected wells For example 3 well s selected e Keyboard status information activity of the keyboard toggles CAP caps lock NUM Numeric block lock SCRL Scroll lock Instrument connection state icon 2 3 8 The Help Button Click the Help button or press F1 to open the magellan online help The tabs Contents Index and Search are available For further details on using the Windows Help function refer to your Windows instructions of use 2 3 9 The Welcome Dialog Box Each wizard starts with a Welcome dialog box which gives a short introductory description of the procedure to be performed Clear the Show welcome page check box to suppress welcome pages when starting wizards in the
17. The G factor is determined by calibration measurement Select under Reference the appropriate reference identifier and enter the polarization value e Reference blank check box and drop down list If blanks are to be used in the calculation the Reference blank check box has to be selected and the correct identifier has to be chosen from the list Blank reduction Exp group list group box lf the method contains a number of individual experimental groups the desired group can be selected using this option 68 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard No blank reduction option button This option button has to be selected if blank reduction is not to be applied at the measurement Reduce option button Before calculating the polarization values a blank reduction is used All by check box and Identifier drop down list lf all by is checked all measurement values will be reduced by the value of the well as defined by its identifier in the drop down list Except by check box The except by check box defines whose value identifier is to be deducted from the first selected identifier drop down list This setting is used for individual Sample blanking Create a new identifier e g SMB Sample Blank under the identifier group samples in the Identifiers Definition dialog box to use this function Note It is recommended to use always a reference on
18. The calculated concentration lies beneath the lowest standard Multiple points a unique concentration cannot be calculated The calculated concentration lies above the highest standard Input data is not found or calculation error calculation is not possible When viewing transformed data press CTRL SHIFT to display the defined formula in the second line as long as the key is pressed Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 155 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 7 Control Bar Instrument Data The user can select mean values or statistics of the replicates e Raw data absorbance fluorescence intensity or luminescence single wavelength measurement e Measurement data Reference data absorbance dual wavelength only e RFU parallel perpendicular e Raw data statistics mean standard deviation variation coefficient e Raw data as colors e Single raw data as colors for multiple reads per well measurements e Kinetic graph for kinetic measurements The graphs are displayed in the plate layout e Spectrum data for scans e Label 1 2 for multilabel measurements e Count rate for FLT measurements 7 4 8 Control Bar Reduced Data e Difference data Reference data subtracted from Measurement data e Polarization Anisotropy Total Intensity Intensity parallel perpendicular Blank Reduction parallel perpendicular e Blank reduced spectra smoothed spectra peak intensity wav
19. arg1 is available in the quantity specified in arg2 If this is the case a result of TRUE will be given if not FALSE Step by step example eliminate respectively eliminatePerc The only difference between eliminate and eliminatePerc is the way for calculating the limits for the valid range see above The calculation sequence is the same for both functions For the step by step description eliminate is used eliminate NC1 0 15 2 0 2013 08 Individual values NC1_1 0 217 NC1_2 0 439 NC1 0 288 NC1_3 0 208 Step 1 The individual values are sorted by their distance to the average INCI 1 NC1 0 217 0 288 0 071 NC1_ 2 0 439 INCI 2 NC1 0 439 0 288 0 151 NC1_3 0 208 7 gt INC1 3 NC1 0 208 0 288 0 08 NC1_1 0 217 Step 2 Calculation of upper limit 0 288 0 15 0 438 Step 3 first comparison 0 439 gt 0 438 and therefore out of the valid range gt Step 4 value of NC1_2 is eliminated and the average and the limit are recalculated Step 4 New avg 0 217 0 208 2 0 2125 New limit 0 2125 0 15 0 3625 Step 5 second comparison 0 208 lt 0 3625 gt valid 0 217 lt 0 3625 gt valid Result The replicate NC1_2 doesn t fit into the given range and therefore has been eliminated Function returns TRUE because there are still two replicates left Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 241 13 Calculations TECAN Note In each calculation cycle Step 1 to Step
20. cutoff definition QC validation e Data Handling data export printed report automated data handling e Miscellaneous user prompts number format method notes Each of these inputs is invoked with a separate option preferably in this sequence Plate Layout Context Sensitive Menu By right clicking on a well on the plate layout a context sensitive menu for the marked wells is displayed The following commands are available Menu Summary Description Any plate view The Summary dialog box is displayed Refer to chapter 7 4 18 Context Sensitive Menu of a Well Summary Dialog for further information on the Summary dialog box This option is available if a layout has been assigned to the selected well 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 57 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Menu Fill Selection Delete Selection Select all Unused Set Remove Alias TECAN Description Plate Layout mode only f a well or an area of the plate has been marked it can be filled with the respective identifiers The IDs and the color identifiers will be displayed on the plate layout Plate Layout mode only This command will delete the IDs and color identifiers of the selected wells and leave them blank Plate Layout mode only All unused wells of the plate are marked Plate Layout mode only Sets or removes alias designations for the well names see chapter 4 3 2 Method Layout Ho
21. is shown or not The Cutoff Results Selection contains the following elements Cutoff display All defined identifier names are shown in a tree structure selection tree grouped by identifier types Each identifier is associated structure with a check box Selecting or clearing the check box of an identifier name indicates whether the qualitative results of the according wells will be shown or not After evaluation only cutoff results for the selected identifier types are displayed 4 3 13 Evaluate Data QC Validation In the control bar expand Evaluate data and select QC Validation Validations are used to check the validity of a test If the defined criteria are not met an error message will be displayed after the measurement run and no cutoff results will be displayed Except the user has the right to continue evaluation when error see chapters 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker and 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard Upon selecting the correct input data the desired formulas are to be entered in the Validation Conditions list field A formula editor supports the user in the creation of the corresponding mathematical formulas Example If the validation criteria are defined as follows NC1 gt 0 and NC1 lt 0 1 the evaluation will check whether the negative control can be found within the given range If this is not the case an error message will appear The Define QC Validations dialog box contains the following el
22. lt lTestname gt specifies the magellan method name at the well e lt PlatePos gt specifies the well e lt SamplelD gt specifies the magellan Sample ID 1 e lt ControlIName gt specifies the magellan Sample ID 2 e lt Errors gt specifies the magellan Sample ID 3 e lt Errors gt specifies the pipetting flag pipetting errors L B N at position 1 are uncritical for samples but critical for controls verification read and barcode errors are uncritical too Gemini Files csv Description of csv files created by Gemini 3 40 and 3 60 The following is an example of an output file in Excel format Postion Tube1 Seangnor SRCRack SAGPos SACTubeID votume Enor SRCRackID GridPos SteOnGrid TipNumber Detecvol Time Wersion200 Jao Meroe J s O a a 1 Tube 0001 10 13 85mm 3 Tube 0002 ae C 0003 P 85mm KE 0004 EE 013000064 000064 11 11 55 42 42 The L format is H as H The first line contains the column headers which are the same for all formats except for some which support only upper case characters The second line shows information about the rack striprack for which that file was created Only the column Tube ID SRCRack SRCPos SRCTubelD Error SRCRackID GridPos SiteOnGrid and Time are valid With Gemini 3 60 the SRCPos contains the number of x wells the SRCTubelD contains the number of y wells and the Volume contains the line to read 122 Instructions for Use for magellan No 300
23. n 1 n the slopes cannot be estimated by this algorithm Now we have the following conditions for the 3 order interpolation polynomial p I 1 n 1 p x Yi Di Xis1 Vist pi xi m Pi Xin M which are four conditions for each 3 order interpolation polynomial p 13 5 10 LogitLog 250 LogitLog is designed for sigmoid standard curves LogitLog will always produce an S shaped curve The curve will asymptotically reach an upper and a lower limit which can be independently established as the minimum and maximum limits If the user has not established any limits here the minimum and maximum base point value will be used The approximation is always applied to the unscaled base point values A minimum of 4 base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process The parameters A B C and D can be employed as parameters in the transformations In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed Coefficient values A B C and D Average square deviation d Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r correlation of data and fit Restrictions for the Process Application LogitLog and Four Parameter approximation may only be employed when working with standard curves that meet following requirements e Sigmoid process applied to the standard data in relation to the concentrations e Symmetrically generated curve in relation to the
24. text field User rights option buttons Password text field Confirm password text field In this field the full name of the user as it shall be displayed has to be entered Here the user ID the user has to enter for login has to be defined Here has to be determined which level of access to the software s facilities the user will be given e Operator e Application Specialist e Administrator The password of the user has to be entered It must consist of at least 5 characters The password will be required a second time as a precautionary measure For security concerns in this field the password is not shown during entering Every character is displayed as symbol Click the OK button to close the dialog box and the entered settings are saved Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without saving the entered settings Note If no users have been defined at all and the user administration shall be used an administrator has to be defined first Therefore upon clicking the Login button a short message is displayed After that the User Rights dialog box is displayed for entering the user information of the administrator see chapter 2 4 Starting magellan Login Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 5 2 Login This button is only enabled if user administration is activated but Password protection was not selected Ther
25. x i 1 which subtracts each kinetic cycle by the previous But use of that formula would automatically lead to an error for cycle number 1 Therefore set the formula if i gt 0 then x i x i 1 else ignore in the transformation edit field to prevent the subtraction of the first cycle 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 233 TECAN 13 Calculations The use of constants in formulas is identical to all other variables the only difference being that a constant can contain characters f e alpha dilution There are two predefined accessors concx returns the concentration of the standard of the current well dilX returns the dilution of the sample or control of the current well Note If more than one set of input data shall be used for calculations select the appropriate data from the available data drop down list activated in transformation edit fields of the Create edit a method tab refer to chapter 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation and chapter 7 4 9 Control Bar Transformed Data Note Using one of the mathematical functions described in the following chapters an intellisense help is activated to support correct writing of special formulas Formula Operators Operator Description Plus Minus Multiplication Division To the power of the exponent The symbol used to represent the expression to the power of is This character can be ob
26. 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 5 Connecting an Instrument magellan can be run either with an instrument connected or in a demo mode simulating an instrument connected 2 5 1 Instrument Connected Connect the instrument to your computer as described in the instructions for use for the instrument and switch on the instrument before starting magellan First Start of magellan The first time magellan is started the Setup Port dialog box appears Setup Port Instrument Ok Select SUNRISE O Find ary Cancel L ox Cira Fort Select Find any Find ary oo _ Demo mode Stacker port Select Find ary F m os ta Find any _ Mone m 3 Demo mode Instrument In the Instrument group box select the connected instrument from the drop down list or select Find any Port Select the appropriate COM port from the drop down list or select Find any and Click OK If the connection was successful a Dialog is displayed with Information which instrument is connected to which port The instrument is now connected and ready for operation using the magellan software Stacker Port If a Tecan Connect stacker is used together with the instrument select the connecting port from the drop down list or select Find any If no stacker is used select None for the stacker port Change Instrument Click the miscellaneous icon c in the wizard list and instrument control in the misc
27. 3 9 TECAN Teo PeU MIATA AUS esri ira E E ETE 199 11 3 2 Copy Export Options cccccccccsecccsesecseeesseeeeeseseesneeseneeseaes 200 11 3 3 Plate View Settings ccccccccccsesccseeccsesesssesesnsessnsessseseeees 202 11 3 4 Miscellaneous o oanonnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnennennnne 203 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker ccsesssesseeeeeees 205 11 4 1 Add Modify User magellan Tracker cccscccssecsseecseeeeaes 206 T42 Add Mody ROl ee T rena ere ee 208 11 4 3 User Administration Audit Trail ccccccccsccssecssecnseeneeeneees 209 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker cccccccscccsssccseesensessesenaes 209 11 4 5 User Administration OPTIONS cccccccseeceeeeecesecsneeseneesanes 213 11 4 6 User Administration SUIMMALY csccccsecccseeeesneeessneeseneseees 216 11 5 User Administration magellan Standard cccsseseseeeeees 217 11 5 1 Add Modify User magellan Stand ard cccccccccsesessseeeees 218 le e LO rc ceca race aes geo pes se eee ee 219 11 5 3 Change OS CP vosiac cred stdenvenasvacvbestdeauvadivancedisvadevedsnessedeenenaeel 219 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard ccccccccsesersvseseneesenes 219 11 6 Aboul IMAG CUA osireseenincuicsentincunisenatceeweseaeeeucesessacousewcaksesseounseesteeencenes 221 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker cc sseeseeseee 223 12 1 User AAMINnIistration cccccceeceeee
28. 30066407 Rev No 1 3 119 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard DD1 Files dd1 These files consist of lines which contain parameters of a fixed length The format is First line Date DD MM YY Second line Time HH MM SS Field Pos Length Format Description number 001 049 4 23 Alphanumeric ControIName 36 43 Alphanumeric PlatelD 44 51 Alphanumeric PlatePos 52 55 Alphanumeric The lines are separated by CR LF aa Sampled 2435 12 Aphanumerc so so aooo 3 20 12 4 Example 13 04 1999 11 01 32 essek ee o asese er a asese O er oao osotesti KBR O er asese er ao 0001 Interpretation When magellan is processing a dd1 file e Number of sample IDs is set to 1 e lt lTestname gt specifies the magellan method name at the well e lt PlatePos gt specifies the well e lt SamplelD gt or lt ControlIName gt specifies the magellan sample ID e lt Errors gt specifies the pipetting flag L Liquid error C Clot error E Manually entered When a dd1 file is read the current layout will be modified using the layout defined in the different methods where the names are specified in the dd1 file The final layout will be handled like strip methods 120 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Hamilton Files pro These files consist of lines that contain the sample ID and the well name A
29. 30066407 Rev No 1 3 39 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Click Next and the registration information is displayed Register Magellan four Registration Request Info USER ADDRESS Test User Tecan Austria Untersbergstr la 082 Grodig Austria APPLICATION Magellan 6 O O 52 WORKSTATION 4Wosc 22zso0vRu Cancel Click E Mail Form to send the information using the default e mail program on your computer or click Print Form to print out the registration form for faxing or mailing it to Tecan Click View Form to view the registration form using WordPad or Notepad Within 24 hours you will receive the license number Click Next and the Registration requested window appears Register Magellan Registration requested You successfully created and sent a Magellan registration form When you have received your license number start the Registration wizard again and register Magellan on your computer Finishing Licensing magellan After having received the license number of Tecan repeat the steps above and insert the license number Click Next The registration wizard then confirms the license number and summarizes the user information Click Finish the Register magellan wizard will close and magellan s functions will remain fully available to the user 40 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings 3 Instrument Co
30. 4 only one replicate is deleted the replicate with the highest distance to the average The cycle is repeated until no replicate is deleted during the comparison step within the cycle 13 4 7 Other Functions ignore isInvalid This function omits the values of chosen wells so they will not be incorporated into the calculations Ignored values are displayed with a leading and handled like eliminated values Example if x lt 0 9 SM1_ 1 then ignore This function gives a Boolean value whether values within the well are valid or not Invalid values for example can be caused by overflow values of the reader Example if isInvalid then x 3 0 If the well contains an invalid value the value 3 0 will be assigned In this way further calculations are possible in spite of such values calcAlways argument concX 242 This function enables to calculate formulas on wells independent of the state of the value argument can be any valid formula The formula will be calculated even if the value is masked or invalid This function can be used to calculate results that do not depend on the value of the used well Example calcAlways A The value of parameter A of the standard curve formula is returned This function can be used in concentration transformations The result of concxX is the original concentration of the well and can therefore only be used in wells with standards as identifier Example x c
31. 650 1 50 area function Delivers the area of a peak e g area peak0 5 450 650 1 50 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 243 13 Calculations TECAN 13 4 9 Examples Transformations Cutoff 244 Transformations modify the current value of the well The result must always be a numerical value Blank reduction x BL1 The empty value blank will be deducted from the current value of the well Blanking of a kinetic run x x 0 The value of first point of the kinetic is used as blank and will be deduced from the values of all kinetic cycles Note The index 0 represents the first measurement of a kinetic run Ratio x PC1 100 Calculates the ratio between a sample and a control in percentages DNA Protein ratio Label1 x Label2 x In order to calculate the DNA protein ratio a multilabel measurement must be defined The first measurement uses a wavelength of 260 nm the second measurement uses a wavelength of 280 nm Conditional result If x lt 0 0 then 0 else x If the value of the well is less than 0 it will be represented by 0 otherwise it remains unchanged The cutoff dictates the limits to be applied when evaluating The result must always be a numerical value Label POS Limit NC1 1 15 Label Limit NC1 0 85 Label The result is positive POS when the absorbance is more than 15 above the average of the negative controls and nega
32. CA USA Windows MS DOS Visual Basic and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Redmond WA USA Hamamatsu is a registered trademark of HAMAMATSU Photonics K K IR Hamamatsu City Japan NUNC and Matrix are registered trademarks of Thermo Fisher Scientific Waltham MA USA Polyfiltronics is a registered trademark of Whatman International Ltd Dynex Is a registered trademark of Magellan Biosciences Chelmsford MA USA Labsystem is a registered trademark of Labsystem kft Budapest Hungary BRET DeepBlueC and PerkinElmer are registered trademarks of PerkinElmer Inc Waltham Massachusetts USA Chroma Glo is a registered trademark of Promega Corporation Madison WI 53711 USA MycoAlert is a registered trademark of Cambrex Corporation East Rutherford Nu USA Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Warnings Cautions and Notes The following types of notices are used in this publication and highlight important information or warn the user of a potentially dangerous situation Note Gives helpful information Caution Indicates a possibility of instrument damage or data loss if instructions are not followed WARNING INDICATES THE POSSIBILITY OF SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY LOSS OF LIFE OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 5 TECAN Table
33. E OE 183 Password EXPIrAUOI ee ee ee ae ees 215 DTC FAS ioe deco ee E 214 Paste from ASCII Format seeen 153 Paste in ASCII Format cccccsseeeeeeeeeees 117 PANG ic 0 ee E ee 199 Plate geometry editor cceccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 PAG AV OU alan dondy Acinaecs sotiarvimtnan A 60 284 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Plate Layout WINdOW cccccseeeeeeeees 57 154 Plate to Plate QC ceceeecccccssessseeeeeeeees 88 149 Plate View SettingS ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 202 Plate View Tab cccceccccsececcsseesseeeeeeeeeesaaees 202 PointwiseCV argquMe nt ccseseceeeeeseeeeees 238 Polarization Data Reduction 68 230 PNM anere A E AE E 149 Print Preview cccceececcescecseeeeceeeeseeeeeseaees 149 Printed Report ccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 93 Printer SetU coenen enin eranen eE 149 Printout POINT esnean ni 149 Q QC Validation cieccecececeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeaes 87 163 Qualitative RESUItS ccceeeseeseeeeeeeeeees 162 Quantitative ELISA Example 008 257 R Reader Compatibility ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 Recalculate with another Method 154 Reduced Data cccccccccesssseeeeeeseeseeeeeesaeeees 156 Register Wizard ccccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeens 221 Registration fOr cccccsssseeeceess
34. Extrapolation is not possible There are no parameters for use as variables in the transformations Mathematical Description Interpolation function features Piecewise polynomial of order 3 Continuous second derivation at all base points Xn d f 2 gt ax a dx Minimizes the integral deformation energy of a spline Not a knot condition at x and x also the third derivation is continuous which is a simplified term for the The Akima interpolation creates in some cases a smoother curve as the spline interpolation A minimum of 3 base points is required for this calculation Extrapolation is not possible There are no parameters for use as variables in the transformations Mathematical Description This interpolation method uses piecewise polynomials of order 3 The piecewise interpolation polynomial itself and its first derivation are continuous Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 249 13 Calculations TECAN Method The slopes m at all base points are estimated from the neighbor points by a special function q VTI a Xi i_1 are the slopes of the linear interpolator between point i and point i 1 i 2 n _ qi di2 Z aina 144i ld ai Iisa iar 1419 q i 3 n 2 Special cases IS qi qin SEt DP Xi qi Aer Is q1 Qi and qr LIQu2 SO is y q analog for Qhi Quo He Gi Gist IS q1 Gand q1 Aino Set 2 For the indexes 1 2
35. File extension In the File extension field the file extension is displayed and the field is disabled Note Using this feature in the Create Edit a method wizard the file extension field is enabled and the file extension has to be specified Column separator Select the column separator used in the file The row combo box separator must be CR LF Enter a number greater than 1 if header lines shall be ignored 124 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Example Assume following settings Plate type e 2 rows e 3columns Format e column separator Tabulator e start with line 2 e column 1 Plate position A1 A2 e column 2 Sample ID 1 column 3 pipetting status Tecan custom fle o v EXPERT S KNOW HOW IMPORT SAMPLE IDS FROM SAMPLE TRACKING CSV The option Investigate Checksum is available for the import of Sample IDs from sample tracking csv only Note G These Sample ID files have to be imported as custom format files The checksum is part of the file When importing such a list the checksum is verified by magellan The import fails if the list has been manipulated in some way afterwards error Failed to load Checksum incorrect For performing the checksum verification select Investigate checksum in the Custom Format dialog 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 125
36. Finish to end installation and to close the setup program The software can be started via the Windows Start menu by selecting Magellan The setup program automatically detects a previous installation of magellan The old version has to be de installed before being able to install a new Magellan version The de installation can be performed automatically by using the installation wizard see also chapter 1 5 5 Automatic Software Removal Note It is very important that the person who installs the software has administrator rights on the computer 18 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 1 Introduction Note If an older version of magellan is to be installed the currently installed version has to be completely de installed before the older version can be installed from scratch 1 5 2 Installation Qualification IQ It is recommended to use the automatic installation qualification program to check that the installation of magellan was successful start Magellan IQ exe from the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt Tecan gt Magellan IQ or directly from the file system in the default installation path specified in the setup program typically C Program Files Tecan Magellan The installation qualification program automatically detects the installed version of magellan Click Check to start the installation qualification The IQ tool shows the state of all installed compone
37. Formula and Remove Formula s which are available from the context sensitive menu These actions have to be performed for all wells which shall contain transformations Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 75 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 2 EXPERT S KNOW HOW DEFINE CONSTANTS Use the Define Constants dialog box to define the constant values of a method These constants can be used wherever a formula can be entered Click the OK button to save the edited parameters The Define Constants dialog box contains the following elements Constants list In each row a constant can be defined The rows are divided into 4 columns e Name In the Name text field an appropriate identifier name for the constant for example a code or an abbreviation must be entered Only letters can be used e Value In the Value text field a numerical value must be allocated to the constant e Comment Enter a short comment to the constant e Req required The Req check box indicates that a measurement can only be launched on receipt or confirmation of the value for the constant 4 3 8 Kinetic Kinetic Data Reduction In the control bar expand Kinetic and select Kinetic data reduction The dialog box is structured in tabs Slopes Onsets Min Max Area Available output data Enzyme kinetics The unit of the values is displayed according to the selected measurement mode for example OD for absorbance Use
38. IC 50 value Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN A 2013 08 13 Calculations e n order to calculate the curve correctly it is necessary to have a concentration value of zero and a value of infinite standard concentration saturated value so that the asymptotes can be determined If these two values are not present within the standard curve they can be defined manually using the More standard curve parameters option Min Max If no Min and Max values are defined magellan will base the process on the smallest and largest values present respectively WARNING IF THESE REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT MET APPROXIMATION OF THIS NATURE CANNOT BE CORRECTLY EMPLOYED Mathematical Description The LogitLog regression is a function f x x gt R A D m B 1 C for the description of sigmoid correlation of data The parameter can be interpreted as A lim f x x gt 0 D lim f x x00 A D f Q 5 A D are determined as the minimum respectively maximum or vice versa if the function is decreasing Then the linear regression problem is solved for transformed base points xB D X 1og x D y D A Y In n _D y D A 2 X Y gt R Xt gt k x d minimizing the error function err k d X 8x Y i l The parameters B C are determined from k d B m log e b C e The parameters A B C D have appealing geometric interpre
39. In the control bar expand Concentrations and click Standard Curve Use this option to set up standard curves for quantitative tests The standard curve dialog box contains various settings concerning the analysis type the axes and the display of the standard curve The editable fields and elements are grouped in 5 different tabs This tab stipulates some basic settings like the input data source Exp group spin control Input data drop down list Standards from layout option button Standards from ext file option button Standards from exp group option button No standard curve option button Additional Concentrations button If several tests are to be performed on one plate the Experiment group must be selected If the plate contains only one test then the spin control will not be displayed For each experiment group the input data can be defined individually Select the Input data to be used for the standard curve Select measurement data or any available transformation results Calculate the standard curve from the standards on the layout If the selected experimental group contains no standards a standard curve can be loaded from a std file This option can save time by allowing the user to evaluate a number of plates on the basis of one saved standard curve The Select button must be clicked to select the file lf the selected experimental group contains no standards a standard curve from another exp
40. Intensity Calculation The vertical and horizontal intensities of the raw data or the result of the blank reduction are then determined using the G factor IP G ARFU I ARFU 13 2 5 Calculation of the Polarization Anisotropy Total Intensity The following data is calculated using the intensities Polarization Toe _ eas a kee n Ea Anisotropy per _ ye Jaar Total Intensity Lao DA Note i Polarization and Anisotropy are displayed in units of mP Total Intensity is displayed in units of RFU 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 231 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 3 Spectra Data Reduction Spectra data contains much more information than single wavelength measurements Typical information extracted from spectra are intensities at specified wavelengths or at found peaks During calculation it is also possible to calculate spectral blank reduction and ratio calculation 13 3 1 Mathematical Description Blank reduction is performed by subtracting the blank spectrum from the sample spectrum Smoothing is done with the Savitzky Golay algorithm The filter coefficients are calculated by a polynomial with degree 2 The smooth factor is treated as number of points g ae where npa n_ 1 number of points The smoothing window is symmetrical e g for a smooth factor of 5 n_ 2 nR 2 For the lower and upper border of the spectrum the window is asymmetrical thus n 0 nR
41. Login The Login dialog box is displayed A user can log in with button his user name User list All currently setup users are displayed within this list There are two columns in the list e User name The user names are displayed e Rights This column displays the rights of the corresponding user Administrator Application Specialist or Operator Any user to be edited or deleted can be selected here Add User The Add User button opens the User Rights dialog box button in which a password name and user ID can be entered to define a new user 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 217 11 Miscellaneous Icon Modify button Disable button Password protection on off check box TECAN The Modify button opens the User Rights dialog box for modifying the selected user in the user list The Disable button will disable the selected user in the current user list He can no more user the application This check box has to be selected to enable or disable the software s password protection facility If enabled the Login dialog box will be displayed upon starting magellan 11 5 1 Add Modify User magellan Standard This dialog allows adding or editing of users and assigning them to a User group For the rights of different user groups see chapter 11 5 4 User Rights magellan 218 Standard The User Rights dialog box contains the following elements User name text field UserlD
42. Minimum difference between gt 6mm plate height and skirt height 9 3 Hardware Connections See chapter 3 Unpacking and Installation in the Instructions for Use for Connect for complete details about the hardware connections for the reader stacker and computer 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 175 TECAN 9 Batch Processing 9 4 Working with Tecan Readers For Infinite Series Readers see 9 5 Working with Infinite Series Readers 9 4 1 Software Connections If you want to use the Connect stacker with Tecan readers select the Stacker port in the Setup Port dialog box to which the Connect stacker is connected Or choose Find any to let the software search for a Connect stacker and click OK refer to chapter 2 5 4 Connecting a Stacker Setup Port Instrument Select SAFIFE II vw ok C Find any OF Port Select Serial COM J Find any C Demo mode Stacker port Select Serial COM C Find ary Demo mode 9 4 2 Prepare for Batch Processing Measurement Parameter Read Barcode In the Create Edit a Method wizard refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard tabs of the Measurement Parameter dialog box might contain different parameter settings depending on the type of instrument connected Measurement Parameter SAFIRE II Simulation pop General Plate Stacker Wavelengths Meas Params Temperature Shaking Measurement mode Flu
43. RAM 2 GB RAM Windows 7 64 bit 2 GB RAM 4 GB RAM Windows 8 82 bit 1 GB RAM 2 GB RAM Windows 8 64 bit 2 GB RAM 4 GB RAM Space 1 GB 2 GB Requirements Resolution 1024 x 600 1280 x 1024 25 Color Depth 256 Mouse Microsoft mouse or compatible pointing device Communication 1x USB 2 0 2 x USB 2 0 1 x RS232 Serial Devices 1 x CD ROM drive Windows Vista DirectX 9 graphics and 128 MB of graphics memory plus WDDM support Windows 7 DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM 1 0 or higher driver Windows 8 DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM driver Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 lf this version is not present the install upgrade program will install it side by side with any existing installations of the NET Framework Windows 3 1 Installer If this version is not present the install upgrade program will install it 16 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 1 Introduction minimum SSSS CRecommended Microsoft Excel 2002 2003 2007 2010 Only 32 bit editions supported Starter editions NOT supported 1 4 3 Reader Compatibility The following Tecan readers can be used with magellan 2013 08 Instrument Types Measurement Mode DNA Expert Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence GENios Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence GENios FL Fluorescence GENios Plus Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence
44. Recovery In order to repair a damaged magellan installation after a hardware failure it is important to start the data backup ahead of time System Recovery with Data Backup Software The data backup is usually performed with data backup software This makes it possible to save the entire system including all data so it can be restored whenever needed A detailed description and precise user instructions can be found in Windows Help for Windows backup software packages or in the provided documentation The magellan license is tied to the computer s hardware which means it can become invalid after a hardware change You should therefore check to make sure your license is still valid after a system restoration This can be done in the About Magellan dialog box by starting the registration wizard and checking whether the registered serial number and license number are still valid In case of an error message please contact Tecan s customer support to get a new license number Manual System Recovery Data Security 20 In those cases where a complete system restoration is not possible with the backup software e g because the hardware changes are too extensive or because a different version of the Windows operating system was installed on the new computer magellan has to be re installed and several files have to be copied from a backup archive In that case the system restoration process consists of these steps 1 Install m
45. SM1_24 ETEA SmM1_32 s Difference data j i i i2 1 2 1 2 Difference data Difference data as Colors Measurement parameters SUNRISE Measurement mode Absorbance Measurement wavelength 492 nm Reference wavelength 620 nm FINISH Gg Cancel lt lt lt Back 2004 Tecan In each single well the calculated value is displayed Depending on the selected item in the control bar the plate layout window changes correspondingly Parameters and settings can be changed using the items in the control bar If the method is to be modified click on the Edit method tab 274 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example Click in the well with the right mouse key and the context sensitive menu appears SMi_10 SMi_14 SMi_18 SUM y Edit Mask Unmask selection Show Hide layout Selecting Summary the following window is displayed providing detailed information of the definition and the settings of the chosen well Well B4 HE Method layout Identifier Liquid Alias Replicate Dilution Multilabel data reduction Transormation formulals Kinetic transformation formulas i Concentration transtormation formulals Strip method names Zh Instrument data ae Reduced data LA Averages dig Transtormed data ig Concentrations ake Cutoff results L amp Statistics Expand All Click Finish in the plate layout window and the Save as dialog box appe
46. Save button Cancel button Help button The Back button is used to navigate back to the previous window within a wizard When the window is the active area click lt lt lt Back or press SHIFT B to navigate back to the previous window The Next button is the large green arrow in the bottom right corner and is used to navigate forward to the next window within a wizard When the window is the active area click Next or press SHIFT N or ENTER to navigate forward to the next window The Finish button is the large green arrow in the bottom right corner and is used to navigate forward to the save window of the wizard When the window is the active area click Next or press SHIFT N or ENTER to navigate forward to the next window The Save button is only found in the last window of a wizard and replaces the Next button The Save button is a large green arrow in the bottom right corner It is used to close the wizard and save all changes or to start a process When the window is the active area click Save or press ENTER to close a wizard and to save all changes The Cancel button is used to close a wizard without saving any changes to settings or documents When the window is the active area click Cancel or press ESC to close a wizard without saving any changes The Help button opens the help window When the window is the active area click Help or press F1 to open the help window Standard Elements of Microsoft Windows 30
47. TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard 5 2 4 Saving the Sample ID List Click Next in the Import Edit a Sample ID List window and the Save as window appears in which the created or modified sample ID list can be saved magellan Tracker Save in O smp Remarks Status Filename Candiga Fle emai P sample ID list Audi tail comment demo purpose Audit trail magellan Standard Save in O C Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents T ecan M agellan smp Tecan Remarks G Def iControl H LogFiles Magellan asc mth O smp B V6 4 O wsp H Magellan_ G Magellan_ O Magellan_ Magellan_ H Magellan_ Magellan_ R Manellan lt gt lt Filename Bo o eee Sample ID list demo purpose 2007 Tecan 126 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard The Save as window contains the following elements Filename field File remarks field Audit trail comment field Audit trail button This field is intended for entering or modifying the file name of the sample ID list smp The File remarks field allows adding some comments to the file which will be displayed for example in the Open File dialog boxes The Audit trail comment field allows adding some comments which will be stored in the audit trail only available for magellan Tracker Displays the audit t
48. a filename in the text field Path group box select the path where the sample ID list is stored e Sample ID list default path option button e Use path option button Select any path Format group box Select the format of the sample ID list to be loaded see chapter 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID List for details e Autodetect from the list of supported formats option button e Custom file format option button Click the File format button to open the Custom Format dialog box Note If an only partly filled sample ID list is loaded automatically all unused samples are automatically deleted from the layout If a final control e g in well H12 has been defined within the layout this control is automatically moved to the well after the last used sample well Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Note Automatically loaded sample ID lists should contain only IDs for samples and must not contain IDs for non samples controls standards etc More Workspace Name Selecting Save workspace More the Workspace Name dialog box appears It contains the following elements Format group box Prefix text field Example text field Set as default button Restore default button More Export to LIS One of the offered option buttons has to be selected for defining the default workspace name The name can consist of the date counter or a certain
49. a n 1 n 3 The Apply button applies the selected mathematical concentration calculation to the wells as displayed in the table with Identifier and Concentration Dilution columns Calculate ICx check box Displays a dilution graph of the sample and automatically calculates the ICx values This requires samples with at least 4 replicates and at least 4 different dilutions defined see chapter Expert s Know How below for further details Input Data drop down list Select from the drop down list the input data Calculation Condition text field The intercept will be calculated with the entered percentage of the maximum value respectively maximum value minus minimum value see chapter Expert s Know How below for further details ICx name text field Data can be selected for ICx calculation The name is filled in automatically based on the calculation condition Set 0 value to Intensity 0 see chapter Expert s Know How below for further details Min intensity of dilution series see chapter Expert s Know How below for further details Dilution can be edited directly in the plate layout window by right mouse clicking in one or more selected wells In this way it is possible to assign different dilution values to replicates 66 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Y EXPERT S KNOW HOW ICx CALCULATION The mathematical calculation of
50. an existing sample ID list and save it with the same name Sign sample ID lists Sign an existing sample ID list for review approval Reserved for future use Modify signed sample ID lists Edit or change sample IDs in a signed sample ID list Reserved for future use Method Create methods Create a new method or save an existing one with a new name Edit methods Edit an existing method and save it with the same name Modify signed methods Edit a signed method and save it with the same name Run unsigned methods Run methods that haven t been signed Note Each signature review approval custom allows operators to run those cop Setup favorites Add Remove methods from the favorite list Define multilabel measurement Define methods using multilabel measurements Yes Yes No Define kinetic transformations Define methods using kinetic transformations Yes Yes No Define concentration transformations Define methods using concentration transformations Yes Yes No Define alias Define methods using aliases for identifiers Yes Yes No 210 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon magellan magellan Application magellan Administrator Specialist Operator Workspace Create workspaces Perform a measurement and save the workspace with a new name or save an existing workspace with a new name Yes Yes Yes Edit workspace
51. are intended for this identifier The selected wells are then filled with the entered number of replicates Therefore the number of selected wells must be a multiple of the entered number of replicates e All option button All selected wells are defined as replicates of one identifier If an existing ID number for the samples and standards is chosen the selected wells are then added as replicates to the existing replicates With all other identifier tyoes the selected wells are added as replicates to the existing replicates Two Arrow buttons define the direction of counting up the replicate number Fill section If an area of the plate has been marked it can be filled with button the respective identifiers The IDs and the color of the identifiers will be displayed on the plate layout Delete section Click Delete or press DEL to delete the IDs and color button identifiers of the selected wells and leave them blank Define identifier Click Def identif if a new identifier is to be defined or if an button existing identifier is to be edited see Expert s Know How Define a New Identifier Assign Alias to the Required Well To assign alias designations for defined well names click the right mouse button in the required well select Set Remove Alias and choose an alternative identifier name in the drop down list The alias is marked with an asterisk and has same experimental group ID number and replicate number as the primarily
52. are recorded in the user management audit trail written by the user management server 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker 2013 08 There are three different security levels of user rights the highest level of which is magellan Administrator who has access to all program functions The Application Specialist and Operator levels are increasingly limited magellan Standard The default rights are assigned as stated below magellan Tracker Each right can be assigned or withdrawn by an Administrator and by default are assigned as stated below The default set of rights is based on a typical laboratory environment Caution Administrators have the responsibility to make sure that the settings and any modifications match the laboratory environment defined by the user SOPs standard operating procedures and comply with applicable laws Note For clinical diagnostic applications the operating authority must validate all methods to ensure the safety of the results A method is considered validated when signed by the operating authority The operating authority is fully responsible for any results obtained Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 209 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon magellan magellan Application magellan Administrator Specialist Operator Sample ID List Create sample ID lists Create a new sample ID list or save an existing one with a new name Edit sample ID lists Edit
53. audit trail as necessary only available for magellan Tracker Saves the workspace file using the name entered in the filename field Click this button to open the Export dialog see chapter 4 3 14 Data Handling Data Export Use to view the Audit Trail of the file only available for magellan Tracker Refer to chapter 4 4 Saving the Method Audit trail for further information Use to view the signatures attached to this file only available for magellan Tracker Refer to chapter 4 4 Saving the Method for further information Select Sign this workspace now to open the Attach Signature wizard only available for magellan Tracker The Evaluate Results wizard is finished by pressing the FINISH button In case of unsaved changes a message box appears asking the user to perform the saving An additional Save button is available for saving the data without closing the wizard Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 171 TECAN 8 Attach Signature Wizard 8 1 Introduction Signatures are essential in assuring trustworthy records Electronic signatures and electronic records have come to carry the same force and effect as handwritten signatures and records Several signatures can be applied to one record and are always included in the printed report Signed records can only be modified by users with the appropriate rights It is possible to fully control the use of methods by allowing users to run on
54. available with magellan Tracker The Audit Trail dialog box appears This option is only available with magellan Tracker The Organize Favorites dialog box appears See chapter 6 5 Start Favorite Organize Favorites The Signature dialog box appears This option is only available with magellan Tracker Enter a method password if you want to protect the method to be saved see chapter 4 4 1 Password Protection of Methods The method will be run immediately after having finished the wizard Click Audit Trail to view the Audit Trail dialog box Audit Trail User Date Administrator Admin 17 10 2005 15 11 14 Created lt Print preview Action Comment test of quantitative example pK J Cances Hep The audit trail shows a list of all modifications made to the method Each entry consists of the user name and full name date and time of change whether the file was created or modified and any audit trail comments Click Print preview to get a preview of the file To compare a method with its previous versions a printout must be made because two print preview windows cannot be opened simultaneously 272 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example 14 2 3 Run the Method lf Run this method now is selected in the Save as dialog box of the Create edit a method wizard the Start Measurement Wizard Start Measuremen
55. box Data source and destination lists Append button Insert button Import button Remove button Up and Down buttons Properties button Select whether the data is to be printed in the form of a matrix or in the form of a list e List The individual list format horizontal vertical sorted and alternating must be configured in the properties dialog see below e Matrix The matrix selection prints the data in a 2 dimensional list matrix Two lists are used to define the printed data e Available data list List of all available data which can be printed Page breaks and dividing lines can be added in order to achieve the preferred layout Elements to be printed can be selected by double clicking they are listed in the selected data list e Selected data list List of all selected data which will be printed Informative notes also help to give an awareness as to how the data will be printed for example whether the data will be displayed in form of a matrix a list as data collection or as a graph Entries that appear under a heading will be incorporated into the corresponding list or matrix format providing possibilities to compare different sets of values for example measurement values and results Click this button to transfer data highlighted in the Available data window to the Selected data window You can also use drag and drop Use this option to display two pieces of similarly formatted d
56. button to resize the displayed plate layout to show 10 of the plate layout on the full screen 100 button Click this button to resize the displayed plate layout to show 100 of the plate layout on the full screen Zoom check box When the Zoom check box is selected the required wells on the plate layout can be marked and the labeled wells are automatically enlarged to fit into the full screen Measurement If the measurement is a kinetic measurement the cycle drop down desired measurement cycle can be selected in the drop list down list Data Information Window 146 Click for example Miscellaneous data in the Evaluate Results tab to view the corresponding information in the Data Information window Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 Evaluate Results Tab All available data set names are displayed in the Available Data control bar There are several different viewing options e Selected data that presents a value for each well is displayed in the plate layout window It can be viewed as values or in pseudo colors together with a colors scale e Kinetic data can be viewed as a small graph in each well e Selected data that presents a data collection which cannot be assigned to a single well is displayed in the data information window f e QC Validation criteria e Ifa graph standard curve kinetics enzyme kinetics dilution series multilabel
57. can be determined A minimum of 2 base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process In an evaluation with one experimental group the coefficients A and B serve as variables in the transformations Furthermore the correlation coefficient r may also be implemented The approximation is always applied to the unscaled base point values Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 247 13 Calculations A TECAN In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed Formula with coefficient values A and B Average square deviation d Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r WARNING THIS APPROXIMATION IS NOT CONTINUOUS AND THEREFORE IMPROPER DATA CAN EFFECT HUGE DEVIATIONS BETWEEN THE GIVEN BASE POINTS AND CALCULATED POINTS Mathematical Description Approximation function f lx x b 3 R Xk B x where A and B are determined by solving the linear regression problem for the transformed base points x x x X 1 Yn Linear regression g x x OR xt gt k x d minimizing n xX err k d X 8x 5 i l Yi The parameters A and B are calculated from k and d by l d A and B k k This function f is not continuous at B 13 5 7 Polynomial 248 2 order parabolic or quadratic 3 order cubic The user can select between a polynomial of order 2 calculation or a po
58. defined well This feature is used if e g the 0 Standard is also used as Negative control 62 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard if k 2 EXPERT S KNOW HOW DEFINE A NEW IDENTIFIER In the Well Assignment dialog box click Def Identif to define a new identifier or edit an existing one Define Identifiers Identifier out Type Sample els Abbreviation SM Description Sample aj Reference Standard Control Set as default Restore default The identifiers are listed in groups see table below Highlighting an identifier its properties are displayed in the right window Standard identifiers are Sample SM Sample Blank BL Blank BF Polarization reference buffer Reference RF Polarization reference Standard ST Standard Control PC Positive control NC Negative control LPC Low positive control HPC High positive control CL Calibrator The Define Identifiers dialog box contains the following elements Identifier tree A structured view of all existing identifiers their colors structure and abbreviations is offered in a small window The identifiers are listed under the groups Sample Blank Reference Standard and Control Identifier group box The criteria held by the various identifiers used in the program will be displayed If new identifiers are required they can be inserted here In the Identifier
59. during the course of one day 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 203 11 Miscellaneous Icon 204 Language group box Set button Change password button Add HUIDs button Options and default settings audit trail button Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 TECAN The text field displays the applied language A different language can be selected from the drop down list See Set below select a different language and click the Set button to restart the program with the selected language Click this button to open a dialog box where the user can change his password only available with magellan User Administration activated A list of additional HUIDs can be defined which allows the user to open files created on another computer only available in magellan Tracker Click this button to show the audit trail for options and default settings The audit trail can be saved to an ASCII file only available in magellan Tracker Click Save as file to save this information as a log or txt file The text can also be copied to a word processing program for printing 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker There are three types of administrators mentioned in this publication System Administrator is responsible for any changes made to the computer s operating system The Administrator is responsible for
60. field The start time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number must be entered here End field The end time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number must be entered here The start and end time can be typed into the provided text fields otherwise the whole kinetic is analyzed Time Points option buttons If Time is selected the start and end time is entered in hours minutes and seconds If Points is selected the start and end point for the analysis is given through the entered kinetic cycle number Start field The start time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number has to be entered here End field The end time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number has to be entered here Points text field Select for how many points the maximum slope calculation is performed The mean slope option determines the mean slope mean increase decrease throughout the defined interval A start and an end time must first be entered All measurement points that fall within the interval of the slope will be determined and then from these details the mean slope will be formed The mean slope is defined as the arithmetical mean of the slopes that are calculated from the center points of two adjacent measurement points The kinetics data made available through this method includes the mean slope per second per minute and per hour as well as the correlation coefficient and the goodness of fit 2013 08 Instructions fo
61. for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 Select the document type for conversion e Sample ID list e Method e Workspace Click this button to select all displayed files in the file list All files available for conversion are displayed Click a file to select it for conversion By holding the Shift key multiple file selections are possible The Source path edit field contains the path where the files to be converted are stored Click the button on the right of the text field to change the path The Destination path edit field contains the path where the converted files are stored Click the button on the right of the text field to change the path Click this button to start conversion Select from the drop down menu the version of magellan the files shall be converted to This bar shows the progress of the conversion 195 11 Miscellaneous Icon gt 11 2 5 Convert From TECAN WARNING THE FILES MAY CONTAIN FEATURES THAT ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED FORMAT THESE FEATURES ARE THEN UNAVAILABLE In the File handling dialog box click Convert From to open the Convert Documents dialog box The Convert Documents Convert from dialog box allows to convert magellan files from previous versions to the current file format Standard magellan files can also be converted to magellan Tracker files ooE Note Files for conversion are displayed only if magellan is connected with th
62. from graph dialog boxes Click the buttons next to the text fields to open a buttons standard Window dialog box where a different path for the generated files can be selected Change default data Only available in magellan Tracker Click this button path button to change the default data path for saving workspaces methods sample ID lists and standard curves files magellan Administrator and System Administrator rights are necessary to modify default data paths 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 199 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon WARNING THE SOFTWARE MAY NOT BE ABLE TO ASSIGN THE CORRECT FILE SYSTEM RIGHTS FOR A USER DEFINED DEFAULT DATA PATH THIS MUST BE DONE MANUALLY BY THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR DELETING OR MODIFYING FILES IN THE DEFAULT DIRECTORIES MUST NOT BE ALLOWED modified Note G In magellan Tracker only the Export and the Bitmap paths can be 11 3 2 Copy Export Options In a workspace document the Edit Copy and Edit Copy to Excel commands allow the user to export measurement data to the clipboard or directly into an Excel worksheet In the Copy tab is specified in which way the content of a plate is handled in case of a data transfer Paths Copy Plate View Miscellaneous Matris format O Rows in vertical order Spectra as columns Add rows coluron labels Fluor style Copy to clipboard options Point t n Comma 22 Copy to E
63. future 2 3 10 Shortcuts List SHIFT B Back button SHIFT N Next button ESC Cancel button ENTER Next or Finish button if active window F1 Help menu CTRL C or CTRL INSERT Copy CTRL V or SHIFT INSERT Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo DEL Delete content of active well edit sample ID edit formula CTRL SHIFT Show formula of selected well when 2013 08 transformation result is viewed Evaluate Results wizard Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 31 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 4 Starting magellan Note magellan can be run with an instrument connected or in a demo mode simulating an instrument If you want to connect to an instrument see chapter 2 5 Connecting an Instrument switch the instrument on before starting magellan 2 4 1 Starting Standard Version Perform the following steps to start magellan 1 Make sure that an instrument is connected or that Demo mode is allowed 2 In the Windows Start menu select the Tecan program group and click the magellan icon 3 magellan starts 2 4 2 Starting Tracker Version Logging in for the First Time with magellan Tracker When magellan Tracker is started for the first time a dialog box appears informing the user that a User Administrator must be created first Click OK and the Create Administrator dialog box appears Complete the text fields and click OK to save the settings At least one user administrat
64. generated Multiple reads per well is exported in the following format only Well name followed by a block of Value separator Value separator and so on Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 91 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Export to ASCII File The Export to ASCII File dialog box contains the following elements Decimal character The decimal character may be a point or a comma group box e Point x xx option button e Comma x xx option button Delimiter group box This option sets a delimiter to separate the individual values within the data in the lines of an ASCII file TAB is the default delimiter A different symbol can be used e Tabulator option button This check box is selected by default and specifies that tabulators are used as delimiters e Other symbol text field This text field is only active if the Other symbol option button is selected Then a user defined delimiter character can be entered Path group box This option sets the path where the ASCII file will be stored e Export default path option button Use path option button Select any path where the ASCII file shall be stored Encoding group Select the export code box e ANSI For ANSI compatible characters e Unicode For characters that cannot be exported with ANSI code e g Chinese Cyrillic Set as default Using this option the settings can be logged as a default button for future use Restore defaul
65. given palette available functions can be chosen Refer to chapter 13 4 How to Write a Formula for further details Plate to Plate QC Use this option to define a long term QC validation For different controls a mean value and a standard deviation can be entered Every measured workspace using this method will be correspondingly evaluated refer to chapter 7 4 2 Toolbar Menu File Plate to Plate QC The Plate to Plate QC dialog box contains the following elements Input data Select the relevant data to which the validation must be drop down list applied from the drop down list Control Select the type of control from the drop down list then check boxes enter the expected mean and standard deviation A scroll bar appears next to the dialog controls to define more than 4 QC controls Workspaces to be Select the appropriate filter to define which workspaces evaluated options should be evaluated 88 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 14 Data Handling Data Export This dialog box provides options for organizing data export In the control bar expand Data handling and select Data export Data to be exported into an ASCII or Excel file can be selected using this dialog box A list of all available data according to the method definition is displayed The actual exporting of data only occurs using automated data handling see 4 3 16 Data Handling Auto
66. group Input data Single cone LAr E Validation Conditions a 4 NC1_1 lt 8 2 NC1_2 lt 3 Formula input Varable Operators Functions BLI z v and 268 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example Organize Printed Report In the control bar click Printed report from the Data handling item The following screen is displayed Data selection Page setup Header Footer Print as You can use drag amp drop to create a report Pyrat G Matrix Pick an item from the available data list and drag it into the selected data list Drop it at the position inside the report you want to have it Available data Selected data h Instrument data A Data Collection Up gt k Reduced data Measurement parameters Ea Difference data Difference data Mean Difference data Difference data Standard de Difference data Variation co aa Transformed data ig Concentrations _Remove_ T Qualitative Results 2 Sample IDs g Method layout ae QC Validation criteria iii Measurement parameters R Remarks Error protocol Audit Trail Signature On the Data selection tab all available report data is contained in the Available data box Using the Insert and Append buttons data can be transferred into the Selected data box Data can also be transferred using drag and drop In the Print as box choose between printing the data as a
67. group box the type abbreviation well color and description of the identifier selected in the tree structure is displayed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 63 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Insert button Edit button Delete button Set as default button Restore default button TECAN The Identifier group box is only activated for entering data when e one of the identifier groups in the tree structure Is selected and the Insert button has been clicked or e one of the identifiers in the tree structure is selected and the Edit button has been clicked Then in this group box the type abbreviation well color and description of the new identifier need to be defined Type text field The type of identifier is displayed No changes are possible Abbreviation text field The identifiers abbreviation will be used in the analysis plate display Color drop down list The color of the identifier on the plate layout has to be selected here Description text field A text description can be entered for each identifier Use one of these two buttons to save changes of newly entered data or to discard any changes Save button The Save button saves the entered color abbreviation and description of the relevant identifier Discard button The Discard button will cancel any changes Click the Insert button to create a new identifier This new identifier will be associated with
68. header information is available too Well name alpha numeric max 3 characters Sample ID alpha numeric max 20 characters The lines are separated by CR LF Example 14ESP AK Bommeli SendinfoHost 00 SendinfoPrnt 00 SendInfoDisk 00 A01091111111110 A02090325228840 A03090325228930 A04090325235730 A05090336975200 Interpretation When magellan is processing a pro file e Number of sample IDs is set to 1 e Sample ID is set as sample ID in well e Header information is ignored APL Files apl Description of apl files created by MiniSwift 1 3 or later or Minilyser 5 30 or later The file format is defined as follows Fieis Pos Length Format Description Piteo 88 Abphanumenc ControName 4047 18 Alphanumeric Resti asss 8 Alphanumenc Resun 5663 18 Aphanumeis Enos esso J6 Aphanumeis Time e087 8 Aphanmeis owon 88 958 Alphamumenc The lines are separated by CR LF 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 121 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Example 990520S1A1 test1_2 BLANK 05 20 199919 12 53 990520S1B1 test_2 BLANK 05 20 199919 12 53 990520S1C1 test 2 05 20 199919 12 53 R 990520S1D1 test 2 PC1 _ 05 20 199919 12 53 990520S1E1 test1_2 00000000010 05 20 199919 12 53 990520S1F1 test1_2 00000000010 05 20 199919 12 53 Interpretation When magellan is processing an apl file e Number of sample IDs is set to 3 e
69. individual values must be valid in order that the negative controls are declared as being valid eliminateRange arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 This function eliminates values that lie outside of the validation range defined by arguments 2 and 3 arg1 Identifier name NC1 PC1 arg2 Lower limit of the selected range arg3 Upper limit of the selected range arg4 The number of valid individual values that must be to proceed If too few values are available following the elimination a result of FALSE will be given A result of TRUE will be delivered when enough valid individual values are available Example eliminateRange NC 1 0 0 0 1 2 The individual values for the negative controls must fall within the range of 0 0 and 0 1 in order to be valid To achieve a result of TRUE at least 2 of the values must be viewed as being valid eliminateCV arg1 arg2 arg3 This function eliminates replicates until the CV of the remaining replicates is lower than the given CV arg2 The replicates are eliminated step by step beginning with the value with the highest difference to the mean value arg1 Identifier name arg2 Limit of accepted CV value arg3 The number of valid individual values that have to be left to deliver a positive result If too few values are available following the elimination a result of FALSE will be given A result of TRUE will be delivered when enough valid individual values are available Example elimina
70. l Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence GENios Pro Fluorescence Polarization SPECTRAFluor Fluorescence Absorbance zie Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence SAFIRE Fluorescence Absorbance SAFIRE2 Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization SUNRISE Absorbance ULTRA Evolution Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization FLT Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence ULTRA Fluorescence Polarization ULTRA 384 Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization Infinite M200 Infinite M200 PRO Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Infinite F200 Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization Infinite F200 PRO Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization AlphaScreen AlphaLISA Infinite F500 Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization Infinite M1000 Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization Infinite M1000 PRO Fluorescence Absorbance Luminescence Fluorescence Polarization AlphaScreen AlphaLISA Infinite F50 Absorbance Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 17 TECAN 1 Introduction Note The Connect stacker can be used together with Tecan instruments in order to measure batches of plates Please refer to the Instruction for Use for Connect for more informa
71. matrix or as a list with a special orientation In this example a report containing the measurement parameters plate layout blanked values standard curve IgM concentrations cutoff definition qualitative results of the samples and validations should be created Before creating the report the default Matrix Difference data must be removed from the Selected data box So only Measurement parameters remain in the Selected data box Select Method layout Layout in the Available data box and attach it as a matrix to the report by clicking Append Then insert Blank reduction Mean conc UA mL and Cutoff results into the matrix by selecting the corresponding items and clicking Insert 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 269 14 Application Example TECAN Append Graph Standard curve Cutoff definition and QC Validation criteria to the selected data The data setup part of the report definition procedure is complete the Printed Report dialog box looks like this Data selection Page setup Header Footer Print as List Matrix Available data Average single conc UA ml A Graph Standard Curve pa Qualitative Results Cutoff results Cutoff definition Results statistics Sample IDs 3 Method layout Well positions Strip method names Original Concentrations Layout Replicate Info 4 GC Validation criteria Remarks Error protocol You can use drag amp drop to cr
72. method the created workspace is automatically saved e fthe export to ASCII file check box is selected after running the method the data selected for export is automatically exported to an ASCII file e If the export to ASTM file check box is selected after running the method the data selected for export is automatically exported in ASTM format and can be further used in compatible Laboratory Information Systems LIS e If the export to Sample Tracking check box is selected after running the method the data selected for export is automatically exported to the Sample Tracking system For more information please refer to the corresponding manual for Sample Tracking e If the export to Excel check box is selected after running the method the data selected for export is automatically exported to Excel e Ifthe print check box is selected after running the method the data selected for the printed report is automatically printed on the default printer e Ifthe view results after measurement check box is selected after running the method the measurement data and the calculated data are displayed for reviewing More Load Sample ID List 98 Click on the More button next to the check box load sample ID list The More Load Sample ID List dialog box contains the following elements Filename group box Select the filename of the sample ID list to be loaded e Same filename as workspace option button e Filename option button Enter
73. of generated files clipboard and Excel copy options the plate view and miscellaneous wizard startup language and password settings See chapter 11 3 Options e User administration is used to add or disable users and to set or modify user rights See chapter 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker respectively chapter 11 5 User Administration magellan Standard e About magellan provides license information and details on the currently installed version and components Registration can be requested starting the Register wizard see chapter 2 6 Licensing magellan Close the Miscellaneous window to go back to the wizard list 43 Icon Temperature control For detailed description refer to chapter 3 1 2 Temperature Control Use this icon to set the target temperature for the connected instrument K Icon Move plate Use this icon to move the plate carrier in or out of the instrument 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 29 2 Start Working with magellan TECAN 2 3 7 Standard Elements Each wizard displays sequentially a number of windows in which all necessary information settings and data entry possibilities are provided Standard Elements of a magellan Wizard For navigation from one window to another there are several buttons at the bottom of the wizard page The following buttons are used in the individual windows of a wizard Back button Next button Finish button
74. only calculated if the value is within the available data no extrapolation is used or e Minimum intensity of the dilution series Using the minimal intensity of the dilution series Note The IC 50 is often calculated with the mean value of dilution 1 1 and dilution 1 infinity To achieve this the dilution series must be baseline corrected before ICx calculation The largest value of the dilution series is considered 100 the minimum intensity of the dilution series is considered 0 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 67 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 4 Precalculation Polarization Data Reduction Expand Precalculation in the control bar and select Polarization Data Reduction This option is only available for Fluorescence Polarization FP measurements FP measurements consist of two fluorescence intensity measurements one with polarizers in parallel and one with polarizers in perpendicular position The G factor compensates for differences in optical components between parallel and perpendicular measurement The G factor can be established by a calibration measurement using a reference solution with known polarization value and a corresponding reference blank solution The appropriate entries for fluorescence polarization measurements must be made under the G factor and Sample blank reduction group boxes of the Polarization Settings dialog box Under Reference the appro
75. only when reduced spectra data of type value is available Opens a dialog box showing the spectrum as table This allows copying the data to Excel The spectrum and the reduced data are displayed as masked This prevents further calculation of this well Option is available only when raw spectrum is displayed The selected spectrum and the raw spectrum are displayed together Option is available only when reduced spectrum is displayed select this command to change the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized Opens the magellan help dialog box Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 169 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 1 9 170 Context Sensitive Menu of 3D Spectra Graph By right clicking on the upper dialog frame a context sensitive menu is displayed Copy to Clipboard Copies the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Data as Table Opens a dialog box showing the spectrum as table This allows copying the data to Excel or exporting in ASCII format Save as Bitmap Saves the graph as a bitmap Note To export scan results go to the context sensitive menu by right clicking on the spectra graph Select Data as Table in the dialog box and copy the data to Excel or save them as ASCII file Edit Method Tab Note Click this tab to change to the currently
76. set of letters Another possibility is to combine the date with a choice of letters Counters used together with the date are reset daily otherwise the counter is incremented with each measurement e Date DDMMYYYY Counter option button e Date YYYYMMDD Counter option button e Total Counter option button e Use available barcode option button The entered text is added at the beginning of the workspace name as defined above The Example text field shows an example of the current selection Using this option the settings can be logged as a default for future use Using this option the settings can be reset to the previously defined default The More Export to LIS dialog box contains the following elements ASTM delimiter definition group box Sender ID group box Define the ASTM delimiters Field delimiter Enter a sign for separating fields by default e Repeat delimiter Enter a sign for repeat by default e Component delimiter Enter a sign for separating components by default e Escape character Enter a sign for escape amp by default Define the Sender ID settings that are to be displayed in the header of an ASTM file e Sender ID text field Empty by default If defined e g Infinite 200 the name is displayed in the header of the ASTM file e g H amp Infinite 200 Magellan V6 55 Standard e Append app name If selected application name i e magellan is exported
77. spectra is selected the Graph dialog box appears If a measurement sequence consisting of individual independent measurements has been executed the results of each measurement are displayed upon selection of the relevant measurement number from a drop down list in the toolbar f e kinetic cycles in a kinetic run If necessary the measurement results can be modified by clicking the Edit button Manipulated data is marked with a sign WARNING THIS FUNCTION IS FOR RESEARCH USE ONLY AND MUST NEVER BE USED FOR DIAGNOSTIC TESTS A In each well of the plate layout three lines of data can be displayed Depending on which criteria selected in the control panel in the left window different values are displayed 7 4 1 Menus ASCII File Export ASTM File Export LIS Sample Tracking Export Excel Export Method Export Print Print Preview Printer Setup Printout Font Plate to Plate QC Copy to Excel Copy to ASCII Format Paste from ASCII Format Insert Sample ID List Recalculate with another Method 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 147 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Movements Temperature Control Optimize Z Position Injector Control Start Measurement 7 4 2 Toolbar Menu File ASCII File Export In the File menu click ASCII File Export to export data as ASCII asc files so that other programs can read and p
78. ssccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneees 145 7 4 Evaluate Results Tab c ccsccseceeeeeesenscnscneesensenscnseneesensensensones 147 PAT 5 9 0 ce ee ee en ee ee 147 rA 619 6521 MENU FE eee en ene eer E een ree 148 7 4 3 Toolbar Menu EO csstcrencsecdsctesensncnssecdveedicaducscieaduerscedienx 153 7 4 4 Toolbar Menu Instrument c e 154 7 4 5 Plate Layout WINKOW cccscccseecseecseesseecaeecseesneseesanes 154 7 4 6 Special Characters ccccscccsscccnsvsccssescnsusensusensusessnanensusenes 155 7 4 7 Control Bar Instrument Data ccccccccccceececcneeceeeeeeeneseeees 156 7 4 8 Control Bar Reduced Data cccccccsecceerseeceerteeenenseeneeens 156 7 4 9 Control Bar Transformed Datta cccccccccecceereeeenereeenenes 156 7 4 10 Control Bar Kinetic Parameters ccccccccccecseccecceeseeeeeees 157 7 4 11 Control Bar Concentrations ccccccccceeceeccsecceeeneseeesnesenenes 159 7 4 12 Control Bar Qualitative R SUItS ccccccccceccseccseeseeeseeeseees 162 7 4 13 Control Bar Sample IDS secies EEE 163 7 4 14 Control Bar Method LayOut ccccccsecccseseeeneeenaesseaenenes 163 7 4 15 Control Bar QC Validation 0 cccccccccccccceceseceecesesneseeeeneeees 163 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 10 11 7 4 16 Control Bar Miscellaneous c1cccceseeecneeeeaesensnseseneneees 163 7 4 17 Color Scale Dialog BOX ccccccsscccses
79. the Slopes tab to establish the evaluation of the kinetic curve s slope behavior The Onsets tab defines calculation of the time by which a certain OD RFU value is reached Use the Min Max Area tab to define the evaluation of the minimum and maximum values contained in the curve and to define the calculation of the area under the kinetic curve Use the Enzyme kinetics tab to define the evaluation of enzyme kinetics Use the Available output data tab to display the data calculated using the kinetics evaluation Note Unusable data e g overflow values are ignored for kinetic data calculation 76 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Slopes Tab 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard This tab allows the user to establish the evaluation of the kinetic curve s slope The Slopes tab contains the following elements Input data drop down list Calculation drop down list Mean slope check box Maximum slope check box Select the input data to be processed Select the calculation method linear or quadratic refer to chapter 13 Calculations The start and end time can be typed into the provided text fields otherwise the whole kinetic is analyzed Time Points option buttons If Time is selected the start and end time is entered in hours minutes and seconds If Points is selected the start and end point for the analysis is given through the entered kinetic cycle number Start
80. the currently selected identifier group in the tree structure A selected identifier can be modified Click Delete or press DEL to delete any selected identifier Using this option the settings can be defined as default for future use Using this option the settings can be reset to the previously defined default 64 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 3 Method Layout Conc Dil and Ref Values In the Control bar expand Method layout and select Conc Dil Ref values The Plate View and the Select Identifier dialog box are displayed Create Edit a Method a a Method layout Plate layout Conc Dil Ref values Zoom Select Identifier v E Identifier Conc BEJE 5 2 sT1_2 10 poyjaw qipa 270349 ii WA transformed Transformed data Blank reduction Add new transformation yi Concentrations Standard curve Unit UA ml onc transformed d Add new conc transformati Uo gt Evaluate data Cutoff definition QC Validation aor Data handling Data export gt Printed report Automated data handling Sd Miscellaneous User prompts gt Number format Method notes C Autofill aln 1 a n a n 1 afn x a n 1 20 40 G 2 3 l 80 i l 7 160 L 1 SM1_9 SM1_13 SM1_17 SM1_25 SM1_29 j 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 2 1 1 1 1 NC1 14 2 SM1_18 SM1_22 sm
81. the fit for the dilution series is identical to the calculation of the standard curve with the Marquardt 4 parameter algorithm This requires at least four replicates with different dilutions In addition the specified intercept s e g IC 50 is calculated Create Edit a Method C Zoom jia g Transforme A Add new transfo Concentrati JA Standard curve A g Conc transf iA Add new conc tr oJ Evaluate da A Cutoff definition QC validation Ga Data handii A Data export Printed report Automated data SS Miscellaneo JA User prompts Number Format lt W Method lay Plate layout Conc Dil Ref poyyaw ypasayeasp Select Identifier EJ v E Replicate Dilution 20 Ny DDNE UOUN Unit C Autofill a n 1 afn a n 1 aln x a n 1 Dilution series Calculate ICx Input Raw data v is Calc cond ra ICx nam Pa 2 Method notes 3 v Set 0 value to Intensity 0 Min intensity of dilution serie FINISH gt 2004 Tecan lt is possible to define more than one intercept for the dilution series lt is possible to define the 0 value for the calculation by selecting e Intensity 0 Using 0 OD RFU The largest value of the dilution series is considered 100 the value of 0 is considered 0 The ICx e g IC 50 is then defined as the dilution where the response reaches x e g 50 It is
82. the option can be selected from the Create Edit a Method wizard page Create Edit a Method Measurement type D Kinetic measurement C Multilabel measurement Measurement parameters DEFINE EVALUATION 2006 Tecan 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 105 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard TECAN When two or more plates are to be measured a counter for switching between the plates is available in the Define Evaluation window as well Create Edit a Method Select all unused 2 2 Method layout Ay Plate layout Conc Dil Ref values Wis Transformed data Add new transformation poyjaw jIpa aqeaup ee Concentrations Standard curve ig gt Evaluate data Cutoff definition QC Yalidation or Data handling Data export Printed report Automated data handling SS Miscellaneous User prompts Number format Method notes C Zoom SM1_41 SM1_49 1 1 1 1 Exp group 1 E SM1_52 SM1_60 SM1_ 1 1 171 ID Nurn fu 97 v Replicates aja Fi 5 SM1_63 SM1_ Fix number 1 1 Oall c V 7 Fill Delete I selection selection FINISH gt 2004 Tecan All further parameters can be defined as is done for single plate methods At starting a multiple plate method the following dialog box appears Run measurement Measurement of plate Sample ID s list STER Inzert FAUSSE
83. the plate to calculate the G factor For more information on calculation refer to chapter 13 Calculations 4 3 5 Precalculation Spectra Data Reduction 2013 08 Expand Precalculation in the control bar and select Spectra Data Reduction This option is only available for measurements containing a two dimensional scan absorbance scan excitation scan emission scan Spectra data reduction allows to perform a spectra blank reduction and to extract specific data e g intensities from the scan The Spectra data reduction window contains the following elements Data reduction Smooth Normalize Peak Custom formulas Calibration Available results Data name Options Cal spectrum data Smoothed spectra wl Wavelength pick Options _ amp Normalized a Options Y Peak intensity Y Wavelength peak Options W Peak width Options Y Peak area Options Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 69 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Blank reduction check box Smooth check box Wavelength pick check box TECAN This option is only available if blanks are defined on the layout The blank reduced spectra is calculated by subtracting the spectrum of the blank well from all other wells When more blanks are defined on the plate e g when multiple experimental groups are defined an additional options button appears This allows to define the blank to be used In
84. the sample ID list have different plate formats then an error message is displayed When the sample ID list is selected in the printed report setup then it is displayed on the printout The Sample ID List with Plate Layout Preview dialog box displays the sample ID list together with the defined plate layout This helps the user to ensure that the correct sample ID list is selected The dialog box contains the following elements 10 button Click to resize the displayed plate layout to show 10 of the plate layout on the full screen 100 button Click to resize the displayed plate layout to show 100 of the plate layout on the full screen Zoom When this Zoom function is activated the required wells check box on the plate layout can be marked and the wells are automatically enlarged to fit into the full screen Remove unused If an only partly filled sample ID list is loaded the user samples check box can delete all unused samples from the layout by selecting this check box If a final control e g in well H12 has been defined within the layout this control is automatically moved to the well after the last used sample well Per default the Remove unused samples option is selected Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 7 Measurement Status The Measurement Status dialog box is shown during the measurement performance of the instrument and contains the foll
85. the selected well type identifier are listed Select the respective experimental group If there is only one experimental group the field cannot be edited This table displays all wells in the Identifier column which match the selected identifier as from the Select Identifier list The corresponding dilutions concentrations or reference values are listed in the Dilution Concentration Reference column where they can be edited individually The displayed concentration unit can be determined Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 65 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Autofill check box Option buttons for the mathematical concentration calculation Apply bution Dilution series group box TECAN The Autofill function provides the calculation of the corresponding concentrations or dilution factors according to available types of series This is useful when the dilution series is quite large and the concentrations are in a clear mathematical relationship to each other If the Autofill check box has been selected the following options are available e Arithmetic series a n 1 a n e Geometric series a n 1 a n x e User defined series a n 1 Example 1 Each subsequent concentration should contain twice 0 5 of the previous concentration Formula 1 a n 1 2 n 0 5 Example 2 Each subsequent concentration should contain one third of the previous concentration Formula 2
86. to the power of the argument Example exp 1 e 2 718 This function separates out the fraction section of argument frac delivers the fraction section of a decimal value Example frac 1 7 0 7 This function separates out the integer sections of argument int delivers the integer section of a decimal value Example int 1 7 1 log arg1 arg2 This function takes the logarithm of arg2 to the base of arg1 Example The well holds a value of 100 log x 10 The result here will be 0 5 This function takes the natural logarithm of argument Example In 10 2 303 This function takes the logarithm to base 10 of argument Example g 10 1 This function rounds argument to an integer value Example To round 12 579 to two decimal places use the following formula round 12 579 100 100 The result is 12 58 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN sqr argument sqrt argument 13 Calculations This function raises argument to the power of 2 Example sqr 3 9 This function takes the square root of argument Example sqrt 9 3 13 4 5 Statistical Functions Note Use single and not average or mean data as input data for transformations with statistical functions avg argument and mean argument median argument medianPlate 2013 08 This function calculates the average value of argument The argument must be an identifier Example avg SM1
87. weir eer er errtr 166 Graph Kinetics Dialog cccccccceeeseesseeeeeeeees 167 Graph Multilabel Dialog ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 166 Graph Spectra Dialog ccccccccceeeeessseeeeeeees 169 Index Summary Of a Well ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 165 Control Stacker Movements 00 0ce0000 178 Control Stacker Movements for Infinite Series REAderS cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 Convert DOCUMENTS ccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 195 Convert From cccccccceseeceeceesceeceseeeeeeeeees 196 CONVE rt TO ccc cecccccceeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeees 195 Copy in ASCII Format cccceeessseeeeeeeeeees 153 CODY VAD iccccetaitesicccattenanctetarncedaicaccsdaehemsadenaesti 200 Copy to Excel ccccccccccsesseeeeeeeeeseeeeesseaees 153 Copy Export Options ccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 200 correlation coefficient cceeeeeeeee eee 253 254 countDeleted arg 1 arg2 cccssseeeeeeeeeeeees 240 Create Edit a Method cccccceesseeeeeeeeaeeees 51 Create edit a sample ID cccceeeeeeeeeee ees 109 GubIC SPINE rossii ceansa R EAEn 249 COT ires iene ie astnco sense tt astiewnaeess esate aacaret 86 Cuvette Data Reduction ccceeeeeeeeeee sees 73 D JAVA EX OOM cosan EE e 89 Data HIAMOMAG acaserxshcctecsvincdesusecesccebiadccuaes 89 171 Delault DAIS scssi 199 Define a Plate Layout ccccceseeeeseseeeeeeee
88. wizard is used to e Create or edit methods e Set measurement and evaluation parameters e Define the plate layout e Select the format of the printed report and e Set the automated data handling parameters Workflow Summary Click Continue on the welcome page of the Create Edit a Method wizard In the next window select e Create new if you want to define a new method or e Edit if you want to modify an existing method In the Define Measurement Parameters window measurement parameters can be set Click Define Evaluation to define the plate layout evaluation parameters print out and automated data handling parameters At the end of the wizard the new or modified method is saved as mth file Note For a step by step description of how to create a method refer to the Quantitative Elisa example in chapter 14 2 Step by Step Example Quantitative ELISA File Selection Page In the wizard list click Create Edit a method button Click Next on the welcome page of the Create Edit a method wizard and the File Selection page appears The File Selection window contains the following elements Create new The Create New button must be selected to create a new button method Edit button The Edit button must be selected to edit an existing method Show combo Inthe Show combo box a file filter can be defined in order to box get only those methods in the list which fulfill the selected criteria e All files e Files from this ins
89. 013 08 TECAN Design Layout 2013 08 14 Application Example Define the plate layout using the Well Assignment dialog box on the right side of the screen In the Identifiers group box select BL Blank In the Experimental group box the number 1 remains In the Replicates group box select All Well Assignm Identifiers Exp group _ Replicates aja 2 Fix number RF Def identit Fill Delete selection selection Click well A1 which is then marked with a red border Click Fill selection and the well is labeled with the selected identifier type Note A single well can also be filled by double clicking it Now choose the following settings in the Well Assignment dialog box In the Identifiers group box select NC Negative Control In the Experimental group box the number 1 remains All is selected in the Replicates group box Starting at well B1 click and drag the mouse to C1 The wells B1 to C1 are then marked with a red border Click Fill selection and the wells are labeled with the selected identifier type Next calibrators Standards must be assigned to wells D1 to G2 Select the following settings in the Well Assignment dialog box In the Identifiers group box select ST Standard In the Experimental group box the number 1 remains In the Replicates group box choose between Fix number and All Fix number Only enabled for standards and samples where IDs can be used
90. 1 7 SM1_39 aln 1 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 1 12 1 4 E E 2 v 2 7 7 7 2 2 7 7 12 2 4 SM1_28 SM1_32 ap 2 22 1 1 1 2 4 20 22 22 22 22 22 22 1 SM1 Ssmi ee E ed EE EE 2 12 2 2 2 42 12 12 172 2 1 1 1 FINISH 2004 Tecan Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 14 Application Example Standard Curve In the control bar click Standard curve from the Concentrations item to define the appropriate standard curve The following is in the test kit description After the blank correction the optical densities OD 492 OD 620 are plotted versus the concentration The regression line that goes through these points is the standard curve On the Data tab select Blank reduction as input data Data Analysis type Intercepts Axis Graph Input data Blank reduction Standards from Layout Additional concentrations On the Analysis type tab select Linear regression Data Analysis type Intercepts Axis Graph Analysis Type Point to point Linear regression Data scaling Non linear regression Lin xJLin y w Cubic spline kima Polynomial Four parameters Four parameters Marquardt Five parameters LogitLog C Include 0 0 _ Extrapolation factor 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 265 TECAN 14 Application Example On
91. 1 Miscellaneous Icon magellan magellan Application magellan Administrator Specialist Operator Modify signed standard curve files Edit and change settings in a signed standard curve file Reserved for future use General Archive files Move files to an archive location No Define filter slides Change the filter definition of the instrument No Modify general options Select language suppress not monotone warning allow demo mode Print unsigned workspaces The results of an unsigned workspace can be printed Run not approved methods Reviewed methods can be used for a measurement run Note This right can be used in combination with the right Run unsigned methods to allow the user to run already reviewed but still not approved methods Reader Server Save plate definition files Create or edit plate definition files No Save spin profile Create or edit spin profile files No 212 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 4 5 User Administration Options Click Options in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box and the Edit Options dialog box appears Login Options Edit Options o xj Lock application after the specified minutes of idle time i5 Exit application and lock account after the specitied number of unsuccessful login attempts 3 Lock If the user doesn t use the application for a specified time application 1 min
92. 1_25 SM1_30 SM1_34 2 12 7 2 2 2 172 2 12 12 71 2 1 1 1 NC1 14 E 1 14 ie SM1_26 SM1_30 SM1_36 C 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 1 1 1 i 7 Sm1_41 EIE SM1_19 EE Sm1_27 EE SM1_35 J 2 2 2 2 12 2 2 12 12 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 7 SM1_15 SM1_19 SM1_23 SM1_27 SM1_31 2 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 1 1 _12 16 SM1_20 24 2 2 7 2 2 SM1_17 SM1_21 SM1_25 SM1_29 SM1_33 12 172 12 12 172 nae 2004 Tecan The concentrations for the standards the reference values for the Reference used with Fluorescence Polarization measurements and the dilution factors for all other identifiers can be entered or edited in the table next to the Plate View window The values can be defined for each well individually By default the dilution factors are set to 1 the concentrations are set to 0 and the reference value is set to 22 Entering a dilution factor of 2 means that the sample has been diluted by half The calculated concentration will therefore be multiplied by 2 The Concentration Dilution Reference window contains the following elements Select Identifier drop The values are co related within the individual well down list Exp group selection field Table with Identifier and Concentration Dilution columns Unit text field 2013 08 types this field provides all wells currently included in the measurement Select an identifier to edit the corresponding dilution or concentration factors All wells which match
93. 1_29 SM1_33 A f 4 r r p p r p ap r ap Add new transformation fx j 2i 2 2 2 2 j 21 2 2 21 2 i 2 2 2 V M1_18 M1_2 V poyyew 1pajayeai fay x BL1 3 Concentrations g Standard curve 2 Conc transformed d 7 Add new conc transformati ig l gt Evaluate data YS Cutoff definition QC Validation l Data handling Z Data export Printed report Automated data handling f 2 2 f f l X X l i A 2 SM1_12 SS Miscellaneous J Ey bah M1_ S 2 2 2r 2 2 2 2 2 2 x BL1 User prompts Number format Method notes FINISH 2004 Tecan Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 263 14 Application Example TECAN In each well the following information appears example well A5 SM1_9 2 2 x BL1 or 1 000 Sample experimental group number 1 sample ID number 4 Number of replicate is 2 total number of replicates is 2 Assigned transformation x BL1 when Transformation is selected or Dilution Factor value of 1 when Conc Dil Ref values is selected Concentration Dilution Reference Value Definition In the control bar select Conc Dil Ref values from the Method layout item to define the respective values as described in the test kit Calibrator 1 Calibrator 2 Calibrator 3 Calibrator 4 Calibrator 5 Calibrator 6 5 UA mL 10 UA mL 20 UA mL 40 UA mL 80 UA mL 160 UA mL Make sure ST is selected in the Select Identifier list In
94. 24 01 2 4 wsp mg 20051109 0372 mth File Edit Instrument _ BO Ce GE O20 Toolbar 2 Instrument data Raw data Raw data Mean s Nsa4 agenjeag s Raw data v Raw data Raw data as Colors poyyaw 4P Concentrations Single conc MGU Mean conc MGU Average single conc MGU s Average single conc M v Average single conc M Graph Standard Curve rN Method layout Well positions Strip method names Original Concentrations Layout Replicate Info Measurement parameters es Miscellaneous Remarks Error protocol Number of plates 4 D f m Wi d Multiple plates ae ata n O rm ati O n l n OW Infinite 200 Instrument serial number 510000008 Measurement parameters FINISH 2004 Tecan The Workspace Overview is composed of the following elements e Plate Layout window data for each well is displayed in the plate layout for example raw data If a multiplate workspace is opened a counter for switching between the different plates is displayed in the right upper corner e Toolbar for editing Zooming switching between kinetic cycles and viewing the summary of one selected well e Data Information window data which cannot be assigned to a single well is displayed in the text box window for example measurement parameters cutoff definition result statistic etc e Control Bar of Evaluate Results tab all available data set names
95. 278 This column contains the volume in ul which was dispensed positive value or aspirated negative value e Error O 4294967295 This column contains possible pipetting errors Please note the table with the error codes below In row 2 this column shows the scanning errors e SRCRackID max 32 characters For dispense commands this is the source rack barcode In row 2 this column shows the barcode of the rack for which the output file was written e GridPos 1 67 This is the grid position of the source rack for dispense commands e SiteOnGrid 1 128 Here Gemini shows the y position site on the carrier of the source rack for dispense commands e TipNumber 1 8 Here Gemini reports the tip number which was used for pipetting into from this well e DetectVol 0 7158278 If liquid detection was used the detected volume in the well before the aspirate dispense command is listed here e Time This is the time format hh mm ss when the well was used The lines are separated by CR LF The columns are separated by either commas or semicolons The columns separator is detected from the first header line Interpretation The number of lines separated by newline is counted This number reduced by 2 is used to define the plate format which can be 8x12 16x24 24x36 32x48 rows x columns With Gemini 3 60 the format information is extracted from the second line SRCPos and SRCTubelD Multiple lines per well are possibl
96. 3 2013 08 TECAN y EXPERT S 2013 08 7 Evaluate Results Wizard e Average Standard Curve displays the standard curve averaged over the performed experimental groups This option can only be activated if a number of curves are present in the window An average curve will be generated and displayed using the collective curve data Help menu Select Help to open the magellan help dialog box Click on points Clicking on points will mask unmask them within the standard curve After a point is masked the line of the graph is automatically adjusted accordingly and the point is represented as a transparent symbol instead of a solid symbol Hint This can be undone by pressing CTRL Z X Y cursor tool tip When the cursor is not moved for a short moment a tool tip text appears displaying the X and Y coordinates of the current cursor position KNOW HOW lf more than six standard curves are displayed in the graph only a small legend on the right side shows the label of the graph To view the fit functions respectively the curve fit parameters select Standard Curve Data from the context sensitive menu see below Context Sensitive Menu of a Standard Curve Graph By right clicking on the graph a context sensitive menu is displayed Crosshair cursor A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on particular points on the graph Single points View replicate values instead of mean values Copy to
97. 36500 hours the application is automatically locked and the user has to reenter the password Unsuccessful After a number of consecutive unsuccessful logins 1 100 logins the user account is locked and optionally an alert email is sent to the system administrator If the user account of a user administrator has been locked due to unsuccessful logins this account remains locked for an idle time of 45 minutes After this waiting time the account is unlocked and can be used again Application Locked The application is in use and has been locked User Name Admin Password Unlock application lf the application has not been in use for the specified maximum time it will be locked The password must be entered to unlock the application See Auto Lock above 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 213 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Caution If the User Administrator password is forgotten User Administration settings cannot be changed In that case please uninstall magellan first and perform a new installation afterwards see chapter 1 4 Software Installation Procedure Note When uninstalling magellan NO existing magellan files will get lost All previous files can be found in a backup folder generated during the new installation procedure Password Options Edit Options x inimum password length 5 Allows empty password Minimum re
98. 4 13 Control Bar Sample IDs The user can view the sample ID list data e Sample ID 1 e Sample ID 2 if available e Sample ID 3 if available e Pipetting status if available 7 4 14 Control Bar Method Layout The user can view the method layout e Well positions for example A1 B1 e Strip method names Available if a strip method was used e Original concentrations Concentrations originally assigned to standards e Dilution factors Dilution factors previously assigned to samples e Layout Layout of the identifiers e Replicate Info Replicate number and maximum number of replicates of the corresponding identifiers e Measurement parameters 7 4 15 Control Bar QC Validation The validations are the criteria that determine the validity of a test They are defined in the method In the data information window the list of validations is displayed The list contains the experimental groups the input data for each validation group the validation formulas and their results TRUE or FALSE are displayed lf the result is TRUE it indicates that the validation criteria were met for this specific plate whereas FALSE represents an invalid result for the whole plate 7 4 16 Control Bar Miscellaneous The error protocol logs all errors that occur during the run of a method Errors can occur during a measurement or during the calculation Review the error protocol before using data and results Remarks e Error protoc
99. 4 3 19 Miscellaneous Method Notes In the control bar expand Miscellaneous and select Method notes The Method notes field allows the user to add some comments to the file name which will be displayed on the method printout Simple formatting like bold italic underlined and colored text is possible Formatting may be omitted during printout 4 4 Saving the Method Once all the data relevant to a method is set as desired click Finish and the Save as window appears in which the created or modified method can be saved The Save as window contains the following elements Filename Enter or modify the method s file name field File remarks Add some comments to the file name which will be field displayed for example in the Open file dialog boxes Audit trail comment Add some comment which will be stored in the audit field trail only available for magellan Tracker Organize Click this button to open the Organize favorites dialog favorites button box See 6 5 Start Favorite for further information Run this method When this check box is selected the method run will be now check box started immediately after finishing this wizard The modified document can be saved under its current file name or under a different name Click Save amp Finish to save the method and close the Create Edit a Method wizard Additional buttons in magellan Tracker Audit trail button Click this button to open the Audit trail dialog box wher
100. 4 Basic FUNCTIONS 1 ccccccccsccseecsceceeccuccseccueceessuccuetanssuesaneees 236 12453 Slalisical PUNCHONS imcicccieteceeasievacemmacsenenn 237 13 4 6 Elimination FUNCTIONS ccccccsccceecseeceecseeceecsuecessesseesaeeees 239 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 TOA Oer Fon OS errre n E NE eases 242 13 4 8 Spectra FUNCTIONS cccccsccccsseeccseecceccesnsessesesseeesseseeaes 243 13 4 9 EXaMploS vasaanapeanaaaaadeacnbredacesnceentsanvenmeaaneaunsaanaapedganaitadtans 244 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenees 246 Pad DEON E E A E EATE OE EAT 246 13 5 2 Analysis Type Parameters ccccccceccseeeeseeensesseseneesanaes 246 13 5 3 Error M ossagoS seere a i e bien aE enacarane 246 13 5 4 Point to Point 1 cc cccceccsecceecsecceecsecseecsecseecsecsuecsesseeseessessees 246 13 5 5 Linear REGIECSSION 1ccccccseecuecceeceecsuessuecauessuessuesseesenens 247 13 5 6 Non Linear Regression 1cccscccseecseecneenesecueeceeeceeeeuessaeens 247 TODA TOU OIUAN peip rin r rE E TE EEEE 248 1I CUC DINO seara E EEE AEE 249 D AT eee ee E AE EEE AEE EET AE EE AEA 249 Pd eE Eora 1E o a E A A E E E EE E 250 13 5 11 Four PA LAIMetelrs cccccccccseceecsecceecseccuesseccuessessuceuessnesess 252 13 5 12 Four Parameters Marquardl ccccccccseecesecseessneesanees 253 13 5 13 Five Parameters Marquarat ccccscccsesecse
101. 4 or n_ 4 Ng 0 respectively Before smoothing all overflow values are removed from the spectrum Wavelength pick e Pick wavelength Retrieves the intensity of the selected wavelength e Calculate ratio Calculates the ratio by dividing the intensities at the selected wavelengths e Area Calculates the are under the spectrum within the selected wavelength range e Custom Reduces the spectrum using a user defined formula Normalize Reduces the spectrum into a range from 0 to 1 Peak find The spectrum is differentiated and all null points of the result are treated as potential peaks The corresponding peaks are sorted by value and all invalid peaks are removed e g overflows local minima values below the defined threshold The highest value of the remaining items is selected as peak In practice this is often the maximum value of the spectrum Custom formulas Ability to define various data reductions for the spectra refer to chapter 13 4 8 Spectra Functions WARNING SINGLE OUTLIERS CAUSED BY NOISE WILL ALSO BE DETECTED AS PEAK THEREFORE IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED TO SMOOTH THE SPECTRUM BEFORE USING PEAK FIND 232 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 4 Howto Write a Formula 13 4 1 Introduction A variety of formulas are necessary for the calculations the cutoff requirements and the validation These formulas resemble the syntax of BASIC comman
102. 53 Levenberg Marquardt method 008 254 Levy Jennings Graph cccccsseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeees 150 IGCALOUINIGNIL ssrisirssrinssineisisianrinasi iinei 236 Licensing magellan cccccccseeeeeeseeeeeees 37 LOCK ADPliCAtION eiennenn nE 213 Log argument ccceeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeas 236 Logical Expressions Eig e EEE N A E EN EE AN E N E N ooecneeee 239 TECAN if then else ccceecccssseeeseeseeeseeeeeseees 235 or 235 LOOMING uenee 218 LOGIN cies cnteneaarsces taednee tavereel qunatdewgeserses octeteraton 34 logins WINS UCCES SIU case teceticeerestcssanstenatancecatnceteecaacads 213 M Magellan Standard ccccccecsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeaes 13 Magellan Standard cccccccssssseeceeeeeesseeeeees 15 Magellan Standard cccccccssesseeceeeeeesseeeeees 18 Magellan Tracker cccccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 Magellan Tracker cccccccssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 Magellan Tracke r ccccccssseeeceseseeseesseesseees 18 ManUTACIUTET geen ene en nen aoe ee eee ree 3 Na AF QUINN esirdin tesina 238 maxAvg argument ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeens 238 mean argument ccceeececessseeceeeeeeesseeeeeees 237 Measurement Parameters cceeeseeeeeees 52 Measurement Status ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 Measurement TYP S cccccescceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeens 53 median argument ccccce
103. 66407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard The third and following lines are entries for the used wells of a rack used tubes of a striprack The columns contain the following information Column Range Explanation e Position 1 number of wells Position of the well in the rack The numbering sequence is rear to front and then left to right 1 A1 2 B1 If the microplate has been pipetted in portrait mode e g dimensions 8x12 iso 12x8 the numbering sequence is left to right and then front to rear 1 H1 2 H2 e TubelD Max 32 characters This column is only filled for stripracks and when the tube barcodes were scanned with a POSID command In row 2 this column shows the version of Gemini e ScanError 0 4294967295 This column contains possible scanning errors Please note the table with the error codes below In row 2 this column shows the serial number of Genesis e SRCRack Max 32 characters Here Gemini reports for dispense commands the configuration name of the source rack In row 2 this column shows the configuration name of the rack for which the output file was written e SRCPos 1 number of wells This column states for dispense commands the position in the source rack where the liquid came from e SRCTubelD Max 32 characters lf the source for a dispense command was a striorack Gemini reports here the barcode of the source tube e Volume 7158278 7158
104. 7 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Tecan files tpl These files lt PLATEID gt TPL consist of lines which contain parameters separated by semicolons The format is H date time D testno sample ID control name position pre dilution errors L The file starts with an H and ends with an L The fields are defined as follows date time testno sample ID the same as in the job list BES3 control name alpha numerical max 8 characters Note This entry contains sample ID or the name of a control position alpha numerical max 3 characters pre dilution numerical max 8 characters plus 1 decimal separated by a errors alpha numerical max 3 characters If an error occurred during pipetting one of the following characters is displayed here First character lt Space gt no liquid error L no or not enough liquid second character lt Space gt no barcode error M manually entered barcode Third character lt Space gt no timer overrun O timer overrun The lines are separated by CR LF Example H 29 02 94 12 47 11 D 1 NEG A1 1 0 D 1 POS B1 1 0 D 1 0001 C1 1 0 L Interpretation When magellan is processing a tpl file e Number of sample IDs is set to 1 e Sample ID or control name is set as sample ID in well position e Error flags are stored for every well e Pre dilution is used as the dilution of the well position 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No
105. AN 14 Application Example 14 Application Example 14 1 Introduction The magellan example files package provide magellan workspaces and the corresponding Instructions for Use IFU to introduce the software and to ease the user s work with it The files can be installed separately and include examples for different measurement modes they are based on commercial available applications For further information please refer to the IFU for the example files 14 2 Step by Step Example Quantitative ELISA A step by step example quantitative test of how to create a method in magellan is provided in this chapter By following the instructions you will learn how to define evaluations from a test kit description in magellan The method was created using a Sunrise in demo mode but it is also possible to define the methods with another Tecan instrument connected if it is able to measure absorbance 14 2 1 Test Kit Description In the manufacturer s test kit description of a quantitative IgM Antibody detections ELISA the following instructions are found Plate Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 suki os jst e e S o ne ca sz o o e e e o mne fes jse J To o o o e e e o pct os ss o o o o S e d e pct os ss e e e S o e2 oo o o S o o e oo e e S oo o es st UE CE e T e l S S Ir O0 TnT MO OUV gt BLK Blank NC Negative control C1 C6 Calibrators Standards
106. Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4 Absorbance1 Raw data C1 0 1015 OD P 4 a3 O 1 a3 4 Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4 4Absorbance1 Raw data D1 0 1015 OD P 5 a4 O 1 a4 4 Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4 4Absorbance1 Raw data E1 0 1015 OD P 6 a5 O 1 a5 4 Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4 4Absorbance1 Raw data F1 0 1015 OD L 1 N 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 101 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard More View Results The More View Results dialog box contains the following elements Plate view group Select the data to be displayed in the plate view box e 1st line in well fixed drop down list Select a name from the available data names e 2nd line in well fixed drop down list Select a name from the available data names e 3rd line in well first selection drop down list Select a name from the available data names In contrast to the first two lines this selection is only applied for the first time Whenever another data to be viewed in the plate view is selected in the control bar this data is displayed in the 3 line The first two lines remain unchanged The 1 and 2 line can be omitted by selecting not used which makes the plate view more easily readable Text box group box Select a name from the available data names This selection is only applied for the first time Whenever another data to be viewed in the t
107. Already Been Purchased Select Enter your magellan serial number Enter the serial number which is found in the magellan package Register Magellan Order Magellan to obtain a valid license 38 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan After having entered the serial number click Next and the License Number dialog box appears Register Magellan TECAN CI Request a Magellan license number because you did not receive ane Users installing the software for the first time will not yet have a license number and must select Request a magellan license number because you did not receive one Click Next and the Registration Form window appears Registration Form Complete the registration form Fields marked with an asterisk are mandatory Register Magellan Full Name Test User Company Institution Tecan Austria Street Address 1 Untersbergstr 14 Street Address 2 ZIP City Town 5082 Grodig Country Austria Telephone Fax E Mail test usenfSttecarn com Area of Work Lite Sctence Clinical Diagnostic O ther Used Tecan Instruments SUNRISE Detection Modes Absorbance want to recene information material from Tecan Click Next and the license agreement window appears Read it carefully and click the I agree bution 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No
108. Autofill Selection Well Summary 116 The Autofill Selection dialog box can be accessed via the context sensitive menu or the tool bar button This dialog box allows the user to fill the selected wells with sample IDs automatically First the whole plate or parts of the plate must be selected The desired sample IDs and increment settings for the marked wells must be entered in the Autofill Selection dialog box Click OK to close the dialog box and to fill the selected wells with the defined sample IDs In each well up to 3 sample IDs can be entered Therefore the list contains three Sample ID text fields and an Autoincrement check box a Start index text field and a Vertical check box associated to each of them The Autofill Selection dialog box contains the following elements Use ID check box The Use ID check box can only be accessed if the identical number of sample ID were selected The checkmark determines if the autoincrement function is applied to the selected sample ID Sample ID text Sample IDs for the marked well can be entered in the fields Sample ID text fields The sample IDs can contain letters numbers or a combination of letters and numbers Autoincrement The Autoincrement check box must be selected if the check box sample IDs for the wells are to be numbered automatically incremented by 1 Start index text The Start index text field is only editable if the field Autoincrement check box is selected The star
109. Clipboard Copies the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Save as Bitmap Saves the graph as a bitmap file Print Prints the graph Printer Setup Displays the Printer Setup dialog box Undo changes Cancels recent actions Zoom to 100 Sets the graph display back to 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph Standard Curve Views the curve fit parameters of the displayed standard Data curve s Intercepts Opens the Intercepts dialog box which displays the result of the defined intercept values Properties Changes the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized Help Opens the standard magellan help dialog box Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 161 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Graph Dilution Series Dialog The Graph Dilution Series dialog box displays the dilution graph with the specified intercept Context Sensitive Menu of Dilution Series Graph By right clicking the graph a context sensitive menu is displayed Crosshair cursor A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on special points on the graph Copy to Clipboard Copies the complete graph into the clipboard as a bitmap the bitmap can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Save
110. Color option button The printout is in colors if supported by the printer The well specific data is printed in the color of the layout for example sample raw data is printed blue The cutoff results are printed in the color of the range for example pos wells are printed red The graph is printed as displayed e Black and white option button The printout is black and white In the Unit drop down list cm or inch can be selected There are 4 numeric fields which define the margins e Left text field enter the value of the left margin e Right text field enter the value of the right margin e Above text field enter the value of the top margin e Below text field enter the value of the bottom margin 96 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Header Tab In the Header tab the content of the document header is defined Data selection Page setup Header Footer Option Adjustment Row number lt gt Page numbers O left centered 3 Date O left centered 2 Time left centered 3 C 1 1 1 File name left centered Program name left centered lt gt 4 gt 4 gt lt gt 4 gt Comment left Separators Above Below Option check boxes Use Option to select any of the following check boxes to be printed in the header e Page numbers e Date current e Time e File name e Program name e Comm
111. Exp group 1 A v Conc Dil Ref values N Transformed data poyyaw ypajayeas gt ID Num Eig 7 A v Add new transformation ee Concentrations Standard curve 5 2 Conc transformed d A Add new conc transformati A Evaluate data Cutoff definition QC Validation or Data handling Data export Replicates afi Fix number 2 3 Def identi OA Fill Delete selection selection D Printed report Automated data handling SS Miscellaneous User prompts Number format Method notes Cerro core go BES a g a a a EER 2004 Tecan Click Select all unused from the toolbar to select all empty wells on the plate Then hold down the control Ctrl key and click the well H12 so that it remains blank and unmarked In the Well Assignment dialog box select SM Sample under Identifiers In the Experimental group box the number 1 remains In the Replicates group box choose Fix number and 2 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Transformations Method layout Plate layout Conc Dil Ref values iz aa Transformed data O K Transformation1 Add new transformation oo 2013 08 _ poyjaw ypafayeasp 14 Application Example In the ID Number box leave 1 and in the Replicates group box select the vertical arrows Click then Fill selection The layout definition procedure is complet
112. FINITE Series ROACCSS cccccccecccncccsneccseesenseesnsceeeeeeeees 181 9 5 4 Control Stacker Movements for INFINITE Series RACES S cccccccecccncecsneccseecescesnscsnsenneeees 183 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Suppotrt 185 10 1 IT FOGUICU OM esiisa EEE E EEEa 185 10 2 PCT O GUIS CS aaa E EA 185 10 3 Connecting to GCM Enhanced cccseseeeeseeeeseseeseeseneeseeeenes 186 10 4 Data OC UN ceases ees cscs see ow sae a aaria 186 10 4 1 Importing Logged Data Into Microsoft Excel 22 188 10 5 GCM Enhanced Data Displayed in Status Bat scccceseees 188 10 6 GCM Enhanced Data Displayed in Measurement Status Dialogd ccccesseseeseesseeeceseeeeseeeeneesenees 189 10 7 Precautions before Starting a Measurement cscssseeeeees 189 Miscellaneous ICON ccccceeeceesecenseenscenseesseonseenssonssonseoeeeneees 191 11 1 Instrument CORE OMe ies caneotnternceunteseceamnnteunanneteanaetnanenseeneenutisens 191 11 2 Fe NING seissen a EE 191 FLAT ANVE FOS rens i ars eE n EEA EEEE EEEO 191 11 2 2 Automatic Archiving ccccceecseecceecceecseessuessuessuessuesauessness 193 t123 Impor Raw Dala eeso ie ie a Er EEEE 194 VE CONV TO E ne renee 195 11 2 5 Convert FLOM 1ccccccccecccsecccseecseeccesesseeceseeessesseeseeseeeessnees 196 1126 SAVE LOGFIICS serae eieiei i a ard 197 11 3 elle a S E A E E E A 198 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1
113. GCM Logfile C Users Public Documents Tecan Logfiles Magellan Ver sion Instrument Serial Number 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 21 TECAN 1 Introduction 1 5 5 Automatic Software Removal The magellan software can be removed using the standard Windows uninstall routine magellan must be closed Select Add Remove Programs from the Settings Control Panel in the Windows Start menu Select the magellan icon and click Remove The Uninstall wizard is started Select the preferred uninstall method Automatic or Custom and click Next to continue In the next window click Finish to uninstall magellan In the next window decide whether or not shared components should be removed If Yes is selected magellan will be completely uninstalled and other Tecan programs such as XFluor HS Control Manager or Gemini will no longer work Leaving these components installed will not harm your system If you are not sure what to do we suggest to not remove the shared components After clicking Yes or No the magellan software is uninstalled Note When removing all shared components the user administration data is also removed Some Tecan programs for example EVOware will not work any more and must be re installed 22 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 2 1 2 1 1 2013 08 2 Start Working with magellan Start Working with magellan Note Bef
114. HE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL TECAN SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE
115. In vitro diagnostic directive 98 79 EC as an accessory together with a Tecan SUNRISE or INFINITE F50 absorbance reader magellan cannot be used for agglutination assays 1 3 User Profile 1 3 1 Professional User Administrator Level The administrator is a person who has suitable technical training and corresponding skills and experiences If the product is used as intended the person is able to recognize and avoid dangers The administrator has extensive skills and is able to instruct the end user or the routine user in assay protocols in connection with a Tecan product within the bounds of the intended use Computer application skills and good English skills are required 1 3 2 End User or Routine User The end user or routine user is a person who has suitable technical training and corresponding skills and experiences If the product is used as intended the person is able to recognize and avoid dangers Computer application skills and good language skills for the respective national language at the installation site and English are required 14 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 1 Introduction 1 4 Specifications 1 4 1 General magellan software is available in two different versions e magellan Standard software is intended for endpoint kinetic and multilabel assays in pharmaceutical biotechnological and life science industry for research use for food analysis and veterinary ap
116. Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 181 TECAN 9 Batch Processing In the Stacker Operations dialog box the Connect options have to be set Stacker Operations Pre Post Run Options Skip Topmost Plate Restack After Last Plate ok Cancel e Select Skip topmost plate if this plate has been used as a cover The topmost plate will not be processed and will be moved to the output stack e Select Restack after last plate to return all plates to their original order in the input stack after all of the plates have been processed Click OK to confirm the settings and start batch processing of all microplates in the input stack After finishing a batch run the Evaluate Results Wizard opens with the first measured workspace wsp opened If Read barcode has been selected in the Plate program element the workspaces will be named according to the corresponding barcode number otherwise they will be named as defined in the Workspace Name dialog box see chapter 4 3 16 Data Handling Automated Data Handling More Workspace Name Note Automatically loaded sample ID lists should contain only IDs for samples and must not contain IDs for non samples controls standards etc CAUTION If the reader is operated while positioned within the Connect but without using the Connect make sure that the gripper is in the park position and does not hinder any of the reader s moveable parts e g plate c
117. MAL 384 GFS00_ PMT ENHANCED _15367384 FILTOPASESAHEAYSHE ONLY_ PMT NORMALL ee WITH_FP_ PMT NORMAL 354 a 2 5 4 Connecting a Stacker The Tecan Connect stacker can be used additionally See chapter 9 Batch Processing for further details 36 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 6 Licensing magellan Note magellan can be used unregistered for 30 single days of work If magellan is not registered after this period the save and print options will be disabled For licensing magellan there are two possibilities 1 The software has been purchased Together with the software the serial number is delivered 2 The software was delivered as a demo version together with the instrument A registration is possible afterwards No serial number is delivered Note It is very important that the person who registers the software has administrator rights on the computer with operating system Win XP The licensing of magellan is performed with the Register magellan wizard If magellan has not been registered this wizard will launch automatically each time the program is started The Register magellan wizard can also be opened over the miscellaneous icon in the wizard list starting page miscellaneous About magellan gt Register In order to register magellan a serial number the hardware PC unit identification number HUID and a license nu
118. Page Two Page button Zoom In button Zoom Out button Close button Document area Click this button to close the print preview window and the Print dialog box appears The current document can be printed Click this button to view additional page s Click this button to view previous page s Toggle switch shows either a single page or two pages of the document The shown page is zoomed in The shown page is zoomed out Closes the print preview window In the main area the pages of the document are shown as they would look when printed In the File menu click Printer Setup to change the current printer or modify the printer settings The standard Windows Print Setup dialog box appears Select printer paper size and orientation of printout In the File menu click Printout Font to select a specific font font style font size font color etc for future printouts These settings will have no effect on the screen display so it will be difficult to judge the effect these setting have on the printout Large fonts should be avoided to prevent errors or misrepresentation of data When Plate to Plate QC is configured in the method definition magellan compares the currently observed mean value of a control against the mean and standard deviation previously defined for this method Refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 149 TECAN
119. Preview of the printout which contains the Levy Jennings button graph Wesigard rules check and comments Westgard Rules The Westgard rules are a multirule QC model Yes control rule violated Ay IN CONTROL ACCEPT RUN No control rule not violated OUT OF CONTROL REJECT RUN Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds the control limits of x 2SD or x 2SD This rule is used as a warning rule to trigger careful inspection of the control data by the following control rules If no control measurements exceed the mean plus 2s or the mean minus 2s control limit then the measurement procedure is considered in control regardless whether any of the other rules have been violated However if one control measurement exceeds the mean plus 2s or the mean minus 2s control limit and any of the other rules are violated the measurement procedure is considered out of control Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds the control limits of x 3SD or x 39D A run is rejected if a single control measurement exceeds the mean plus 3s or the mean minus 8s control limit Control rule to test whether two consecutive control measurements exceed the same control limit of either x 2SD or x 2SD A run is rejected if 2 consecutive control measurements exceed the mean plus 2s or the mean minus 2s control limit Control rule to test whether the range or difference between contr
120. RUN a uj Sample IDs list STOP button PAUSE button RUN button Plate in Plate out For each single plate a sample ID list can be selected Measurement is stopped The data of the already measured plates are displayed in the created workspace and it is not possible to add measurements of additional plates Measurement is paused The data of the already measured plates are displayed in the created workspace but it is possible to add measurements of additional plates Measurement of the next plate is started The plate is moved into or out of the instrument 106 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Running a multiplate method allows to pause the measurement between two plates saving the achieved results and continuing the measurement for the remaining plates at a later date lf Automatic save workspace is selected the workspace is stored after each single measurement 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 107 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard 5 1 Introduction The Create edit a sample ID list wizard is used to create new sample lists or to edit existing sample lists Up to three sample IDs can be entered or imported per well Workflow Summary Start the Create edit a sample ID list wizard After a welcome page the File selection page appear
121. StartUp Magellan was started Magellan Exit Magellan was closed Successful User Login A user logged in LogOn successfully Failed User FailedLogin Login failed due to wrong LogOn username or password User LogOff A user logged out New Workspace New A new workspace was created Load An existing workspace file was loaded into Magellan N Load Workspace e Save Workspace A workspace was Saved New Method ew A new method was created e Load Method Load An existing method file was loaded into Magellan Save Method A method was saved New Sample ID New A new sample ID list was List created Load Sample ID Load An existing sample ID list List was loaded save Sample ID save A sample ID list was saved List Start Measure A new measurement was Measurement started Attach Signature Signature A workspace or method file was signed 226 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker Export Results ExportASCll Results were exported ExportExcel ExportASTM ExportSampleTracking Prints Results Results were printed Automatic ArchiveFailed The archiving of a Archive workspace method or sample ID list file failed CRC Failure CRCFailed Checksum of the previous log file was invalid 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 227 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 Calculations 13 1 Evaluate Results Calculatio
122. Starting Tracker VESLSION cccsccccseseccseccsneesesesesseessaesesanes 32 2 5 Connecting an INStrUMEN cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeeenseseeneseenenes 35 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 29 1 ANSTOMCNT Connecte risrissrissresriririenr irren r 35 2 5 2 Demo MO 0 1 sce eccccnncccecnnetcneneneeecuenseeeeessecenessesenesesenenes 36 2 5 3 Connecting an Instrument of the Infinite Series 4 36 2 5 4 CONNECTING a StACKEL cccccsecccsseeccseseceeesssnssseeessnsessneess 36 2 6 Licensing magellan sic csierescsecestcccsecacescsestcencsranscencsanetenessxeexesaneaiees 37 2 6 1 Registration Wizard ccccccssccseccssscnsecnesccescseesaussausseussauss 37 Instrument Control amp Settings ccccssseesseesseeseeeneeeseenseeseenneees 41 3 1 Instrument Options se aciise cnt scviecten scence ucecesuciuinsanesvicwnenduiiestndeheawecewins 41 del MOVOTO E E E A E N 41 3 1 2 Temperature CONtHrOL cccccsccccseccccseeccsesecsneecsusesseesssesesenes 41 3 1 3 Heating Dialog Temp Control for Infinite no CIM g EE lc 6c eee ne NAAA ere eee 42 3 1 4 Lamp Laser Control ccccccsccccseccccseeccsuscssneccsusesseeesssesessnes 43 3 1 5 Injector Control cic ccecccssecccsesecceeccsesessuscesesessseeesseesseesesaes 43 LLO DPn ONV socere EET EEE 43 3 2 Setup amp Service Options ccccceseesessesceseecenseeceneseeneeeeeseseeeeseees 43 3 2 1 CHANGE Ins
123. T is set forth in the documentation 3 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE PRODUCT except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed as a single product Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one computer Tecan may provide you with support services related to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT SUPPORT SERVICES Use of SUPPORT SERVICES is governed by Tecan s policies and programs described in the user manual in online documentation and or in other materials provided by Tecan Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the SUPPORT SERVICES shall be considered part of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA With respect to technical information you provide to Tecan as part of the SUPPORT SERVICES Tecan may use such information for its business purposes including for product support and development Tecan will not utilize such technical information in a form that personally identifies you You may not transfer any of your rights under this EULA without the prior written consent of Tecan Without prejudice to any other rights Tecan may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In such event you may not use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT any longer and you must destroy a
124. The parameters A B C and D can be employed as parameters in the transformations The approximation is always applied to the unscaled base point values In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed e Coefficient values A B C and D e Average square deviation d e Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r correlation of data and fit Restrictions for the Process Application Refer to chapter 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types LogitLog for further information Mathematical Description Approximation function f l x gt R A D B 1 C Method First a LogitLog approximation is calculated The parameters A B C D are optimized by the Levenberg Marquardt algorithm an iterative technique that finds a local minimum of a function that is expressed as the sum of squares of nonlinear functions The algorithm stops if an accuracy of 1E 7 FLT EPSILON is reached success or the maximum number of 30 000 iterations is exceeded failure before the given accuracy is reached xB D 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 253 13 Calculations TECAN 13 5 13 Five Parameters Marquardt 254 The five parameter approximation basically needs to fulfill the same base point requirements as LogitLog The sigmoid curve may however be non symmetric The resulting curve will be produced using the Levenberg Marquardt method This method produces an increasin
125. UPON Tecan TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR TECAN AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON TECAN SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated Tecan Software Suppliers to make this disclaimer No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW TECAN SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH T
126. Weighting for Four Five Parameter Fit Marquardt Polynomial Fit Weighting influences the standard optimization algorithm The algorithm tries to optimize the weighted sum of least squares A weighting factor of one means no weighting Weighting factors greater than one mean that the specified point has higher priority for the resulting fit Weighting factors smaller than one indicate that the point is taken less into account WARNING WEIGHTS SHOULD ONLY BE USED IF THERE IS SEVERE STATISTICAL EVIDENCE THAT GATHERED DATA AND ALGORITHM ARE APPROPRIATE Mathematical Description Average weighted square deviation 1 g 7 S kO fD k i 1 i l Automatic calculation of weights using variance The weights are automatically calculated with 1 SD where SD is the standard deviation of the replicates of the actual base point This means that data with high standard deviation is less weighted than data with low standard deviation WARNING WEIGHTING USING VARIANCE IS DANGEROUS WHEN TOO FEW REPLICATES ARE USED BECAUSE THE STANDARD DEVIATION CAN THEN HAVE A HIGH RANDOM PORTION WHICH CONSIDERABLY INFLUENCES THE OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM Automatic calculation of weights using relative weights The weights are automatically calculated with 1 Y where Y is the mean value of the actual base point This means that the algorithm minimizes the relative distances of the data to the curve 2013 08 Instructions for Use f
127. ach other or if they deviate too far from an expected value The program automatically warns the user if the criteria are not met File names of the strip methods useful for export of strip method results Data calculated with polarization measurements Data measured by the instrument Dual wavelength absorbance measurement Data measured using the reference filter Summary of the number of values in the different cutoff ranges Data measured with polarization measurements Data measured with polarization measurements sample IDs are assigned to each well on the basis that the associated probe can be identified The IDs are usually barcodes imported from sample ID lists stored by a pipetting software IDs of the samples Concentration calculated from the input data of each replicate Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 279 15 Glossary of Terms Term TECAN Definition Test Time Basis Time Basis Time Basis to Onset Time Basis to Onset Time max slope sec Time maximum Time minimum Time Onset Time Onset 7 Time points Total Intensity Unavailable Unused User Prompts Validation criteria Well position Workspace 280 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 In previous versions a test contained the evaluation settings but not the measurement parameters Tests are not longer supported in magellan and are replaced
128. ackground color of the Pate view window can be button selected oe The frame color of the displayed plate can be selected a aea The surface color of the displayed plate can be selected Font height The font height for the text within the wells can be drop down list Light shadow button Dark shadow button Selection mode option buttons Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 selected e Small e Medium e Large The light shadow color of the plate frame can be selected The dark shadow color of the plate frame can be selected Here the selection mode for marking wells with the mouse is established e Union allows selecting wells only when the mouse has marked the complete area of the well e Intersect allows for the selection of wells when only a part of the well has been marked with the mouse 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 3 4 Miscellaneous Options Paths Copy Plate View Miscellaneous Wizard Start at startup C Skip welcome page Wizard list dialog box C Favorites dialog box Demo mode allowed C Move plate in after startup Set nest counter value Total counter 1 Counter with daily reset 5 Language Select English o w Set Regulated environments Additionally accept files from PCs HUID Add HUID s Options and default settings audit trail The Miscellaneous tab contains the following elements Wizard group box When selecting the Skip
129. acters 154 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 4 6 Special Characters Shortcuts 2013 08 None tilde parenthesis 1 exclamation mark hash asterisk Corresponding error message is displayed No color third line is empty Data of first replicate is masked or eliminated lt MIN MItPt gt MAX NoCalc 7 Evaluate Results Wizard No data is displayed A tilde is appended for the manipulated value of a well simulated edited for example 0 354 Parenthesis are applied for the masked value of a well for example 0 354 An exclamation mark is appended for the eliminated value of a well for example 0 354 Concentration values are marked with a when the calculated concentration lies outside of the range of the standard curve that means the concentration value has been extrapolated For example 13 75 An asterisk marks values that have been measured using the Use gain regulation option which corrects lowers the gain The average value of a well is unusable for example lamp low divide by zero negative logarithm e No formula is applied to the well or e Replicate well if average s or v calculation or e No cutoff result Average value is derived without using the masked data but the average value is displayed in the well of the first replicate
130. age 48 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Createfedit plate geometry Bottom right well position Distance from top Tiare urm Distance from left 113200 pri By clicking with the mouse set the grid into the center of the well Help gt Cancel x Back HUA Sa EG Ld 2006 Tecan In case the picture does not show an acceptable result go back to Measurement Parameters and enter different gain settings Note When using a fluorescent reagent for performing this plate definition scan it is recommended to measure this sample first in a comparable but known microplate using a typical filling volume to determine the gain and z position for the measurement in the unknown plate Continue by clicking on the green arrow button View Summary to see the summary 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 49 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Finish and Save In the summary dialog you can finally check the grid for the new microplate A zoom function allows a more detailed view of the plate In case you are not fully satisfied you can use the Back button to do further optimizations example when connected to an Infinite F500 Create edit plate geometry Distances Top left Top left 14321 Bottom right P4efe Bottom right 113200 Show grid Show wells Zoom 100 ae Cancel
131. agellan Start magellan and define the magellan Administrator Re enter the user and user rights Copy magellan ini file from the backup archive Copy magellan methods from the backup archive Copy sample ID lists from the backup archive Copy workspaces from the backup archive 8 Copy exported data from the backup archive After the hardware changes and a relicensing of magellan Tracker have been completed the user when opening method and workspace files generated under the old license is informed that the files originate from a different computer To solve this problem please follow the detailed description in chapter 12 2 4 Opening a File Created on Another PC Add HUIDs NOOR WD To make sure that the steps of the system restoration process listed above can be completed quickly a backup archive should be set up in time The backup archive should include magellan methods workspaces sample ID lists exported data audit trail files system audit trail files and the magellan ini file The contents of the backup archive should always be up to date Tecan recommends using the Auto Archiving option for the backup of the methods workspaces and sample ID lists You can find details about Auto Archiving in chapter 11 2 2 Automatic Archiving Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 1 Introduction Magellan Paths Windows XP Magellan ini C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Te
132. alog Put the microplate on the plate transport and start the scanning by clicking on the green arrow button Scan View Summary Next adjust the position of 2 of the 4 scanned wells starting with the upper left position example when connected to an Infinite F500 Createfedit plate geometry Help Upper left well position Distance from top 1 05934 Lunn Distance from left 13964 umi By clicking with the mouse set the grid into the center of the welll LOWER RIGHT POSITION gt E 2006 Tecan Click on the cursor and adjust the grid to the scanned image 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 47 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Createfedit plate geometry Upper left well position Distance from top 1 1269 urm Distance from left 14321 pm By clicking with the mouse set the grid into the center of the well Help ETB lt lt Back LOWER RIGHT POSITION gt 2006 Tecan Continue with the remaining well lower right position by clicking on the green arrow button Lower Right Position and also adjust the grid Create edit plate geometry Bottom right well position Distance from top 73719 prm Distance from left 112783 pm By clicking with the mouse set the grid into the center of the well Help e VIEW SUMMARY gt T 2006 Tecan Click on the cursor and adjust the grid to the scanned im
133. ame cannot be modified afterwards Close the Add Role dialog box by clicking OK Open the Modify Role dialog box a Modify Role Update Role Update the role by modifying associations with application rights The role name cannot be modified Role Mame Application Magellan Rights e Create sample id lists F Edit sample id lists Sign sample id lists F Modify signed sample id lists Create methods w Edit methods C Sign methods C Modify signed methods OR un unsigned methods ball x The Modify Role dialog box contains the following elements Role Name The role name is defined in the Add Role dialog box Application Tecan software component i e magellan fo Rights The role represents a specific user level and corresponding user rights can be selected 208 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 4 3 User Administration Audit Trail Click Audit Trail in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box and the Audit Trail dialog box appears ES Audit Trail Ses User Mame Full Mame Date amp Time Time one Changes 0 25 07 2010 08 51 43 Refer to the audit trail written by the user management server CA Documents and Settings 4ll Users Application Data ecan Tecan User Managementhy 1 Audi Copy to Clipboard All modifications of the user administration database
134. ample ID list An external file type can be selected for import as sample ID list See chapter 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID List The Enter sample IDs button is only enabled if the required settings method has been loaded standard plate type or pdf file has been selected have been defined 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 111 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard 5 2 2 Import Edit a Sample ID List After the selection of the plate type the Import edit a sample ID list plate window is displayed It contains the following elements e Toolbar e Plate view e Sample ID list when Plate type from method has been selected imporifEdit a Semple ID Lint E Semo Ea pa Dase Frit Faaa Printerewew 10 100 Zeen Mahat Hahod Kp a i IMI 1 13 2 1a 4 MIs a Smt 6 tt i 18 7 iA an0 3 i i Si ia ti ETRE F 4 wi td M15 i Set th 5 A7 tE gaii i I Si t Bat to hL a M 7 aA T an 5 Sets a Sli ii i Fath ot H ee e a stg 3 EE m Sui 3 Sut 3 i ti J Mi J 1 4 e Mt 38 3 Sai 3T i z y m a Suita E Sut a ag Smi ai J ann a2 Sa 44 aa Sat_a5 da ZM AB TE aF san a at 14a ET i ay Hee ance coc Rach cannon b J 2 MOT Tia e Dialog to insert sample IDs when Standard plate type has been selected import dit a Sample ID List x Setings Ede A
135. an Application magellan Administrator Specialist Operator Workspace Create workspaces Perform a measurement and save the workspace with a new name or save an existing workspace with a new name Edit workspaces Edit an existing workspace and save it with the same name Continue evaluation when error Continue calculation after errors have occurred Modify raw data standards Edit or mask measurement data of standards controls blanks Yes No No Import raw data Import raw data from ASCII file in an existing workspace Yes No No Modify evaluation Change evaluation method settings in an existing workspace Yes Yes No Reevaluate with another method Reevaluate an existing workspace with another method Yes Yes No Modify layout Change measurement parameters concentration and layout before starting a measurement Yes Yes No Standard curve Create standard curve files Create a new standard curve and save it with a new name Yes Yes No Edit standard curve files Edit an existing standard curve and save it with the same name Yes Yes No General Archive files Move files to an archive location Yes No No Set default paths Set individual paths for saving workspace method sample ID list export and bitmap files Yes Yes Yes 220 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon magellan magellan Application magellan Admin
136. an authorized organization 1 The Administrator is responsible for procedural and technical laboratory issues and for compliance with federal regulations It is recommended this individual be a Laboratory Supervisor For detailed description of the Rights of an Administrator refer to chapter 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker and 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard 2 The Application Specialist is responsible for performance of routine tests and examinations and assistance in the setup of experiments magellan allows the Application Specialist to define specifications containing measurement parameters and evaluation settings and carry out measurements accordingly The Application Specialist must be trained by the Administrator It is recommended this individual meet the minimum requirements necessary to be a Laboratory Technician For a detailed description of the rights of an Application Specialist refer to chapter 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker respectively to chapter 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 13 TECAN 1 Introduction 3 The Operator performs routine analysis under immediate supervision It is recommended this individual meet the minimum requirements necessary to be a Laboratory Assistant magellan allows the Operator to carry out measurements according to the specifications given by the Application Specialist or Administrator The Operato
137. and Windows 7 computers this log file is stored in C Users Public Documents Tecan Logfiles Magellan Version Instrument Serial Number 186 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Support A log file line contains the following information separated by a semicolon Name Description S Date Time Date and time when log entry was created Version of the GCM Enhanced This entry can have one of the following values CO2 O2 DUAL MANUAL SETTINGS or STANDBY SETTINGS indicates that you can select the alias device name of the GCM Enhanced and adjust the altitude STANDBY indicates that no mode is selected or activated For detailed information about the other modes refer to Infinite200 PRO manual Alias name of the device Possible values A B C or D Target Conc O2 Target O2 concentration in Current O2 concentration in Conc CO2 Current CO2 concentration in Target Conc CO2 Target CO2 concentration in Altitude Altitude in m Status CO2 Status Alarm Log file line example Possible values for this entry are ValidData or InvalidData ValidData indicates that the O2 sensor is working InvalidData indicates that the O2 sensor might be missing unplugged or broken Possible values for this entry are ValidData or InvalidData ValidData indicates that the CO2 sensor is working InvalidData indicates that the CO2 sensor m
138. and the DOCUMENTATION and of all copies wherever located without demand or notice 11 MISCELLANEOUS This EULA is governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Switzerland Any dispute arising out of or in connection with this EULA shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the commercial court of the Canton of Zurich Switzerland 12 Tecan Software Suppliers You have acquired a device DEVICE which includes software licensed by Tecan from one or more software licensors Tecan Software Suppliers Such software products as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT Tecan FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT Tecan HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND TECAN SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS HAS RELIED
139. are displayed Selecting a data set will either display the data in the plate layout or display the data in the Data Information window e Control Bar of Edit Method tab the settings and parameters of the loaded method are displayed The size of the latter three windows can be changed by using the splitter bars that separate the windows Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 145 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Plate Layout Toolbar Buttons The view displays a schematic layout of a microplate Rows are marked alphabetically columns numerically In the control bar on the left hand side all available data is listed The selected data is displayed in the plate layout in the text pane or in a separate graph window according to the type of the selected data Context Sensitive Menu of the Plate Layout To display a summary of all data of one well select the well and select Summary from the right mouse button menu Available toolbar buttons are described in the following paragraphs Depending on the data selected different buttons are displayed when Instrument data is selected the Edit button is available when Concentration or Kinetic data is selected the Curve Graph button is available The following buttons are only available in the Evaluate results wizard Edit Click the Edit button to edit or mask raw data a button Click this button to display the Summary dialog box 10 button Click this
140. arrier cuvette carrier filter slide etc 182 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 9 Batch Processing 9 5 4 Control Stacker Movements for Infinite Series Readers To control the movements of the Connect stacker click the Miscellaneous icon in the Wizard List dialog box and select Instrument control If a Connect stacker is connected the Movements button in the Connect group box is now available Instrument Control In trument Setup amp Service Movements Change instrument Temperature control Define filter slides Injector control Plate geometry editor oa BiG ed Buildin Test Connect Movements Click the Movements button in the Connect group box to open the Stacker Movements dialog box Stacker Movements Movements Service e Select Restack to return the processed plates from the output stack to the input stack in their original order After Restack is selected a dialog box appears in which the plate type must be selected and confirmed with OK before the restacking procedure is performed e Select Park to move the gripper into the park position e Select Teaching to start the Positioning wizard For details see the Instructions for Use for Connect chapter 5 Positioning Wizard in i control and magellan 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 183 TECAN 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhance
141. ars where you can enter a file name and remarks Click the small Save button on the left of the window to save the file you can continue working on the method or workspace Click the Save button on the right side at the bottom of the screen to save the file and to close the wizard The program goes back to the wizard list 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 275 TECAN 14 Application Example 14 2 5 Summary of Definition of Quantitative ELISA in magellan 2 6 1 Subtract Blank value Definitions in magellan Click on Add new transformation in the control bar and a window appears asking if you want to define a Blank reduction Click Yes and the Blank reduction formula is assigned automatically to all wells 2 Define Concentrations Definitions in magellan Control bar Method layout Conc Dil Ref values Selected identifier ST Unit UA ml ST1_1 5 ST1_1 Standard 1 first experimental group ST1 2 10 ST1_2 Standard 2 first experimental group ST1 3 20 ST1_3 Standard 3 first experimental group ST1_4 40 ST1_4 Standard 4 first experimental group ST1_5 80 ST1_5 Standard 5 first experimental group ST1_6 160 ST1_6 Standard 6 first experimental group 3 Define Standard Curve Definitions in magellan Control bar Concentrations Standard curve Input data blank reduction Analysis type linear regression X axis linear Y axis linear 4 Define Cut
142. articular you shall be responsible for verifying the contents and the consistency thereof as the SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall be used under your sole management control and responsibility Tecan shall not be held liable for any indirect or consequential damages or any loss of profit shortfall in earnings or loss of data incurred by you even if Tecan has been informed that the said loss or prejudice could occur The CD ROMs delivered have undergone an anti virus test However Tecan shall not be liable should a virus be present that was undetectable by the anti virus utility used to run the test mentioned above Should for any reason whatsoever Tecan be held liable by the courts the amount of any damages effectively owed and ordered to be paid shall not exceed the total amount of the sums received by Tecan by virtue of the present EULA 9 CONFIDENTIALITY You hereby acknowledge and agree that you will not disclose the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION to any of your employees except to those responsible for the application or to any third party without the prior written consent of Tecan and that this duty of confidentiality survives the term of this EULA You will safeguard the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION with the highest degree of care 10 TERMINATION If you fail to comply with any of your obligations hereunder Tecan shall have the right at any time to terminate the EULA and take immediate possession of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT
143. as bitmap Saves the graph as a bitmap file Print Opens the Print dialog box from which the graph can be printed Printer Setup Opens the Printer Setup dialog box in which the printer settings can be defined Zoom to 100 Sets the graph display back to the 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph Dilution Series Displays the intercept values and correlation Data coefficients Properties select this command to change the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized Help Opens the standard magellan help dialog box 7 4 12 Control Bar Qualitative Results The cutoff definition shows an overview of the currently used cutoff ranges and the used cutoff limits This overview is particularly useful if the cutoff limits are defined as formulas In the data information window on the bottom of the screen the list of cutoff definitions is displayed The list contains the experimental groups the input data for each experimental group the cutoff ranges the cutoff formulas and the calculated cutoff limits The user can view the cutoff results e Cutoff definition Ranges and limits of the ranges e Cutoff results Cutoff result for each well e Cutoff statistic Statistics of the number of hits for each range 162 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7
144. ata sets e Matrix separated option button Data of each selected data set is arranged ina separate matrix e Matrix XFluor style option button Data of each selected data set is arranged ina separate matrix together with column and well description similar to XFluor e Table well data in rows option button All data of one well is arranged in horizontal direction Starting with data of the well position A1 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 89 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 90 Add data group box Set as default button Restore default button Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 TECAN e Table well data in columns option button All data of one well is arranged in vertical direction Starting with data of the well position A1 lf the Add kinetic timestamps check box is selected the time stamps of the measurements are added lf the Add Temperatures check box is selected the temperatures of the measurements are added lf the Insert Data names check box is selected a list with the names of the exported data is displayed on top of the ASCIl file respectively the EXCEL worksheet Provides selectable data options The selected information will be attached to the end of the data and then exported with the selected data Select the respective check boxes e Date time of measurement check box e Method filename check box e Method pathname check box e Wo
145. ata within the same area First data from the Available data list must be selected then data from the Selected data list When clicking the Insert button the former will be included within the latter and will then occupy the same area in the print out as its parent element For example if the standard deviation values are included in the measurement value element both will be displayed within the corresponding cell of a matrix The measurement values will in this case serve as the parent element and will therefore be displayed first This button provides the possibility to import the selected data list from another method If this button is clicked the Open a file method window appears and another method can be selected Selected elements within the Selected data list can be deleted Use these buttons to reorganize the sequence of lists graphs matrixes on the printout or to reorganize items within a matrix or a list Is enabled when a list is selected Style and content of the list can be selected 94 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Style group box Vertical list option button Prints the data in form of a vertical list order A1 B1 and SO On Vertical list alternating option button The order of the data is alternating for each row or column order A1 B1 H1 H2 G2 A2 Horizontal list option button Prints the data in form o
146. ate edit a method wizard and the Select a file dialog box appears Select Create new Create Edit a Method Show Files from this instrument w Remarks Status MAKE YOUR SELECTION 2007 Tecan Measurement Parameters Click Next and the Measurement parameter dialog box appears Create Edit a Method Measurement type Endpoint measurement 2 Kinetic measurement C Multilabel measurement Measurement parameters DEFINE EVALUATION 7004 Tecan Select Endpoint measurement and click the Measurement parameters button The following dialog box appears 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 259 TECAN 14 Application Example Measurement Parameter SUNRISE Simulation e General Wavelengths Meas Params Temperature Shaking Measurement mode Move plate out after measurement Comment to this measurement On the General tab select Absorbance On the Wavelengths tab select 492nm as Measurement wavelength and 620nm as Reference wavelength Click OK to return to the Measurement parameter dialog box Click Define evaluation and the Plate layout window is displayed Create Edit a Method z 2 Method layout Plate layout Exp group 1 A v poyjaw yipajayeas ID Num a _ Replicates afr Fix number 1 A eof 2004 Tecan 260 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2
147. ath and must be converted In the Wizard List dialog box click Evaluate results Click Next on the Welcome page of the Evaluate Results wizard and the Select a file dialog box appears Select the workspace Quantitative Elisa example_Sunrise wsp from the file list and click Make your selection Calculations are executed and the following plate layout window is displayed Evaluate results IgM ELISA wsp lgM ELISA mth File Edit Instrument E J SM1_1 SM1_5 SM1_9 SM1_13 SM1_17 SM1_21 SM1_25 SM1_29 SM1_33 SM1_37 i i 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 207 0 1 0 816 0 174 0 166 0 083 0 085 0 085 0 08 0 162 0 131 Measurement data Mean SM1_2 SM1_6 sm1_10 SM1_14 SM1_18 SM1_22 SM1 SM1_30 SM1_34 SM1_38 s Measurement data Fa oa im 2 j 1 2 1 2 1 2 17 1 1 2 t 1 2 1 2 1 2 v Measurement data Fi 0 212 0 196 0 156 0 106 0 216 0 103 0 131 0 152 Reference data Mean H SM1_6 SM1_10 SM1_14 SM1_18 SM1_22 SM1_26 SM1_30 SM1_34 SM1_38 s Reference data 2 2 f f 2 2 2 2 2 2 i i i 2 2 i if v Reference data OES 0 764 0 205 0 abl _0 112 J i Measurement data as C Measurement data Reference data s JNsad ayenjeag poujaw qip Reference data as Colors i i i 1 2 i 1 2 1 2 ws f 7 sm TEJ ET sm1_15 SM1_19 ETEA ETE Reduced data E ps x x ms 5 i 27 l 2 2 2 2 j I 2 2 2 Difference data j 0 0 11 i 0 166 r Difference data Mean E F 2 E E sm1_16
148. ave to be inserted plate by plate Note Only sample ID lists created in magellan can be inserted Import of other formats is not supported RUN Click this button to start the measurement PAUSE The Evaluate Results wizard is reached when clicking Pause further plates can be appended later STOP The Evaluate Results wizard is reached when clicking Stop no further plates can be added After the measurement is completed the Results dialog box appears in which all results and calculations can be viewed See chapter 7 Evaluate Results Wizard for more information 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 139 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard Insert Sample ID List 140 The Insert Sample ID List option is used to load a previously defined sample ID list file into a workspace The Insert Sample ID List dialog box contains the following elements Filename field The list displays all available sample ID list files smp Select a sample ID list by clicking a filename Remarks field Available comments and remarks will be displayed Import button Click to open a standard Windows Open dialog box External files can be imported Refer to chapter 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID List for further information Select the desired sample ID list from the Filename field and click OK to view the sample ID list in the Sample ID List with Plate Layout Preview window lf the method and
149. average of arg1 The value with the highest absolute deviation to the average value is then checked to ensure that it lies within the range according to arg4 Is the value lying outside of this range it will be viewed as being invalid In this case the average calculation will begin again excluding the previously discovered invalid value and continue in this manner until no more rogue values can be found A result of TRUE will be delivered when enough valid individual values are available Example eliminate NC 1 0 15 2 0 The average value will be generated for the negative controls It will then be seen whether the individual negative controls lie above NC1 0 15 There is no lower limit If this is the case the rogue value s will be eliminated as described above If on completion at least 2 individual values are valid a result of TRUE will be returned otherwise a result of FALSE will be given eliminatePerc arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 The validation interval will be defined using a percentage of the average value This function eliminates values as described for function eliminate The validation range is defined using a percentage arg2 of the identifier 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 239 13 Calculations TECAN Example eliminatePerc NC 1 10 2 1 Individual values will be invalid if they deviate to an extent of more than 10 below or above the average On completion a minimum of 2
150. ax Area tab contains the following elements Input data Select the input data to be processed drop down list Mean minimum Select to open the Points text field where the fixed value check box number of points has to be entered for the minimum value An even curve will then be generated using these points and the lowest value contained in the curve determined Mean maximum Select to open the Points text field where the fixed value check box number of points must be entered for the maximum value An even curve will then be generated using these points and the highest value contained in the curve determined Area check box The start and end time can be typed into the provided text fields otherwise the whole kinetic is analyzed e Time Points option buttons lf Time is selected the start and end time is entered in hours minutes and seconds If Points is selected the start and end point for the analysis is given through the entered kinetic cycle number e Start field The start time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number has to be entered here e End field The end time in hours minutes and seconds or cycle number has to be entered here Averages are taken from the number of points starting from the first kinetic measurement value and stepping through one by one until the last kinetic measurement point is included in the average calculation The minimum maximum value is determined from these averages The result da
151. be formed min ST1_ 1 Determines the minimum of the individual replicates of the first standard maxAvg argument and minAvg argument This function gives the maximum minimum average value of argument The argument must be an identifier Example minAvg SM1 If a number of results are found for SM1 only the minimum average will be given PointwiseCV argument The average point wise coefficient of variation CV is determined The result can be used to validate the standard curve The argument must be an identifier Example PointwiseCV ST1 Assume ST1_1_1 0 54 ST1_1_2 0 52 cv 2 668 ST1_2 1 0 72 ST1_2 2 0 77 cv 4 746 ST1_3 1 1 08 ST1_3 2 0 99 cv 6 148 The result of pointwiseCV is the average of the CV of ST1_1 ST1_2 and ST1_3 and is 4 5209 Sum argument This function calculates the sum of argument Example sum SM1 The sum of all the samples in the first experimental group will be formed sum ST1_ 1 Determines the sum of the replicates of the first standard stddev argument This function calculates the standard deviation of argument The argument must be an identifier Example stddev NC 1 The standard deviation of the negative control in the first experimental group will be formed 238 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 4 6 Elimination Functions The elimination functions will be employed in the validation In this way the user can make s
152. bel1 x Label1 BL1 predefined ratio caculation with blank reduction Note If the read mode is set to absorbance the formula to calculate the transmission is offered in the combo box 1 10 x The transformation definition has two modes Select mode When clicking on a well the corresponding formula is displayed in the text box The currently active well is displayed with a red border Edit mode When entering a formula or pressing the key the active well is displayed with a blue border Selecting other wells adds the corresponding identifier to the current formula When selecting the currently active well an x is added to the formula The symbol x refers to the current value within a well Once the formula is created it will be assigned to the selected well with pressing enter or clicking the confirm button green hook After assigning the formula the select mode is reached An integrated formula checker verifies the plausibility of the formula A warning appears in case the created formula is not executable Select CANCEL to discard the defined formula and to reach the select mode It is also possible to use the corresponding buttons on the left of the formula text box When in Select mode click the red square in the right lower edge of the well and drag the red selection frame over those wells for which the formula should be set It is also possible to select the desired wells and use the functions Set
153. box After selection of a sample ID list file the Sample ID List with Plate Layout Preview dialog appears in which the user has to confirm the selection Use stacker This option is available whenever the Connect stacker is used together with the instrument Check this option in order to measure all plates in the stacker with this method Refer to the Connect Instructions for Use for further information The workspaces will be stored with default workspace names After all plates have been measured only the first workspace is open Use File Open or the Evaluate Results wizard to open the other workspaces It is not possible to use the stacker when performing kinetic measurements Plate In Out button Click to move the plate carrier This button changes its text depending on the position of the plate carrier Note When Use stacker is selected while using magellan make sure that the overall runtime does not exceed the time set in the Auto Lock option see chapter 11 4 5 User Administration Options Login Options When magellan is locked the stacker run will stop even if the Measurement parameters group box Please note group box measurements are not finished Movements button Further movements of the instrument can be invoked filter slide mirror carriage and so on Optimize Z Position button The user can optimize the z position of the reader Injector control Refer to the respective instrument s instruction
154. by the more powerful methods Kinetic Parameter Time until the basis value is reached Kinetic Parameter Time until the basis value is reached Kinetic Parameter Time between basis value and onset value Kinetic Parameter Time between the basis and the onset value Kinetic Parameter Kinetic Parameter Time point of the maximum slope Kinetic Parameter Time until the maximum is reached Kinetic Parameter Time until the minimum is reached Kinetic Parameter Time until the defined onset value is reached Kinetic Parameter Time until the defined onset in is reached Time stamps of the single measurements of a kinetic measurement Data calculated with polarization measurements Requested data is not available No data measured no layout defined in this well User Prompts are references that are setup in the method They are displayed before the measurement and the user has to add text to them This text will then be incorporated in a printout Summary of validation condition results Name of the well for example A1 A2 All available data within the program can be found in the Workspace for example the measurement data the print definition and the method definition The Workspace is used for loading methods and running measurements Precedes values that have been eliminated during calculation Precedes concentration values that have been calculated using extrapolation and lie outside the range of the standard curve Parent
155. can Magellan Methods C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Magellan mth or as set in the Options dialog box Workspaces C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Magellan wsp or as Set in the Options dialog box Sample ID lists C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Magellan smp or as set in the Options dialog box Exported data C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Magellan asc or as Set in the Options dialog box Audit Trail files Path as shown in the Audit Trail dialogue box under user administration System Audit Path as specified in chapter 12 2 4 Opening a File Trail Created on Another PC Add HUIDs GCM Logfile C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Logfiles Magellan Version Instr ument Serial Number Magellan Paths Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Magellan ini C Users Public Documents Tecan Magellan Methods Standard path C Users Public Documents Tecan Magellan mth or as set in the Options dialog box Workspaces C Users Public Documents T ecan Magellan wsp or as set in the Options dialog box Sample ID lists C Users Public Documents Tecan Magellan smp or as set in the Options dialog box Exported data C Users Public Documents Tecan Magellan asc or as set in the Options dialog box Audit Trail files Path as shown in the Audit Trail dialogue box under user administration System Audit Path as specified in 12 3 System Audit Trail Trail
156. can be entered here e Basis option button and text field If the Basis option button is selected an absolute value for the basis must be entered in the adjacent text field Time to onset lf the Time to onset check box is selected a check box percentage value for the onset can be entered in the following text field e Text field A percentage value for the onset must be entered e Basis mean of the first n points option button and text field If the option button is clicked the points text field is active and the desired number of points can be entered here e Basis option button and text field If the Basis option button is selected an absolute value for the basis must be entered in the adjacent text field The result data made available through this method includes the basis value the time taken to reach the basis value the time taken to reach the sum of basis and onset value and the difference of these two time spans Time Basis to Onset With increasing kinetic measurement values the onset value is to be defined as a positive number with decreasing values the onset value is to be defined as a negative number Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Min Max Area Tab Use this tab to define the evaluation of the minimum and maximum values contained in the curve and to define the calculation of the area under the kinetic curve The Min M
157. ccceeeeeeees 98 100 148 ASTM File Export LIS cccceeeeees 147 148 Attach SIQNa ture ccccccceccsssseeeseeseeeseaeeees 173 PAIGE Tiaka 223 Autofill Selection vosaeccuritaciive tints aactiavnontenen 116 Automated Data Handling ccccceeeeeeees 98 Automatic Archiving cccccseeceeeseeeeeeneeeeeens 193 Available Data ccccccccssececseseeteeeeeteeeenenens 80 avg argument cecccceesececceeseeeceeeeessaaeees 237 B BALCA PLO COS SING sssrini 175 Microplate Requirement 0 ccceceeeeeeeeees 175 C calcAlways argument sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Calculations naisicsissusinesitscesunslesiiawnnsuicneccddawtiaanmnucin 229 Polarization Data Reduction cceeee 230 Spectra Data REdUCTION ccccceeeeeeeeeeee anes 232 Calculations iiicisestvcetavnotsransotiicctematewieseancatenentin 229 Change Password cccceeesseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 33 Color SCANS iericctssctbemeceeeitametiiceaouateeiniestcetentacee 164 Components amp TerMsS cccccsscccceeeeeseeeees 25 28 Conc Dil and Ref Values cceeeeeeeeeee eee 65 Concentrations ccc ceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 159 Connecting an Instrument ccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 35 Context Sensitive Menu of a Well of Evaluate Results Tab ccceeeeeseeeeees 164 Details Dialog ccccsssceccssseeceeseeeceeeeeeseaees 165 Edit DialO O scenens enene
158. ch Processing 9 5 3 Start Batch Processing for Infinite Series Readers To run a measurement using the Tecan Connect Stacker click Use stacker in the Start Measurement dialog box of Start Measurement wizard refer to chapter 6 6 Start Measurement or Create Edit a Method wizard refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Start Measurement Measurement Measurement parameters Workspace HTRF FSOO wep le Flate A o Plate Description GRE S6ft Greiner 96 Fla Method HTAF_FS00 mith Modify layout Plate with Cover Mo Barcode No Sample ID list Insert Part of Plate Range 41 H12 Instrument Fluorescence Intensity Excitation wavelength 485 nm Use stacker Cunent 21 8 C Excitation bandwidth 20 nm Emission wavelength 560 nm Plate in Target eu T Emission bandwidth 20 nm e Reading mode Top Movements Optimize position Lag time 150 ps Integration time SOO ps Please note Number of reads 10 Settle time O ms fou are using the stacker with Platetype GRESE Gain Optimal Plateheight 14 6 mm Z Position Calculated fom well Skirtheight 2 5 mm F Pnszitinn well 21 Hep Cancel Back 2007 Tecan Click Start and the Stacker Operations dialog box appears Note The defined script will be performed on each of the available plates in the input stack It is not possible to run the entire stack more than once per script 2013 08
159. ck box In case the well plate consists of a large number of wells the individual well assignments cannot be displayed in the 100 zoom mode In such a case the Zoom mode button allows a zoom into the marked area If activated the user can select an area to zoom in by clicking and dragging a frame over the desired layout area Click the right mouse button to zoom out to 100 display Context Sensitive Menu of the Plate Layout By right clicking on a well on the plate layout a context sensitive menu for the marked wells is displayed The following commands are available Menu Description Summary The Summary dialog box is displayed See below for further information Cut The sample IDs of the marked wells are deleted from the wells and copied to the clipboard Copy The sample IDs of the marked wells are copied to the clipboard Paste The sample IDs copied to the clipboard are pasted into the marked wells Delete Click Delete or press DEL to delete the sample IDs of the marked wells Copy in ASCII The sample IDs of the marked wells are copied to the Format clipboard in ASCII file format This way they can easily be pasted into other applications e g Excel Notepad Paste in ASCII Sample IDs can be pasted from the clipboard in ASCII Format file format from other applications See below for further information Edit The Edit option opens the Edit Well dialog box The Autofill Selection sample ID of the marked well ca
160. constants If evaluation settings are defined the calculation is started right after the measurement Edit Prompts Dialog If user prompts were specified in the method the Edit user prompts dialog box is displayed It contains the following elements Prompt Answer list At each text field of this list any text prompt can be entered Req check box A Required check box next to every Prompt Answer text field determines that the measurement can only be started when a text has been entered Click Continue to close the user prompts dialog the Start Measurement window appears If set in the method the Edit Constants dialog appears Edit Constants Dialog 136 The Edit Constants dialog box appears only if the required flag is set for at least one constant in the selected method Constants list At each text field of this list the value of the constant or the comment can be modified Req check box A Required check box next to every Constant value text field determines that this constant value needs to be confirmed Do this by continuing to the next page If the method constants have been modified the new values can be automatically transferred and saved into the corresponding method Click Modify constants in Method to modify the current method with the new defined constants Please note that this dialog is available only for magellan users with the user right Edit methods Click Continue to close the constants dialog the Start M
161. cted in one Windows application by cutting or copying it to the clipboard and then added into another application by pasting it from the clipboard Correlation coefficient indicates the strength and direction of a linear relationship between two random variables The cutoff limit enables the user to define the limits between two conditions for example positive or intermediate These criteria are used in the evaluation of the results Name of the cutoff range the value lies in as defined under cutoff definition Definition of all cutoff ranges and calculated limits Defined dilution factors of the samples and controls A dilution factor of 2 represents a 1 2 dilution A sample with replicates in different dilutions The G factor is a instrument constant used in calculations of polarization measurements In order to determine the G factor a calibration measurement has to be performed 1 minus average relative square deviations of the base points from the curve Graphs can be displayed for kinetic measurements enzyme kinetics multilabel measurements dilution series or standard curves 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 277 15 Glossary of Terms TECAN Term Definition Hidden Displayed if well data is hidden when printing HUID Hardware Unit Identification Number IC 50 The dilution concentration which results in 50 of the maximum Intensity parallel Intensity perpendicular I
162. d Assignm Identifiers Esp group Replcates aja O Fis number TFPI ae i F a Nien C a S Fill Delete selection selection To each well in the analysis plate an identifier can be assigned On this basis the plate layout should be defined i e a well that is to be viewed as being a positive control would be allocated a different identifier from that of a well that is to be viewed as being a negative control Assign an Identifier to the Required Well In the Well Assignment dialog box well identification and layout definition can be carried out This box provides also a number of automated ID assignment capabilities which is an essential tool for high density plates The desired settings have to be made in the Well Assignment dialog box There are several ways to select the wells Follo Clicking the individual well Dragging the mouse over the required wells Click one of the letters A H or numbers 1 12 to select a row or column Click the O symbol in the upper left corner of the microplate to select the whole plate Add wells in a certain area After selecting a single well hold the Shift key and click and drag the previously selected well to the currently selected well Toggle selection state of a well When holding the Ctrl key the selection state of the selected well is toggled For example a click on an already selected well removes the well from the current selec
163. d Point to point Linear Regression Non linear Regression Cubic spline Akima Polynomial including the field for selection of the polynomial order and including weight options 7 Four Parameters including the more button for minimum and maximum determination 8 Four Parameters Marquardt including the more button for definition of the weighting options 9 Five parameters including the more button for definition of the weighting options 10 LogitLog including the more button for minimum and maximum determination gt Se YS The analysis type is applied to scaled values Following scaling modes can be selected e Lin x Lin y x and y axis are scaled linear e Lin x Log y x axis is scaled linear y axis is scaled logarithmically e Log x Lin y x axis is scaled logarithmically y axis is scaled linear e Log x Log y x and y axis are scaled logarithmically Note Please note that if one selects log scaling for the x axis it is not possible to have a concentration value of 0 since it is mathematically not possible to calculate a logarithm of 0 But it is possible to use a value of 82 for example 0 0000007 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 2013 08 More button Include 0 0 check box Extrapolation check box Extrapolation factor numeric field Click the More button to view the following options e Standa
164. d Support 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Support 10 1 Introduction The magellan software supports data logging and data display for the GCM Enhanced which is an optional module for Infinite F200 PRO and Infinite M200 PRO devices Note Data logging and data display do not work in conjunction with stacker applications 10 2 Prerequisites In order to enable communication between the GCM Enhanced and magellan you have to install the Virtual Com Port VCP driver from the magellan data carrier CD ROM Furthermore you have to connect the GCM Enhanced to your PC via the USB cable enclosed with the module In order to verify that the GCM Enhanced is connected properly navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System select the Hardware tab and click on the Device Manager button Within the Device Manager navigate to Ports COM amp LPT and check for an entry similar to Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge A Device Manager File Action wiew Help 7 S E mA g Computer See Disk drives 0 Display adapters 4 DYDICD ROM drives Bg Human Interface Devices 4 IDE ATAJATAFI controllers Keyboards 7 Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors H E Network adapters El Ports COM amp LPT Y Communications Port COMI Silicon Labs CP210 USB to UART Bridge fCOM4 E a Fe Processors Ge SCSI and RAID controllers H Sound video and game controlle
165. default Administrators and Application Specialists possess the required rights When a new method is created the password protection can be set in the Save as tab of the Create edit a method wizard Enter the name of the method type the password in the Method password edit field right bottom corner of the dialog and click Finish Confirm the password in the displayed Method password dialog box and click OK The method is saved with the password protection Already saved but not password protected methods can be protected by opening the method and setting the password in the Save as tab as described above Edit Password Protected Methods When you open a password protected method a dialog box is displayed asking for the method password Enter the correct method password and the method is opened in Edit mode It is possible to edit and save the method No additional password entry is needed lf Read only is selected the method is opened in read only mode It is still possible to edit the method but it is not possible to save the changes Change the Password of a Password Protected Method 104 In order to change the password of a password protected method open the method in Edit mode password entry required and enter a new password in the Method password edit field of the Save as tab Click Finish Confirm the password in the successive Method password dialog box and click OK The password has been changed Instructions fo
166. dfs COS 48t pdfs COSER pdfs COS S6fb pds COS 6K pdfs COSSEt_half area pdfs Half area with comer notch COS 96hw pdfs COS 9brt pdfs CUY 43 pdfs Cuvette holder Cuvette_AMA_O1 pol emra Ar lt MAKE YOUR SELECTION gt 2006 Tecan Plate Definition Insert the Basic dimensions Number of rows Skirt height Number of columns Well shape Plate height Well diameter Plate height with cover Well depth Note Be careful with settings of um and ul values Measure with a caliper ruler or better use values from the plate design drawings given by the plate manufacturer Be aware that when you manually measure the plate height any plate tolerances caused by the production process of the plate will not be covered 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 45 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings 46 Select Define Positions by clicking on the green arrow button example when connected to an Infinite F500 instrument Createfedit plate geometry Basic dimensions Number of rows Number of columns 12 l Well shape Plate height 14600 Well diameter Plate height with cover 17606 well depth Skirt height 2500 Working volume Plate height tolerance 200 Max volume Help gt DEFINE POSITIONS oO 2006 Tecan magellan allows scanning of plates on 2 or 4 corners depending on the instrument connected With an instrument of the Infinite Series con
167. ds Therefore the calculations are relatively easy to define All values are calculated in double precision although they are displayed depending on the desired number format 13 4 2 Formula Variables All of the previously defined abbreviations for the identifiers contained within the analysis plate can be employed as variables in calculations For example PC1 SM1_1 BL1 Average values PC1_1 SM1_1_1 BL1_1 Individual values individual replicates Note The program differentiates between lower and upper case letters when dealing with these labels It is also possible to work with the well coordinates For example A2 B3 H12 Note Well coordinates must always be written using upper case letters Note The symbol x refers to the current value within a well For example x BL1 subtracts the empty value blank from the current value Note The different cycles for kinetic measurements can be accessed by indices where 0 indicates the first cycle 000 For example SM1_1 0 Average value of sample 1 of the first cycle x 1 value of current well of the second cycle x i value of the current well and the current cycle Serial Kinetic Subtraction Calculation of Difference between Kinetic Cycles Calculations over kinetic data can be defined by using the iteration variable i in formulas For instance a numerical derivative of a kinetic curve can be performed using the formula x i
168. e In the control bar on the left of the window select the next option Add new transformation from the Transformed data item to define blank reduction 3 vf X fs xBL1 v Available data Le Input data Difference data A dialog box appears asking you if you want to define a blank reduction Click Yes Select Difference Data in the Input data box By default the transformation is named Transformation see control bar If you have confirmed the definition of a blank reduction before the software automatically names it Blank reduction In the Formula box automatically appears x BL1 for this blank reduction where x refers to the current input data value in a well and BL1 is the mean value of the blank wells of experimental group 1 Now select the whole plate by clicking the o sign in the upper left corner of the microplate and click the green hook next to the formula window to assign the transformations to the wells Fur further details and explanations concerning the definition and assignment of transformations refer to chapter 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation The following window appears Create Edit a Method x Zoom Input data Difference data v X fe v Available data M Method layout Plate layout Conc Dil Ref values i 4 G y S E E N 7 2 S AN A A Q Ay to 5 gt Sj l Transformed data lt i Blank reduction 2 SM1_ TE M1_17 M1_2 M
169. e The number in the second line Volume defines the line to use If the indicated line does not exist the sample ID list cannot be read If any line contains an error number greater than zero depending on the error number either a critical or an uncritical error is set e Position Well position e g 1 A1 2 B1 e Tube ID ignored e Scan error if the error number is greater than zero a critical error is set Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 123 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard e SRCRack sample ID 2 e SRCPos if SRCTubelD is empty used as sample ID 1 SRCRackID _ SRCPos e SRCTubelD if not empty used as sample ID 1 e Volume ignored e Error sample ID 3 if the error number is greater than zero a critical error is set e SRCRackID if SRCTubelD is empty used as sample ID 1 SRCRackID SRCPos e GridPos ignored e TipNumber ignored e DetectVol ignored e Time ignored Custom Format Files When importing custom format files the Custom Format dialog box is displayed The Custom Format dialog box contains the following elements Plate type group box In the plate type group box the plate format can be specified If the format is already specified the edit fields are disabled Rows Enter the number of rows Enter the number of columns File format group In the File format group box the format of the specified box file can be defined
170. e instrument measurement or demo mode for which the files were generated Note Files from magellan versions earlier than 4 0 must be converted in order to be used Note Files from magellan Standard must be converted in order to be used with magellan Tracker Important After conversion methods must be validated because the content of the converted files may differ slightly from the original file e g contents of printed report etc The Convert Documents dialog box contains two tabs The magellan 2 x magellan 3 x tab contains the following elements Document type group box Customize new method specific options group box Select all button Select the document type for conversion e Sample ID list e Method e Workspace e Test e Plate definition Several global options in magellan versions lower than V4 0 are now method specific In order to set this options correctly in the method and workspace files use one of the following buttons e Export to ASCII file button e Export Options button e Export to Excel button e Workspace name button Click this button to select all displayed files in the file list 196 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon File name All files available for conversion are displayed Click a file list to select it for conversion By holding the Shift key multiple file selections are possib
171. e existing plate geometry files The Plate geometry editor is a software application accessible via magellan The following commands and options are available Create edit plate A new plate definition file can be created or an existing geometry plate definition file can be edited or verified Basic dimensions Basic dimensions of the plate and the wells can be set e g number of rows and columns well shape well diameter well depth scan plate Enter well Select between 2 4 or whole plate scan or enter the position corresponding distance of top left well and bottom right well Measurement When Scan plate is selected the measurement parameters parameters can be inserted clicking the corresponding button Save The newly created or modified plate geometry can be saved entering a name and remarks 44 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Note We recommend not to use the functions Gain from Well and Z from Well with scanning Use Manual Gain and Manual Z instead Create New Plate Definition File or Validate an Existing Plate Definition File Select Create new in the Create edit plate geometry dialog box and click on the green arrow Make Your Selection to open the editor Createfedit plate geometry e Create new C Edit verify Filename Remarks CO51 2ft pdfs COS 24ft pdfs COS 384f6 pdi COS 384ft pdfs COS 384 fy p
172. e handling Archive Files Archive path Remarks 1 25 Divdroxy Vitamin D File Name Date iT 1001 2005 003 wep 117 2008 12 50 06 PM GP vitamin D wsp 1 17 2008 12 55 26 PM A Select All Refresh vitamin D_3 wsp 1 17 2008 12 55 26 PM 1 17 2008 1 20 29 PM 1 17 2008 1 20 29 PM 1 17 2008 1 51 33 PM 1 17 2008 1 51 33 PM 1 18 2008 1 03 57 PM 1 18 2008 1 03 57 PM 1 18 2008 1 04 33 PM 1118 2008 1 04 33 PM 18 2008 2 27 11 PM 18 2008 2 27 11 PM 1 21 2008 1 32 17 PM 1 21 2008 2 06 46 PM SP vitamin D 2 wsp vitamin D_1 wsp T 10012008 003_2 wsp T 10012008 003_1 wsp M Elisa_1 mth WP Elisa _2 mth 18012008 001 wsp 07 18012008 002 wsp H A InterfaceTest O01 1 iPuinterfaceTest Import T 15012008 004_Dain T 15012008 004_Dain_ Fiter Current Filter Endpoint measurement Automation check lt 0 of 26 selected Convert convert from __comvertton Import Import raw data Logfile Save Logfiles The files for backup have to be selected from the File Name list Click Archive to move all selected files to the specified backup directory in the appropriate subfolders When files have the attribute read only a warning box appears before the files are deleted The Archive Files group box contains the following elements Archive path The Archive path contains the path where the files shall be stored Click the browse button to change th
173. e path File Name Lists all files saved by magellan filtered by the options list entered via the Filter button It consists of three columns e File Name The file names of the workspaces methods or sample ID lists saved by magellan e Date The date and time a file was saved last e Remarks The remarks entered when saving the file Archive Click Archive to move all files selected in the File Name list to button the backup directory cut and paste function Select All Click Select All to select all files displayed in the File Name button list Refresh Click the Refresh button to cancel the current Filter option button and to refresh the file list 192 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Filter This button is used to display only specific files or files that button contain a certain string in their file names Click the button Filter and the Apply Filter dialog box appears Enter the filter characters for the filter e A question mark can be applied as a wildcard for one single character e An asterisk can be applied as a wildcard for no or many characters 11 2 2 Automatic Archiving The automatic archiving function copies workspace method and sample files which are either automatically or manually saved by the user to a user defined directory The Automatic Archiving option is only available in the magellan Tracker
174. e the user the date the executed action and a comment are displayed A print preview of the workspace the method and the sample ID list of the current and all previous versions can be displayed clicking the appropriate buttons Additionally it is possible to save a previous version of the method under another name Audit Trail User Date Action Comment 1 Administrator Admin 18 10 2005 15 57 39 Created wsp Modified Administrator Admin 18 10 2005 16 29 24 Modified wsp Modified demo lt Print preview Workspace Method Cancel Help 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 103 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 4 1 Signature button Click this button to open the Signature dialog box where user date action and comment are displayed Signatures Adminl dministrator Review 18 10 2005 16 44 01 demo purposes Cancel Help This button is only available when the file has been signed using the Attach Signature wizard See chapter 8 Attach Signature Wizard for further details Method password When entering a password for a method this method field will be password protected and cannot be modified until the correct password is entered See detailed description below Password Protection of Methods Protect Method with a Password Users who have the right to create and to edit methods can protect methods by assigning them a password Per
175. e type dialog box contains the following elements Settings Sample IDs per Enter the number of sample IDs required per well a well option buttons maximum of three can be entered e One e Two e Three Printout option Define the layout for printing the sample ID list buttons e horiz Table e vert Table e Matrix 110 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Plate type option Four option buttons define the plate type to be selected buttons e Plate type from method Select a method to load the plate layout Click Load to browse for existing method files The Windows Open dialog box appears Select the desired file and click Open e Standard plate type Standard geometry plate types can be selected to define the plate format When activated a standard geometry plate type can be chosen from an associated drop down list e Plate type from pdf file A predefined pdf file or pdfx file for infinite series instruments can be used to define the plate format magellan offers a wide selection of predefined plate formats to choose from Plates that are not listed can be created using the Plate geometry editor option which is a software application accessible via magellan For more information refer to chapter 3 2 5 Plate Geometry Editor When activated a predefined pdf file can be chosen from an associated drop down list e Import from external S
176. e will be formed where the sum of the squared deviations of all base points is a minimum A minimum of 2 base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process In an evaluation with one experimental group the slope and ordinate intercept serve as the variables A and B in the transformations Furthermore the correlation coefficient r may also be implemented In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed Formula with coefficient values A slope and B intercept Average square deviation d Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r Mathematical Description Approximation function f x x gt R x A x B where A and B are determined by minimizing the error function err A B SG y i The solution is unique if x d rank n x I oe x Vt j 1 n which is true if see general condition 13 5 6 Non Linear Regression 2013 08 This approximation is designed especially for hyperbolical data Ideally the measured values for low concentrations are high and the measured values for high concentrations are low and the region of interest is in the high concentration range The parameter calculation supported by the linear regression x y is used for y A linear regression is carried out using the transformed data The result is expressed as the slope k and the intercept d From this result A 1 k and B d k
177. easurement Parameters In the Measurement Parameters window it is possible to set all required parameters for the measurement including measurement mode wavelengths read mode temperature etc depending on the type of instrument connected When connected to an Infinite instrument refer to the Instructions for Use for i control for further details on defining measurement parameters Note The available parameters to be defined depend on the instrument connected 52 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 2 1 Measurement Types Click Make your selection and the Measurement type dialog box appears Create Edit a Method Measurement type Ge Endpoint measurement 2 Kinetic measurement Multilabel measurement Measurement parameters Humber of plates DEFINE EVALUATION 006 Tecan The measurement type is to be selected from an option button list The Measurement type window contains the following elements depending on the instrument connected Measurement type e Select Endpoint measurement to perform a group box single measurement e Select Kinetic measurement to perform kinetic measurements per plate with a specified interval time e Select Well kinetic injector measurement to perform kinetic measurements per well with a specified interval time and injector control e Select Multilabel measurement to perform multilab
178. easurement window appears Note Using magellan Tracker or magellan Standard with User administration a default magellan Operator refer to chapters 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker and to chapter 11 5 3 Change User can edit only the required constants The constants without required flag set are displayed gray and cannot be edited A default magellan Administrator can edit also constants without required flag set For a default magellan Application Specialist it depends on the method he runs Using an unsigned method he is allowed to edit constant with and without required flag Using a signed method he can edit only the required constants Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard After these two optional pages the Start Measurement dialog box is displayed Start Measurement Measurement Measurement parameters Workspace O71 02005 0011 wes J Measurement mode Absorbance a Measurement wavelength 420 nm Method Method mith Modify layout Reference wavelength 620 nm 203 Read mode Normal Sample ID list Humber of kinetic cycles 2 Kinetic interval Minimal Instrument Unit OD Curent Beiun le Target 37 0 C Plate In Temp control Please note stant D 2004 Tecan It contains the following elements Measurement Workspace text field The default workspace filename as group box defined in Automated Data Handling is disp
179. eate a report Pick an item from the available data list and drag it into the selected data list Drop it at the position inside the report you want to have it Selected data Data Collection Measurement parameters i Matrix Layout Blank reduction Mean conc UA ml Cutoff results E Graph Graph Standard Curve Data Collection Cutoff definition Data Collection QC Validation criteria Remove all On the Header and Footer tabs define the layout of the header and the footer of the report see chapter 4 3 15 Data Handling Printed Report for further details Data Export In the control bar select Data export from the Data handling item In this example the layout and cutoff results should be stored as ASCII file Select Layout and Cutoff results from the Available data window click the arrow to insert them into the Selected data window The screen displays the following information Available data 4 fh Instrument data 4 Reduced data Difference data Difference data Mean Difference data Standard deviation Difference data Variation coefficient 2a Transformed data E Concentrations Cutoff results 2 Sample IDs G3 Method layout Well positions Strip method names Original Concentrations Layout Replicate Info Export to ASCII File f Selected data Layout Cutoff results Export to Excel i Note Exported data should always contain the Layout or Sample ID List
180. ecccseeccceeeeeceseseeseseneees 110 5 2 2 Import Edit a Sample ID LISt ccccecccsecccesececseeeseneeseneees 112 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID LISt ccccecccceccccsecccseeecceeeeseeesseeeseneees 117 5 2 4 Saving the Sample ID LISt cccccecccsecccseeeccseeecseseseeeseneees 126 Start Measurement Wizard c ccsccsecsesssecneeneseesenseneenenessanes 129 6 1 Taligele Uy es 6 9 eeeene se eeeen she een en ee ner see serine nee ieee ees Hoey teen ene tee ae eee 129 6 2 Obtain Raw Data icetcs cet cee screen cea weseceeetuna aii weceueeunnctiesnacsuudtercveaess 130 6 2 1 Obtain Raw Data with the Infinite Instrument 2 00 00 131 6 3 PU Strip L yo l souco 132 6 4 Use Predefined Method ccccccescsecesceeeeeeeeseeeeeeesensensenseneees 133 6 5 Start FAV OM UC gisisasensccnetcvatccccceadeicsiustesansseaucestsasusteeetnetauehewasanateweees 134 6 6 Start Measurement with a Predefined or Favorite Method 136 6 7 Measurement Status cccccsescssceeeseseneeeesenseesseneensenseeeeeasensesaees 141 Evaluate Results Wizard csccsscsscsscseenseneeneeneeneensensensenseneens 143 7 1 Introduction cccccccecnecneenecneeeeeeenseuseeeeeeneeneeuseeseeeaueueneseeeneeneeansenns 143 7 2 Select a File wvcsvccccsssasccticcdenntecactetshesncanenauciessvasewavenssuccdenntuceacawtieanes 143 7 2 1 File Selection Criteria icccccicssecsecensecossceancseumeansdosaceeserenezeens 144 7 3 The Workspace Overview Window cc
181. ecsseeecseeseaeeessneeseneeeeas 164 7 4 18 Context Sensitive Menu of a Well cccccccsseeenseeennenenes 164 7 5 Edit Method Tab ieiestccsicecasceatscrttctoustsvesevacunsans couerevedevanemseseisiaieacese 170 7 6 Saving the Evaluated ReESUuIts c cccsseessssescsseeceseseeneesennenes 171 Attach Signature Wizard sssisve cicessvecsserevacswonseccsaerteneecetssceteceescss 173 8 1 BAUR OCG ODN KA T a E E E 173 8 2 S00 a NG e E 173 Batch Processing sssennsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 175 9 1 NAO CII oii o g Mene E E 175 9 2 Microplate Requirements for Batch Processing 0000 175 9 3 Hardware COnnections cccccccceseeeeseceeeenseceneecnseeenseeeseseneseas 175 9 4 Working with Tecan Readers cc ccccssecssseseseeeseeeseeeseseneeeees 176 9 4 1 Software COMNCCHONS wcscscicserscvsceveccorscesencetnecertuciawesaceinas 176 9 4 2 Prepare for Batch Processing 12 c cccseeerseeereneeeeeeenaeees 176 9 4 3 Start Batch Processing cscccssecccseeccsneesssesessnsessnsessneees 178 9 4 4 Control Stacker MOVEMENIS c scccseecsseeceeeecseeesneesseees 178 9 5 Working with Infinite Series Readers ccccsssceeseeeseeeeeeneeeees 179 9 5 1 Connecting Infinite Series R AELS cccccccseeeseeeeneeees 179 9 5 2 Prepare for Batch Processing for IIRC Series AOQ0 CS iesvencecisvenxvaservesencerscnsadtonoeacnenieadinws 180 9 5 3 Start Batch Processing for IN
182. ect the input data to be processed down list Calculate Km and Decide whether to calculate Km and Vmax selecting the Vmax check box corresponding check box Calculation type The calculation type can be selected from group box e Hanes e Eadie Hofstee e Lineweaver Burk The calculation type can be selected as Hanes concentration versus concentration input data Eadie Hofstee input data concentration versus input data and Lineweaver Burk 1 input data versus 1 concentration The result data made available through this method includes Km and Vmax for Enzyme kinetic graph of each experimental group Unlike the results of the other kinetic calculations these results are displayed in the Graph Enzyme Kinetics dialog box 4 3 9 Kinetics Transformations Add New Kinetics 80 Transformations Select Add new kin transform from the control bar In the Kinetic transformations dialog box a transformation formula can be defined which is used for transforming kinetic inout data individually for every well In the Kinetic transformations dialog box further calculations can be performed on kinetic input data The window elements are similar to the Transformation input Refer to chapter 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation for further information Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 10 Concentrations Standard Curve Data Tab 2013 08
183. ected the Movements dialog box additionally contains a Stacker group Park position button The stacker moves the gripper into parking position Restack now button The stacker moves all plates from the output stack into the input stack Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 9 Batch Processing 9 5 Working with Infinite Series Readers 9 5 1 Connecting Infinite Series Readers If an Infinite series reader is selected in the Port Setup dialog box the following dialog box appears when OK is clicked Connect to Instrument Connect to Instrument Hame Type Infinite 200 READER Additional connect to Instrument Hame Connect Show simulated instruments Cancel In the Connect to Instrument dialog box select the instrument name In the Additionally connect to field select Connect if a Connect stacker is connected for batch processing Click OK to confirm selections Simulated Instrument To simulate the use of a Connect with an Infinite Series reader select the Show simulated instruments check box and then select the instrument under Connect to Connect to Instrument Connect to Instrument Hame Type Infinite 00 Reader Infinite 500 Reader Additional connect to Alias Simulation Simulation Fort AMASIM GULSIM Instrument Name Connects imulator Show simulated instruments F200_ PMT NORMAL F
184. ecting this option it will be opened and a new workbook will be created the requested data is inserted into the first worksheet Insert into worksheet at cell option button and cell coordinates text field Transferred data will be placed into the cell indicated default is cell A1 of an open active Excel worksheet If Excel is not open when selecting this option it will be opened and a new workbook will be created the requested data is inserted into the first worksheet Append to current worksheet option button This option will simply append the data to the current worksheet If Excel is not open when selecting this option it will be opened and a new workbook will be created the requested data is inserted into the first worksheet Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 201 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 3 3 Plate View Settings In the Plate View tab the look of the plate view can be customized The colors can be changed for the different regions by selecting the desired color from a drop down list The selection mode for marking wells can also be defined here The font size can be adjusted as well Options Paths Copy Plate View Miscellaneous rs a Background i Light shadow Plate bottom nd Dark shadow Plate surface ut Selection mode C union intersect The Plate View tab contains the following elements k Font height medium a Background The b
185. eduction software for analyzing data generated from microplate tests using Tecan measuring devices magellan is available in two versions e magellan Tracker and e magellan Standard magellan Standard software is intended for endpoint kinetic and multilabel assays in pharmaceutical biotechnological and life science industry for research use for food analysis and veterinary applications magellan Tracker offers all functionality to become compliant with the FDA Regulation 21 CFR part 11 and with the European In vitro diagnostic directive 98 79 EC Note It is important to note that the proper installation of the instrument and the magellan software alone will not ensure compliance with laws and requirements Corresponding policies concerning processes and standard operating procedures including validation and quality control must also be established When using magellan Tracker the user administration system must be customized by a designated administrator who is responsible for the setup of user accounts and for the assignment of user rights Note Training dates their duration and frequency are available at your customer support Address and telephone number can be found in these Instructions for Use and in the web http www tecan com customersupport Three default levels of user rights can be selected Administrator Application Specialist and Operator The Administrator must always be trained by Tecan or a Tec
186. eeceeeseesseees 39 FUSS ACK a 183 PV OW e eneeceeecieaneees 174 FOUNC AQUMEND cccccseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeess 236 Run Stip CA VOU istdeccsnscaeceteadseecdeocseuebinddcweenes 129 S sample ID list WTO ING EOT EEE T TT 110 117 Sample ID iSt cccccccceessessseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 129 Sample ID List Settings eceeeeeeeeeeeees 110 Sample Bee ee eee 163 Saving the Evaluated Results c00 171 Saving the Method ccccccceeeseeessseeeeeeees 103 Saving the Sample ID List eeeeeeeeees 126 Shorteuts LIST sanecccincassessinnanscceutagsessieteneadewteestunneds 31 IGN a Fil A E 173 SIQMALUNG E T E E T 173 POROV A a ene te nee nt eae 174 FN ste Se E AT E E E eects 174 Simulated INStrUMENL ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 0 0 lt 1 eene nee ee eee 77 SMTP SCrvel ccccccccccessseceeecseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 215 Software istalatlON sinia 18 REMOVA cose rE AE RAE 22 Special Characters cccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 Spectra Data Reduction ccccceeee 69 232 Spectra Dialog ecisssus eer ene eee ee ee eee ee 169 spectrum of a scan measureme nt 5 169 SQP ALQUMEMNL cccccccceseseecceeseeecseneeeseeaeess 237 sgnt argumenl seacicuniidneriniitnnen aunan 237 Index Standard Curve ccccceceecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeenes 81 159 Standard Curve Analysis Type s 0008 246 Standard Curve Graph cccccc
187. eeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaeeees 237 medianPlate ccccccccccssseeceeeseeeeseeeeeseeeees 237 Menus of the Evaluate Results Tab 147 Method Export cccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 Method Layout c ccccccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees 163 Method Notes cccccssecceceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 min argument eeccecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeens 238 MID MAX siarane nin 79 minAvg argument eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 238 Miscellaneous ICON ccccceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeaeees 191 TIONS E T A EE E E E 198 Miscellaneous of Evaluate Results Tab 163 Miscellaneous Tab ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 Movements plate carrier filter slide oo ccceececeeeeceeeeeeeees 41 Multilabel Graph cccccceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeees 166 Multilabel Measurement ccccceeeeeeeeeees 54 Multiplate Methods cccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeaeees 105 N New Identifier ccccccccssscecseseeseeeeeseeeeesaaees 63 Number Format ccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 102 O Obtain Raw Data cceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 130 OSS Le EE EA N AE EA a stenee 78 Operation Qualification OQ 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeees 19 IPETO serna EEA 14 Optimize Z Position cccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 or logical ExPreSSION ccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Organize Favorites cccccccssssseeeeeseeeeeeeees 134 P EI eE E A AS
188. eeeneesaesenaees 254 13 5 14 Weighting for Four Five Parameter Fit Marquardt Polynomial FUE ciassameesanenvieaatepteonateniriessadypumesiegweusMaapneneitane 255 13 6 Calculation of Dilution SerieS cccccsseesseseeeseseeseeeenseseeneees 256 13 6 1 Detection of Dilution SOVIOS ccccccccccccseseeeseeseeeesansesanes 256 13 6 2 Curve Parameter Calculation ccccccccseecccseeecseeseseeesenes 256 13 6 3 Calculation Of IC VAalU S cccccccccsccccseeceseeeesesessneeesssessnes 256 14 Application Example sicccsicsciccseswcestetenceatveesrssdenwesdsecastossvcesiestiens 257 14 1 BCE OCCU sses a 257 14 2 Step by Step Example Quantitative ELISA cccseeeeeeee 257 14 2 1 Test Kit D SCIIDTION cccccseccseecseeceeecnseceesneeesnesensenneees 257 14 2 2 Create a Method ccccccsscccnsscnuccsesenseeccusessuscneesanssanees 259 14 2 3 Run the Method xs hiacannataaaasassacenstap ean mnessieknneianenneenicdanan recs 273 14 2 4 Evaluate the R SUIt cccccccscccseccseeceeecnseceeenseeceeeeeeeeneees 274 14 2 5 Summary of Definition of Quantitative ELISA in magellan 0 ccccseccccceeeeeeeeceeesneeeees 276 15 Glossary Of Terms cccessseeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeenseeenseseeseseeneesenseneenees 277 NAEK aoine E 283 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 11 TECAN 1 Introduction 1 Introduction 1 1 Area of Application magellan is a universal reader control and data r
189. eeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 161 Standard ElOMENts ccccecssececeseeeeeeeeteneees 30 Start FAVOLItC esrin nderin Ein 129 Start Favorites cccocniaccnodacendseindecteiniaeecientabacteass 134 Start Measurement 129 136 Starting magellan ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 32 stddev argument ccccceseeeeeeecseeeeeeeeenaeees 238 D e E 132 Sum argument ssoennnsnoannnnesennnnennrnnnnnsennenenne 238 System Audit Trail ccccseeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeees 226 System Recovery cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 20 T Taa M ea N 183 Temperature Control 29 41 138 154 TeSt Mall arregi enna 215 Transformation Add new transformation ccccsccecsseeeeseeeeeeeens 73 Rename Transformation ccccsscecseeseeeeeseeees 73 Transformed Datar cccccccccsseeceseeceseeseneeeeeeeens 73 Transformed Data ccccsececeeeeeceeeeereneeeeees 156 U Unsuccessful IOGINS ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 213 Use Predefined Method 00 129 133 User Administration cccccesceesseeeceeeeerenees 205 DO INS aes tetas ce naiveeseind oc EE 213 User Administration magellan Standard 217 User Administration magellan Tracker 205 Chanae U oi e ne eee eee aerate 219 Es ag E sees A E E errr eter ee a ecm 219 User Administration Audit Trail 008 209 User Administration Summary cece 216 User LEI ACS niorir aa 23 U
190. efined Method Show Files from this instrument wt Start Favorite gt mth Remarks Status Help MAKE YOUR SELECTION z007 Tecan The Show drop down list is a filter All files Files from this instrument My files Signed files or Last selected methods can be selected Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 133 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 5 Start Favorite In the Select a file dialog box click Start Favorites Select one of the most frequently used methods from the list of numbered icons Select a File Obtain Raw Data Run Strip Layout Use Predefined Method Start Favorite a 2 4 5 el lt Empty gt lt Empty gt 9 lto aa ka faa lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt lt Empty gt MAKE YOUR SELECTION 2007 Tecan Click Organize favorites to add to or remove methods from the favorites list Organize Favorites Method files can be dragged from the Method list onto one of the 15 icons in the Favorite list to save it as a favorite Organize Favorites Methods Filename wH Qualitative Eliza mth P Quantitative Eliza mth Wi StartF avorite nth PN T est mth Remarks Set Remove Favorite methods lt Empty gt lt E mpty gt lt Empty lt Empty lt Emptye lt Empty lt Empty 9 ko faa ka a3 15 lt Empty gt lt Empty lt Empty Emptye lt Empty gt Empt
191. efore at startup the Login dialog was not displayed In order to activate the password protected user administration click the Login button The Login dialog box see chapter 2 4 2 Starting Tracker Version Login will be displayed 11 5 3 Change User To change the active user click the Change user icon ty in the wizard window The Login dialog box is displayed see chapter 2 4 Starting magellan Login 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard magellan magellan Application magellan Administrator Specialist Operator Sample ID List Create sample ID lists Create a new sample ID list or save an existing one with a new name Yes Yes Yes Edit sample ID lists Edit an existing sample ID list and save it with the same name Yes Yes No Method Create methods Create a new method or save an existing one with a new name Edit methods Edit an existing method and save it with the same name Setup favorites Add Remove methods from the favorite list Define multilabel measurement Define methods using multilabel measurements Yes Yes No Define kinetic transformations Define methods using kinetic transformations Yes Yes No Define concentration transformations Define methods using concentration transformations Yes Yes No Define alias Define methods using aliases for identifiers Yes Yes No 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 219 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon magellan magell
192. el and one with polarizers in perpendicular position The G factor compensates for differences in optical components between parallel and perpendicular measurement A valid calibration of the instrument resulting in a G factor is an important requirement for each fluorescence polarization measurement 13 2 2 Determination of the G Factor 230 First the reader specific G factor is determined This occurs by fluorescence intensity measurements of the reference and the reference blank solution with polarizers in parallel and in perpendicular position The polarization Per P for the reference values is known gy Ct Pre RFU ret RFU m 1 P RFU rep RFU m P oe rf reference polarization value RFU re average of the relative reference fluorescence value RFU mi average of the relative reference blank fluorescence value Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 2 3 Blank Correction If the method contains sample blanks a blank reduction process is run whereby the average of the respective sample blank is deducted from each sample value RFU 2 RFU m RFU RFU mi ARFU par Jor each well RFU 7 RFU sii RFU RFU wi RFU RFU m per per ARFU a a H for each well RFU ip RFU so RFU RFU wi RFU P relative sample fluorescence value RFU relative sample blank fluorescence value 13 2 4
193. el measurements with different measurement parameters Plates group box e Select a number of plates in the edit box for Multiplate measurements only available with Safire Il instrument Click Measurement parameters to open the Measurement Parameter dialog box 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 53 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 2 2 Measurement Parameters Select the required Measurement type and click Measurement parameters to open the Measurement Parameter dialog box for adjustment of e General measurement parameters e Plate format e Stacker e Wavelength e Measurement parameters gain integration time number of reads Z position e Temperature and e Shaking Click the OK button to save the changes and the Cancel button to reject them Depending on the instrument connected and on the measurement type selected the Measurement Parameters dialog box and the respective tabs available vary When connected to an Infinite instrument refer to the Instructions for Use for i control Multilabel Measurement If the measurement type multilabel measurement was selected the Multilabel Measurement dialog box is displayed To create a list of parameter windows the New button must be clicked The Measurement Parameters dialog box will appear where a new set of measurement parameters can be defined At least two sets of measurement parameters must be created in the mult
194. elength peak 7 4 9 Control Bar Transformed Data The user can select the required transformation to display the calculated results e Transformation n results e Transformation n statistics mean standard deviation variation coefficient e Transformation n as colors e Transformation n kinetic graph for kinetic measurements and transformations with kinetic results 156 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 10 Control Bar Kinetic Parameters 2013 08 The user can select the kinetic evaluation as defined e Mean slope OD RFU RLU mP sec e Mean slope OD RFU RLU mP min e Mean slope OD RFU RLU mP7 hr e Goodness of fit Mean slope e Correlation coeff e Max slope OD RFU RLU mP sec e Max slope OD RFU RLU mP min e Max slope OD RFU RLU mP hr e Time max slope sec e Time Onset OD RFU RLU mP Basis OD RFU RLU mP Time Basis OD RFU RLU mP Time Basis to Onset OD RFU RLU mP and the same for percentage calculation Minimum OD RFU RLU mP Time minimum OD RFU RLU mP Maximum OD RFU RLU mP Time maximum OD RFU RLU mP e Area OD RFU RLU mP sec e Graph Enzyme Kinetics Click this option to open the Graph Enzyme Kinetics dialog box If kinetic transformations have been defined the results of the kinetic transformations can be selected Note Unusable data e g overflow values are ignored for kinetic data calculation Inst
195. ellaneous list The instrument control window is displayed showing two group boxes Instrument and Setup amp Service Select Change instrument from Setup amp Service to connect an instrument or to change the currently connected instrument 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 39 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 5 2 Demo Mode lf no instrument is connected select the instrument to be simulated from the drop down list in the Instrument group box and select Demo mode in the Port group box and Click OK magellan is now in demo mode Demo mode allowed in the Options dialog is selected by default see chapter 11 3 4 Miscellaneous to change this default setting In demo mode it is possible to perform all functions except running actual measurements 2 5 3 Connecting an Instrument of the Infinite Series Select Infinite Series in the Instrument group box in the Setup Port dialog box Click OK to display the Connect to Instrument dialog box select the instrument and click OK For demo mode select the Show simulated instruments checkbox and the preferred instrument from the drop down list and click OK Connect to Instrument Connect to Instrument Name Type Alias Fort Infinite 200 Reader Simulation AMASIM Infinite 500 Reader Simulation GULSIM Additional connect to Instrument Warne Fort ConnectSimulator Connect Show simulated instruments GFS500 PMT NORMAL 384 GFSOO PFMT NOR
196. ements Input data drop down Select the relevant data to which the validation must list apply For example Raw data Mean concentration and so on Exp group selection If the plate contains more than one test the relevant field experimental group to which the validation should apply must be selected If the plate contains only one test then only one group will be available Validation group Use Validation groups to define validation criteria for selection field the same experimental group with different input data Validation This one dimensional list will be filled with the formulas Conditions list field and logical equations which define the Validation Conditions These logical equations will generate a logical result The program will examine the input data using this equation and if the validation criteria are met will return a result of TRUE If the criteria did not meet a result of FALSE and an error message will be displayed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 87 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Formula input Parts of the formulas to be entered into the Validation group box Conditions field can be selected from the following drop down lists e Variables drop down list All available variables displayed e button Click this button to open the Define constants dialog box e Operators drop down list All available operators are displayed e Functions drop down list Using the
197. eneseneenesnesenseenesenssenseneeeneeees 223 ae ie AUE T 6c eee eee ene ee eae ee eee eee ere 223 12 2 Fie Handing sercar manana inate 224 a Va UO aa E A 224 12 2 2 Changing a Method or Workspace Fil cccccseecneenees 224 1223 Openinga FIC cccccsccccsecccsecccsesccseeeccsnsesseeessauessaeesssnsessnes 224 12 2 4 Opening a File Created on Another PC Add HUIDs 225 12 3 System Audit Tia escicccsscesnsesecnsceusneussspetsreseussewsssnetniaeatanecsaenectiace 226 e e eo a S E EEEE 229 13 1 Evaluate Results Calculation Procedure csssseeseseeeees 229 1S Oe Meo fe 5c eee eee ee ene eee eee eee eee 230 13 2 Polarization Data REGUCTION cccceceeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 230 132 1 WAV OOUCHON sesers renr E 230 13 2 2 Determination of the G Factof cccccscccseeccseeecenseeeeseees 230 FOZ BAN COM CONOR ir AE aaa 231 13 24 IMensiy CAICUIANON secsi senne ss Enae h 231 13 2 5 Calculation of the Polarization Anisotropy ee EE nE E E AEE A 231 13 3 Spectra Data RCGUGCUOM wisssicccesicncsevscowiceciavcasennininvecercusnadewsiswadereus 232 13 3 1 Mathematical Description ccccccceccseesecneeeneeeneeeseneneeens 232 13 4 How to Write a Formula cccccsccsscescenscessenseesscnssessensenseeesonees 233 134 1 TP OOUCHON seser rE EEEE 233 134 2 ROMANIA Variables icra cess eee 233 13 4 3 Formula FUNCTIONS c cccccccsecsecceecseecnecsucsecseessessesseesseenes 235 13 4
198. ent The Comment text field is active supposed the Comment check box has been selected Adjustment option Select one of the following options buttons e Left e Centered e Right Row number list Row number is a numeric field where the row for each option can be adjusted Separators check The separators check boxes define where the bordering boxes lines shall appear These can be placed below above or both below and above the header e Above check box Separator line appears above the header e Below check box Separator line appears below the header Footer Tab In the Footer tab the content of the document footer is defined The Footer tab contains the same elements as the Header tab For a description of the footer tab refer to the header tab The footer tab will disappear if Print Footer is not selected in the Page setup tab 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 97 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 16 Data Handling Automated Data Handling In the control bar expand Data handling and select Automated data handling After a measurement some actions can be started automatically Select these actions and they are executed chronologically in the following order e Ifthe load sample ID list check box is selected when running the method a sample ID list is automatically loaded e If the save workspace check box is selected always selected in magellan Tracker after running the
199. ep ivf 20070521 O03 wep ivf 200 70521 O04 wep ivf 20070521 005 wep 240070521 006 wep tac tee Data Sheet Click View summary and the Data sheet window appears fe Plate to Plate OC Workspace Control DI 20070521 001 wsp BLI O lt 20070521 002 wsp DI 20070521 003 wsp DI 20070521 004 wsp D9 20070521 005 wsp 20070521 001 wsp 20070521 002 wsp 20070521 003 wsp 20070521 004 wsp 20070521 005 wsp DX 20070521 001 wsp D9 20070521 002 wsp 20070521 003 wsp DI 20070521 004 wsp D 20070521 005 wsp Comments rw D 2007 Tecan The Data sheet dialog box contains the following elements Workspace Contains a list of the evaluated workspace files On the left column hand side of the workspace name the result of the multirule Westgard evaluation is displayed see below A green checkmark indicates fulfillment a red cross indicates failure Control The different controls are listed column Value The mean value of each control is displayed column 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 151 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 152 Westgard rule The individual Westgard rules are evaluated with OK for a evaluation non violated control rule or x for a violated control rule columns according to the table below see Westgard rules below Comments Comments to the evaluation can be entered which will appear field on the printout Print Preview
200. er Control Instrument feature see the corresponding Instructions for Use of the instrument connected for more information 3 1 5 Injector Control This option is only applicable for instruments equipped with injectors See the respective Instructions for Use of the instrument for further details 3 1 6 Dispense Only This option is only applicable for instruments equipped with Injectors See the respective Instructions for Use of the instrument for further details Instrument features baud rate power down See the corresponding Instructions for Use of the instrument for further details 3 2 Setup amp Service Options 3 2 1 Change Instrument Note If you connect another instrument to your computer or if you modify the interface parameters you must always select this menu option The settings will be automatically used the next time the software is launched In the Setup amp Service box click Change instrument to open the Setup Port dialog box This option allows connecting magellan to an instrument See chapter 2 5 Connecting an Instrument for further details Click the Change instrument menu option and the currently connected instrument will be disconnected In the Setup Port dialog box the desired instrument and the communication port can be selected and thus be connected to magellan When connected to an Infinite instrument refer to the Instructions for Use for i control 3 2 2 Define F
201. erimental group can be used If the selected experimental group contains no standards it can be decided to calculate no concentrations for this experimental group is set per default in this case Click the Additional Concentrations button to open the Calculate Additional Concentration dialog box Select additional sets of input data which are to be used to calculate concentrations based on the current standard curve Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 81 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Analysis Type Tab TECAN The Calculate Additional Concentrations dialog box contains the following elements Input data drop down list Selected data list Add button Remove button Select the input data for calculation of additional concentrations The list contains the input data names for calculation of additional concentrations Click the Add button to add the currently selected input data in the Input data drop down list to the Selected data list Click the Remove button to remove the currently selected data from the Selected data list Use this tab to select the analysis type Please refer to chapter 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types for a detailed description of the analysis types Analysis type option buttons Data scaling drop down list select which interpolation algorithm is to be employed when calculating the standard curve All offered analysis types are listed and can be selecte
202. erimental group the analysis type parameters have a postfix of B for the second experimental group C for the third experimental group and so on Example The slope of a linear regression in experimental group 3 can be accessed as AC 13 5 3 Error Messages If any of the values in the calculated concentrations lie outside of the range stipulated by the standards the entry gt Max or lt Min will be displayed within the plate s wells respectively If the user would nevertheless like to incorporate these values into the calculation the Extrapolation option must be selected lf the curve is not strictly monotone an error message is generated If there are multiple solutions for a concentration calculation for a measured value the entry MultPt will be displayed within the plate s wells 13 5 4 Point to Point 246 Using this process the adjacent base points will be joined by means of a straight line A minimum of 2 base points is required for this calculation Extrapolation is not possible There are no parameters for use as variables in the transformations lf no concentration can be calculated the entry NoCalc will be displayed within the plate s wells Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations Mathematical Description Interpolation function f 1 x 7 R Yin Ji xe y xx if xe x x X i i 13 5 5 Linear Regression A straight lin
203. esesausessessaneess 23 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan 00 25 2 2 1 Method Mth cccccccccscccseeccseeccneecseeecaeesseessesessuessaeessuessaeesas 25 222 ample D LIST Smp erreiaren TE ri 26 22 3 WOrkspac WSD aecrroriscnen sn anges a aeudamadamaeasadans 26 2 2 4 Standard Curve StO ccccccsccccsecccseccccneeecsesesseeeessesessesessnes 26 2 2 5 File Types Used with Magellan cccccccscccseseceserseeeeneesaeees 26 2 3 User Interface Wizard List ccscccseseseeeseesseeseeeeseseneeeeeesenesens 27 2 3 1 Start Measurement Wizard cccccccccssecccseeccsesesseeessesesanes 27 2 3 2 Evaluate Results Wizard ccccsccsseccssenseeceecseesauesauessnesens 28 2 3 3 Attach Signature WIZAMC ccccccseccsseecseecceecseesssessuessaeeees 28 2 3 4 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard cccccsecceseeceeneeeenes 28 2 3 5 Create Edit a Method WIZAIrO ccccccccecccseecsteccseecseeeeeeees 28 DSO MOOV TS aac aerate aes E EE E E E E ER 28 237 SANndard EICMECOIS seresa ei 30 49 0 LACTICID BUON sprcsccussrcnsensocnvetidetaiid desvet idem EEEE 31 2 3 9 The Welcome Dialog BOX cccccscccsscssecceeecneeseeesseesnseseeaes 31 Za ona E ene meee as een ene Pence eae nee E eee eres 31 2 4 Starting magellan s nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 32 2 4 1 Starting Standard Version ccccccseeccsseccsneeccsesessneessaesessnes 32 2 4 2
204. ethod file These method files can be opened and modified The folder to save the method in must be selected and the desired file name needs to be entered Additionally some comments can be added in the Remarks text field Click the Save button to save the current measurement data into a method file Cancel will cancel the current operation The Save as dialog box is a standard Windows dialog box with file navigation elements a text field for entering a file name a drop down list for the selection of a file type tst Save and Cancel buttons An additional Remarks text field provides a possibility to add useful information or remarks to the method file Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Print Print Preview Printer Setup Printout Font Plate to Plate QC 2013 08 7 Evaluate Results Wizard In the File menu click Print or press SHIFT P to print the data as defined with the Printed Report setup from the method The standard Windows Print dialog box is opened where the printer page range and number of copies can be selected Note After the magellan 30 day demo license has expired printing will not be possible In the File menu click Print Preview to see exactly how a print out will appear without actually having to print the document The Print Preview window contains the following elements Print button Next Page button Prev Page button One
205. etics Dialog The Graph Kinetics dialog box displays the graphs of kinetic measurements of one or more selected wells The legend contains the calculated kinetic parameters Click on points to mask unmask them within the kinetic graph After a point is masked the line of the graph is automatically adjusted accordingly and the point is represented as a transparent symbol instead of a filled colored symbol Context Sensitive Menu of Kinetics Graph By right clicking on the graph a context sensitive menu is displayed Crosshair Cursor A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on particular points on the graph Copy to Clipboard Copies the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Save as bitmap Saves the graph as a bitmap Print Opens the Print dialog box from which the graph can be printed Printer Setup Opens the Printer Setup dialog box in which the printer settings can be defined Zoom to 100 Sets the graph display back to 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph Show Kinetic Calculated kinetic data slopes onsets minima Reduced Data maxima can be visualized in the graph of the kinetic Curve s Slopes are visualized as curves onsets minima and maxima as intercept points The display can be enabled disabled via the context menu item Show Kinetic Reduced Data in t
206. extbox is selected in the control bar this data is displayed in the text box 4 3 17 Miscellaneous User Prompts In the control bar expand Miscellaneous and select User prompts In every Prompt field of the list a Keyword can be entered This keyword will then be displayed before measuring Text can be entered for example lot number or the analyst s full name By selecting Req required a measurement can only be launched on receipt of an input a text information must be added in the Prompt answer field Prompts will also appear in the list of available data for printing 4 3 18 Miscellaneous Number Format In the control bar expand Miscellaneous and select Number format The Number format dialog box is used to set up the numeric format of the display of values Additionally the scientific number format for values out of range ca be selected The default setting is 5 significant digits Selecting User defined a number format of 1 10 integer places and 0 7 decimal places can be set If the user defined number format is selected the two numeric data fields have to be set Additionally the scientific with exponent or the non scientific description can be used An example of the format of current selection is displayed Click Set as default or Restore default accordingly to save the entered definition 102 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard
207. f a horizontal list order A1 A2 and so on Horizontal list alternating option button The order of the data is alternating for each row or column order A1 A2 A12 B12 B11 B1 Sorted list option button This option will sort the entries of all columns according to the entries of the first column The alphanumerical entries in the first column are split into two parts the first containing only letters the second numbers The entries are sorted first alphabetically Entries with the same name are then sorted numerically Example You can use this option with sample IDs or with the layout restricted to one experimental group A sorting of numerical values will work only if all entries are integer values Sample oriented list s button Allows the printout of individual lists per sample The separation for the single tables is done either by the sample IDs if available or by the identifier names on the plate layout Sample IDs are needed if the layout contains different experimental groups representing different parameters for the same samples It is possible to combine the list style Sample oriented list s with other parameters like Identifiers Exp Groups and Cutoff results List options Style Limitations Exarnple ees j Layout O Vettical list entitiers Raw data i Vertical list alternating D Blank reduction Horizontal list m E Cutet results T s Hep ne ae Horiz
208. f magellan this archive contains well data status e g overflow lamp low or calculation error s and can be easily sent to Expertline at tecan com for support request 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 197 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 3 Options Several selections and adjustments which are valid throughout the complete menus and wizards of magellan are defined in the Options dialog box If magellan user administration is activated several settings are user dependent The Options dialog box is divided into individual tabs e Paths tab e Copy tab e Plate View tab e Miscellaneous tab The requested options have to be entered in the corresponding tabs Click OK to save the changes and to close the dialog box User dependent options every user can modify the options for his convenience are e Default paths only in magellan Standard e Copy to clipboard and Excel options e Plate view e Skip welcome page e Start with wizard list or favorites page e Move plate in after startup The following user dependent options can not be set in the options dialog box e Selected Printer e Printout orientation e Printout paper size and source e Printout font and color e Default identifier types e Jumping direction for sample ID input e Import raw data settings e Default for Export options Export to ASCII file Export to Excel and Workspace Name e Use stacker e Graph dialog box size The followi
209. f the selected experimental group e Hide curve check box If selected the curve is not displayed e Line Width spin control Select the line width for the selected experimental group Font group box Select Small Medium or Large font size Display group Following elements can be selected to be viewed box Legend The curve color base point style and label are viewed together with additional information analysis type parameters correlation coefficient and so on Base points Intercepts If intercepts are specified the intercepts can be displayed and labeled in the graph Error bars If standards are defined as replicates a bar showing the range plus minus standard deviation is displayed for each base point 4 3 11 Concentrations Transformations Add New Concentration Transformations Select Add new conc transform from the control bar In the Concentration transformations dialog box a concentration formula can be defined which is used for transforming concentration input data individually for every well In the Concentration transformations dialog box further calculations can be performed on concentration input data The window elements are similar to the Transformation input Refer to chapter 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation for further information 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 85 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 12 Evaluate Data Cutoff De
210. finition 86 In the control bar expand Evaluate data and select Cutoff definition Use this option to categorize either raw data or calculated data on threshold limits Threshold limits can be defined as fixed numeric values or formulas Use the Cutoff Definition window to define the cutoff ranges and to assign colors and names to cutoff results The results will be generated on the basis of these settings and displayed in the corresponding color The Cutoff Definition window contains the following elements Input data Select the input data which is to be used in the evaluation drop down list Exp group In case the plate contains more than one test the relevant selection list experimental group to which the cutoff should apply must be selected If the plate contains only one test then only one group will be available and the field is not visible In the Cutoff list up to ten cutoff ranges can be defined The limits for each range can be entered The highest limit value must be entered on top of the list The next lower will be placed beyond and so on A displayed Low High arrow shows the level The limit values itself belong to the upper ranges greater and equal condition Colors buttons A color can be allocated to the individual result levels When displaying the results these colors will be incorporated representing the qualitative results Labels text fields The result indicators for every value range must be named for e
211. g This option is disabled if Automatic Recalculation is set e f Automatic Recalculation is set the statistic data is calculated after every mask unmask action The View menu contains the following commands e Values can be selected to display the reads as values e Use this option to view multiple reads per well coarsely and quickly Graphic can be selected to display the read values as colors Brightness uses one color with different brightness to display the values Pseudo Colors uses different colors to display the values A color bar with a slide control is displayed to change the intensity Click Help to open the magellan help dialog box Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 165 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Click on points Edit Dialog TECAN Clicking reads will mask unmask them After a read is masked the value is put in brackets If the color display is enabled the read is displayed in white with a black circular border Use this command to edit the measured raw data of a selected well Edit raw data text field Reset button Mask check box Left right up and down buttons OK Graph Multilabel Dialog A new value for the selected well can be entered Data is then shown with the symbol refer to chapter 7 4 6 Special Characters For polarization measurements only the RFU values can be edited Resets the well to its original value Excludes the value of the well fro
212. g page gt Options gt Miscellaneous tab Click the Add HUID button and the dialog box with the other PCs HUID numbers is displayed Invalid HUID This file was created on another computer HUID WO WCAS 40268432 C Documents and Settings V4ll User Documents Tecan agellan mth Method_ 200 win mth Press Accept HUID to add the given HUID to the list of available HUID s Files from computers in this list can be apend without getting any warning message 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 225 TECAN 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker 12 3 System Audit Trail The system audit trail is only available in the magellan Tracker version The system audit trail function writes several magellan events into a log file see table below A new log file is created once per week and is stored under Windows XP C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan LogFiles SystemAuditT rail Windows Vista and Windows 7 C Users Public Documents Tecan LogFiles SystemAuditT rail A checksum computed over the entire log file is used to guarantee log file consistency and to protect the files against intentional and accidental changes Log file consistency is always checked at start up Invalid files will be immediately closed marked as invalid by appending invalid to the log file s name and a new one will be created in its place Magellan Events to be Tracked Magellan Start
213. gly more accurate approximation of the result throughout the interval The five parameter method requires considerably more time to be processed As with LogitLog an S shaped curve is produced A minimum of five base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process The parameters A B C D and E can be employed as parameters in the transformations The approximation is always applied to the unscaled base point values In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed e Coefficient values A B C D and E e Average square deviation d e Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r correlation of data and fit Restrictions for the Process Application Refer to chapter 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types LogitLog for further information Mathematical Description Approximation function f x x gt R A D xh D 1 C Method The parameters A B C D E are optimized by the Levenberg Marquardt algorithm an iterative technique that finds a local minimum of a function that is expressed as the sum of squares of nonlinear functions The algorithm stops if an accuracy of 1E 7 FLT_EPSILON is reached success or the maximum number of 30000 iterations is exceeded failure before the given accuracy Is reached Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 5 14
214. he changes of the current well The Arrow keys can also be used for this kind of navigation On clicking Enter or Tab the entry field is moved to the next well Use the check box to specify the direction of movement vertically or horizontally across the plate In each well up to 3 sample IDs can be entered Therefore the list contains three Sample ID text fields and an Autoincrement check box associated to each of them A sample ID for the marked well can be entered in the text fields The sample ID can contain letters numbers or a combination of both For example Smp 1 Up to 100 alphanumeric characters can be entered The entire plate can be filled with sample IDs The Autoincrement check box can be selected if the wells for the sample IDs are to be automatically numbered For example if the starter value is Smp1 then the next well is automatically named Smp2 using the Enter Tab key or the arrow buttons Using Autoincrement the sample IDs can be allocated to the wells in a numerically consecutive manner Simply enter the initial value into the first well The entered ID may also be alphanumeric although it must end in a number to enable for the consecutive numbering of further wells for example If John1 is entered into the first well John2 will automatically be displayed when moving to the second well Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 115 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard
215. he kinetic graph dialog The current display state is stored and will be reused for further displays 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 167 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard W Graph Kinetics Raw data 2 Mean slope 0 011608 Correlation coeff 0 94327 Max slope 0 02503 Time max slope 100 Time Onset 102 81 Minimurm 0 074493 Maximum 1 2912 Area 71 197 Mean slope H2 Max slope H2 Temperature curve This option shows hides a curve visualizing the temperature progression during kinetic measurements if available Kinetic Opens the Kinetic parameters dialog box and offers parameters the ability to modify the kinetic settings for the selected well s Kinetic Data Select this menu item to show a table of all calculated kinetic data of the selected well s Y Axis scaling A range for the Y axis can be selected Properties Select this button to change the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized Help Opens the magellan help dialog box pen y EXPERT S KNOW HOW Setting different kinetic parameters for different wells is possible either by using the context sensitive menu for a well in the plate layout window or by using the context sensitive menu in the kinetic graph dialog Editing the kinetic parameters in the Edit method tab the kinetic parameters are set identical for all wells
216. he method file and clicking the Open button After selecting the method the Calculating dialog box is displayed This dialog box is for display only and contains no elements for editing It closes after the calculation is finished 7 4 4 Toolbar Menu Instrument Movements For detailed information see 3 1 1 Movements Temperature Control For detailed information see 3 1 2 Temperature Control Optimize Z Position For detailed information see 3 2 4 Optimize Z Position Injector Control For detailed information see 3 1 5 Injector Control Start Measurement Using this option the measurement run can be started again with the currently loaded method and current data will be overwritten if YES is selected in the magellan dialog box In case of an incomplete kinetic run cycles can be added not available for Infinite Series instruments For detailed information see 6 6 Start Measurement with a Predefined or Favorite Method 7 4 5 Plate Layout Window The data which is to be displayed within a well when opening a workspace file can be set when defining the method Automated data handling gt view results after measurement gt More In each single well three lines are visible the following data is displayed as default 1 line layout 2 line replicate info 3 line in the third line according to the data selected the conventions described in the following chapter are used cf 7 4 6 Special Char
217. he selected data has to be copied and is transferred to the clipboard The rows have to be separated by linefeed the columns by tab stops This is automatically done in Excel when selecting multiple cells The Paste function pastes the copied data in ASCII format from the clipboard into the wells Data is always inserted starting at position A1 If the data is non numerical the value is set to 0 In case of an unfinished kinetic with defined interval a question is displayed asking whether the currently selected data should overwrite the original data or append the data The time interval is taken from the measurement parameters For polarization measurement the parallel and perpendicular RFU values can be changed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 153 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Insert Sample ID list For detailed information see 6 6 Start Measurement Insert Sample ID List Recalculate with another Method In the Method menu click Recalculate with another Method A recalculation based on the settings of a newly selected method will be performed If an error occurs during recalculation the procedure will be stopped Click this option to open the File Open dialog box In an additional Remarks field a text description of the file if entered will be displayed available only in magellan Tracker The method must be selected by either double clicking the method file or by selecting t
218. he separator will be any character entered in the Other text field Orientation The Orientation option button allows a definition of the option button data in either horizontal or vertical direction 194 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Measurement Parameters Info Measurement Parameters button 11 2 4 Convert To 2013 08 The box shows the following parameters e Plate format e Data unit e Number of measurements e Measurement interval Select the measurement type the plate type kinetic cycle number and interval Note This option is available only when the current user has local administrator rights for the Windows system In the File handling dialog box click Convert To to open the Convert Documents dialog box The Convert Documents Convert to dialog box enables the user to convert magellan files from the current magellan version to files for previous magellan versions Important After conversion methods must be validated because the content of the converted files may differ slightly from the original file e g contents of printed report etc The Convert Documents dialog box contains the following elements Document type group box Select all button Filename list Source path edit field Destination path edit field Convert document s button Version drop down menu Progress bar Instructions
219. he user can decide to change the Analysis Type settings After changes the evaluation procedure will be started from beginning In case the validation failed depending on the user right an error message box is displayed or a question message box is displayed where the user can decide to continue the calculation anyway If the calculation is aborted cutoff results cannot be accessed However on a printout a validation failed message will be included 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 229 13 Calculations TECAN In case values or settings have been changed a message box will appear Message The instrument values have been changed Do you want to re start the result calculation Yes button Click the Yes button to re calculate the evaluation values No button Click the No button to close the message No re calculation will be performed 13 1 1 Statistics lf a statistical value is calculated over e g the n replicates with values x x ofa sample following formulas are used Name Formula mean value average ju value x xX n standard deviation r 5 x x and s 0 for n 1 i variation coefficient 5 in percent v 100 x For more information refer to chapter 13 4 5 Statistical Functions 13 2 Polarization Data Reduction 13 2 1 Introduction Fluorescence polarization measurements consist of two fluorescence intensity measurements one with polarizers in parall
220. hesis surround values that have been masked 2013 08 TECAN 15 Glossary of Terms Term Definition An asterisk marks values that have been measured using the Use gain regulation option which corrects lowers the gain 222 Mean Calculated averages for example Raw data Mean Standard deviation s Variation coefficient v 2 lt Min gt Max lt Blank gt lt Page break gt lt Separator gt X concX dilX 2227 2013 08 Calculated standard deviations for example Raw data Standard deviation or s Raw data Calculated variation coefficients for example Raw data Variation coefficient or v Raw data Added to values that have been edited or simulated Calculated concentration is lower than minimum Calculated concentration exceeds maximum Printed report Insert empty matrix or table printout Printed report Print next item on the next page Printed report Print line between two items Symbol x refers to the current value within a well Symbol concX refers to the concentration of the standard in the current well Symbol dilX refers to the dilution of the sample or control in the current well Available data set if more than one set of input data shall be used for calculations Indices access the different cycles of a kinetic measurement whereas 0 indicates the first cycle The asterisk marks identifiers that have been set as aliases I
221. ick OK to save the settings Select the workspace file to be evaluated from the Filename list and click Make your selection Note If the proper instrument for the selected file is not connected the Instrument Mismatch dialog box appears The dialog offers two options e Connect to the proper instrument e Convert the measurement parameters to the connected instrument This option is not available if the measurement mode is not supported by the connected instrument for example a Sunrise does not support fluorescence measurements 144 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 3 2013 08 7 Evaluate Results Wizard The Workspace Overview Window Control Bar Click the Next button and the Workspace Overview window of the Evaluate Results wizard appears It displays all available data of the currently selected workspace and helps to easily locate and view instrument data calculated data cutoff results measurement parameters etc lf the currently working user has the appropriate rights refer to chapter 10 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker and chapter 10 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard it is also possible to make some changes in the method by clicking on the Edit Method tab and perform a recalculation of the measured data For more detailed information on the calculation procedure and sequence of calculations refer to chapter 12 Calculations Evaluate results mgr 200511
222. ight be missing unplugged or broken Possible values for this entry are Normal or Alarm Normal indicates that the target concentration is normal or the selected mode does not require a target concentration e g mode Manual Alarm indicates that the target concentration has not been reached within 20 minutes or deviates for more than 10 minutes during operation 2012 01 01 12 34 56 TECAN GCM enh V1 01 MANUAL A 20 5 0 1 15 0 5 400 ValidData ValidData Normal Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 187 TECAN 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Support 10 4 1 Importing Logged Data Into Microsoft Excel The content of the GCM Enhanced log file can be imported into Microsoft Excel for further evaluation In order to make sure that the numeric data imported into Microsoft Excel maintains the correct number format it may be necessary to define the following in Microsoft Excel Custom System Separators e Define period as the Decimal separator e Define any other character which is not required as separator e g comma as the Thousands separator Delimiters Import the log file txt file to Excel as a Delimited file type Select semicolon as the Delimiter The delimiter is the character used to separate fields Data Format Select General as the Column data format General converts numeric values to numbers date values to dates and all remaining values to text 10 5 GCM E
223. ilabel dialog box Note If Move plate out after measurement is selected when running the method magellan displays a message box where liquids in the plate can be modified and the measurement continued Otherwise the measurement is performed without a break The measurement parameter Comments can be used to label the set of measurement parameters in the list 54 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard The Multilabel dialog box contains the following elements Kultilabel Measurement No Label Measurement parameters HJ 1 DEF 1 Measurement mode Absorbance Me HJ 2 DEF Measurement mode Absorbance Me H ee DEF 3 Measurement mode 4Absorbance Me lt Kinetic Number of cycles Interval Use minimum interval Label list In the Multilabel list the existing measurement parameter definitions are listed line by line In the No column a guide number counts up the existing measurement parameter definitions and a small icon is presented The Label column displays a customizable name in Measurement Parameters General Tab Comment to this measurement The Measurement parameters column lists a summary of the selected measurement parameters New button Click the New button and the measurement parameters of each new measurement can be defined The Measurement Parameters dialog box will appear Define names for each label In the Measurement Parameters dia
224. ile directory refer to chapter 3 3 Log Files 142 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 1 Introduction The Evaluate Results wizard is designed to help the user analyze measurement results Raw data evaluation data and evaluation parameters can be viewed and data can be re evaluated Workflow Summary Start the Evaluate Results wizard After a welcome dialog box the Select a File dialog box appears Select an existing workspace file containing the measurement data to be evaluated Click Make your selection and the Results dialog box appears in which the results can be viewed or printed Evaluate Results tab If necessary the used method can also be modified Edit Method tab Click Finish and the Save dialog box appears in which a file name and remarks about the measurement can be entered and saved as a workspace file which contains method definitions instrument data and sample ID list if configured Evaluated data are not stored in the workspace but recalculated every time the workspace is opened 7 2 Select a File On the Wizard List page click Evaluate Results Click Next on the welcome page of the Evaluate Results wizard and the Select a file dialog box appears The Select a File dialog box contains the following elements Filename list The Filename list contains the names of all files within the standard workspace d
225. ilter Slides Standard and custom filter slides can be defined 3 2 3 Insert Transport Lock Instrument feature see the corresponding Instructions for Use for more information 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 43 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings 3 2 4 Optimize Z Position Only applicable for instruments with z positioning option In the Instrument Control dialog box click Optimize Z Position This option can be used to find the optimum Z position of the plate transport in relation to the measuring head for specific instruments Therefore the Optimize Z Position dialog box is displayed 3 2 5 Plate Geometry Editor Click the Miscellaneous icon from the wizard list Select Instrument Control and connect to an instrument button Change instrument Then click the button Plate geometry editor in the Instrument Control dialog box and Continue green arrow on the wizard welcome page Instrument Control Instrument Setup amp Serice Movernerts Change instrument Temperature control Define filter slides Injector control T i Plate geometry editor Dispense only Buildin Test Connect Movements magellan offers a wide selection of predefined plate geometry files for standard plate formats to choose from Use the Plate geometry editor to create plate geometry files for not listed plates in order to use them with magellan or to validat
226. in the header of the ASTM file e g magellan V6 55 e Append app version If selected the magellan version number is exported in the header of the ASTM file e g Standard or Tracker 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 99 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard LIS assay name group box Encoding group box Path group box Set as default button Restore default button Y EXPERT S KNOW HOW ASTM EXPORT EXAMPLE FILE TECAN Select the LIS assay name to be displayed in the test order record and result record of the ASTM file e Use method name name of the method used for the measurement e Use name text field define anew name to be displayed Example ELISA Test order record O 1 Sample ID 4 ELISA Date and time of measurement Result record R 1 ELISA results Select the export code e ANSI For ANSI compatible characters e Unicode For characters that cannot be exported with ANSI code e g Chinese Cyrillic Define the path for the ASTM export e Export default path the export is performed to the folder defined in Miscellaneous e Use path text field define a new export path e Using this option the settings can be logged as a default for future use e Using this option the settings can be reset to the previously defined default Each ASTM export file txt consists out of the following components e Message Header Record amp Infin
227. inished a workspace file is created wsp refer to chapter 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan Evaluate Results Wizard For a detailed description refer to chapter 7 Evaluate Results Wizard The Evaluate Results wizard is used to view the raw data and to evaluate the results The evaluation parameters can be viewed and data can be re evaluated All this information is stored in workspace file wsp refer to chapter 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan Attach Signature Wizard For a detailed description refer to chapter 8 Attach Signature Wizard The Attach Signature wizard is used to sign method and workspace files This feature is only available with magellan Tracker Signatures are always included in the printed report Signed records can only be modified by users with the appropriate rights It is possible to fully control the use of methods by allowing users to run only signed methods The Attach signature wizard is only available with magellan Tracker Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard For a detailed description refer to chapter 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard The Create Edit a Sample ID list wizard is used to create new and to edit existing sample ID lists Up to three sample IDs per well can be entered or imported The sample ID lists are saved as smp files refer to chapter 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan Create Edit a Method Wizard Icons F
228. initions for evaluation and enables you to insert a Sample ID list After the measurement the workspace is completed with the obtained raw data which will be evaluated Start Favorite Is used to select one of the most frequently used methods from the list of numbered icons 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 129 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 2 Obtain Raw Data Select Obtain Raw Data and click Next the following wizard page appears Measurement Parameter Measurement type Kinetic measurement Measurement parameters Cancel lt lt lt Back SHOW SUMMARY 2004 Tecan In the Measurement Parameter dialog box the following options are available Endpoint Use this button to perform a single measurement measurement Kinetic For multiple measurements within a specified time interval measurement this type of measurement is used Measurement Click this button to define the parameters in the parameters Measurement Parameters dialog box WARNING IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED TO CHECK ALL OF THE MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS EVEN PARAMETERS NOT USED IN THE CURRENT MEASUREMENT BECAUSE PARAMETERS FROM THE PREVIOUS MEASUREMENT METHOD WILL STILL BE SET 130 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 2 1 Obtain Raw Data with the Infinite Instrument When an Infinite instrument is connected the following
229. ions Edit Options Login Password E Mail Notify via e mail An administrator can be notified in case of potential security attacks a user account has been locked because a number of unsuccessful logins An email can be sent to the entered email address Select one of the options e SMTP server the IP address of the SMTP server has to be entered f e SEUATEXCHO01 eu tecan net Click Test Mail to send a test mail to verify that the settings are correct Note The notification via e mail requires an SMTP server without authentication 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 215 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 4 6 User Administration Summary A detailed description of all existing users and user groups as plain text can be obtained by clicking Summary in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box EE Summary ox Admin Administrator Administrators Magellan Administrator ToEx Tom Example Magellan Application Specialist GROUPS Administrators Magellan Operator Create sample id lists Create workspaces Print unsigned workspaces Magellan_Application Specialist Create sample id lists Edit sample id lists Create methods Edit methods Aun unsigned methods Define multlabel measurement Define kinetic transformations Define concentration transformations Define alias Create workspaces Edit workspaces Continue evaluation when error Modify evaluation Reeval
230. irectory Remarks entered for that measurement are displayed Show In the Show combo box the displayed list of files can combo box be modified according to the selection Possible selections are e All files e Files from this instrument e My files This option is available if the user administration is enabled always enabled in magellan Tracker e Signed files only available for magellan Tracker e Custom definitions are possible by clicking the button see File Selection Criteria below e Example files only available if they have been installed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 143 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 2 1 File Selection Criteria File Selection Criteria Workspace criteria _ Files from this instrument My files Signed files Containing Warkspace file created modified No time limitation C Today O Last week O Last month O Last Click the aia button to open the File Selection Criteria dialog box Select one of the options under Workspace Criteria All files Files from this instrument My files Signed files or enter characters in the Containing text field which must appear in the Filename The files filtered can be further limited to a specific period of time by selecting one of the options under Workspace file created modified No time limitation Today Last week Last month or enter a number in the Last days field Cl
231. istrator Specialist Operator Define filter slides Change the filter definition of the instrument Yes No No Modify general options Select language suppress not monotone warning allow demo mode Yes No No Reader Server Save plate definition files Create or edit plate definition files Yes Yes No Save spin profile Create or edit spin profile files Yes No No 11 6 About magellan Click the miscellaneous icon e in the wizard window and select m About magellan Copyright information and software disclaimer are displayed A window showing copyright information and software disclaimer is displayed In the About magellan dialog box information about the currently installed version of the magellan software the version numbers of the components tab components and the program license of the user are displayed tab license Register Wizard For further details on the Register magellan Wizard see chapter 2 6 1 Registration Wizard 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 221 TECAN 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker 12 1 User Administration In magellan Tracker a user administration is obligatory Refer to chapter 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker for further details 12 1 1 Audit Trail To become compliant with the FDA Regulation 21 CFR part 11 every step done in magellan Tracker is documented In the Audit Trail al
232. ite 200 Magellan V6 55 Standard e Patient Information Record P P 1 Sample ID 1 for patient 1 P 2 Sample ID 2 for patient 2 P 3 Sample ID 3 for patient 3 e Test Order Record O O 1 SamplelD 44method name Date and time of measurement O 2 SamplelD method name Date and time of measurement O 3 SamplelD method name Date and time of measurement e Result Record R R 1 method name results R 2 method name results R 3 method name results e Message Terminator Record L 1 N 100 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Example ASTM Export Settings More Export to LIS x 457M delimiter definition Sender ID Field delimiter infinite OU Cancel Repeat delimiter R e M Append app name Component delimiter Escape character p M Append app version LIS assay name Encoding f ANSI C Unicode C Use method name f Use name Absorbancet Path Export default path f Use path Set as default CAD ocuments and Settings All Users Documents Teca nuu Restore default The corresponding ASTM file amp Infinite 200 Magellan V6 55 Standard P 1 a0 O 1 a0 4 Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4 4Absorbance1 Raw data A1 0 1015 OD P 2 a1 O 1 a1 4 Absorbance1 20090114124953 R 1 4Absorbance1 Raw data B1 0 1015 OD P 3 a2 O 1 a2 4
233. kinetic transformations must have the same name Start Measurement Exp group 2 Filename Qualitative ELISA Strip orientation Fill pattern os os 2 By columns te Partial Load tive ELISA example Sunrise mth By rows Continuous Final layout Help Cancel lt lt lt Back Layout of currently loaded method SHOW SUMMARY gt 2007 Tecan The Strip Method Definition dialog box contains the following elements Exp group field Load button File name text field Text field Undo button Strip orientation option buttons This field displays the experimental group number that is assigned to the next inserted strip method Click the Load button to open a file selection dialog box where all available method files are displayed Select the required single strip method from the file list and click Open This field displays the name of the currently selected method file In this field the complete path of the method file name is displayed This option cancels the last strip method insertion Determine how the strips are to be allocated to the plate e By columns If this option is selected the strips must be allocated in columns to the plate e By rows If this option is selected the strips must be allocated in rows to the plate 132 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measu
234. l modifications concerning the following data are listed e amethod file e aworkspace file e aSample ID list e astandard curve file e the user administration database or e options and default settings Each entry consists of the user name and full name date and time of change whether the file was created or modified and any audit trail comments Audit Trail of Methods Workspaces Sample ID lists You can view the Audit trail using the Audit trail button at the save page of the wizards Audit Trail of a Standard Curve Standard curves can be saved and afterwards be used for evaluation of data from another workspace For the feature to load a standard curve from external file refer to chapter 4 3 10 Concentrations Standard Curve of the Create Edit a Method Wizard For opening a previously saved standard curve in the standard curve graph refer to chapter 7 4 11 Control Bar Concentrations To view the audit trail of the loaded standard curve select Audit trail from the View menu in Standard Curve Graph dialog box Audit Trail of the User Administration Database To view the Audit trail of the User Administration Database select Miscellaneous icon in the Wizard List starting page and click User Administration Audit Trail of Options and Default Settings To view the Audit trail of all options and default settings select miscellaneous icon in the Wizard List starting page and click Options In the Miscellaneous tab the Audit
235. layed The filename of this workspace can be renamed Arb cycle kin button This button is available if a kinetic measurement is performed Click this button to display the Arbitrary Cycle Kinetic dialog box In this dialog box the measurement can be split up into several sub measurements with a different number of measurement cycles and interval times Each of these sub measurements can be started at any time for example the workspace can be saved and the measurement can be continued on another day Note This option is not available for Infinite Series instruments Method text field The filename of the previously selected method is displayed Modify layout button Depending on the user rights the plate layout can be modified Click the Modify layout obutton to open the Modify Layout dialog box The user can move controls and remove samples change the concentration or change the measurement parameters The changes are stored only in the workspace and not in the previously selected method This button is not available when Obtain Raw Data has been selected and after inserting a sample ID list Sample ID List text field The filename of the currently loaded sample ID list is displayed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 137 6 Start Measurement Wizard 138 Instrument group box TECAN Insert button see also below Click this button to open the Insert Sample ID List dialog
236. le Note Only workspaces and methods created with the currently connected instrument are displayed Source path The Source path edit field contains the path where the edit field files to be converted are stored Click the button on the right of the text field to change the path Destination path The Destination path edit field contains the path where edit field the converted files are stored Click the button on the right of the text field to change the path magellan Tracker this path cannot be modified Convert document s button Click this button to start conversion Progress bar This bar shows the progress of the conversion WARNING TESTS DO NOT CONTAIN MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS WHEN CONVERTING A TEST TO A METHOD THE MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS HAVE TO BE DEFINED MAKE SURE THE MEASUREMENT PARAMTERS FIT TO THE SELECTED TEST The magellan 4 x 5 x tab available only with magellan Tracker contains the same window elements as the previously described tab except that the following options are not necessary e Document type test Tests are not available with magellan 4 x 5 x Customize new method specific options These options are already customized in magellan 4 x 5 x files 11 2 6 Save LogFiles All log files can be saved as zip archive by clicking the Save Logfiles button The zip archive can now be named and saved in a defined directory In case of any measurement or status error during performance o
237. le is modified the path to the current location of the file will be opened However it is possible to save files in any folder of the Windows Explorer or in a newly created folder New Folder Refresh magellan users with administration rights can set the default paths for saving newly created files via Wizard list main page gt Miscellaneous button gt Options button gt Paths These default paths are valid for all users When the Create edit a method Create edit a sample ID list Evaluate results wizards or Use predefined method of Start measurement wizard are started the specified default path is opened automatically Users can also create new subfolders in the folder specified by the default path during the saving process Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Remarks Status New Folder Refresh In the Save window the folder specified by the default path of the method workspace standard curve or sample ID list is opened automatically whenever a new file is created If an already existing file is modified the path to the current location of the file will be opened However it is only possible to save files in the default folder or in an existing or newly created subfolder within this folder 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan magellan supports four file types e Methods mth e Sample ID Lists smp e Work
238. lf this Fix number button is active a number can be entered in the corresponding text field This number defines how many replicates are intended for this method In the selected wells the entered number of replicates for every ID is created Therefore the number of selected wells must be a multiple of the entered number of replicates Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 261 TECAN 14 Application Example 262 All All selected wells are defined as replicates If an existing ID number for the samples and standards is chosen the selected wells are then added as replicates to the existing replicates With all other identifier types the selected wells are added as replicates to the existing replicates Two arrow buttons z H define the direction of the replicate and ID number sequence horizontal or vertical In this example select Fix Number and 2 In the ID Number box and in the Replicates group box select the vertical arrows Then select the wells D1 to G2 and click Fill selection Note Select the wells as follows Starting at well D1 click and drag the mouse over the required wells to H1 Then hold down the control Ctrl key and drag the mouse over the required wells from A2 to G2 The Plate Layout appears as follows Create Edit a Method Select all unused e a GY Method layout S Plate layout cree a ae ae ae a ae _ 4 Identifiers
239. lick the miscellaneous icon os in the wizard window and select User administration Zi in the next window to open the user administration dialog box The magellan software offers protection against misuse of the software or access to the software from unauthorized users by providing a password protection facility Users can be added edited or deleted and their rights can be defined Password protection can also be enabled User Administration User name Rights Add User Admin Admin Magellan Administ APSP App 5pecialist Magellan _Operator Password protection on off User profiles can be defined at three different security levels The highest level of security within the software is that of the magellan Administrator This level gives access to all of the program s functions and data editing facilities For Application Specialist and Operator level options are increasingly restricted Only the User Administrator has the ability to enable or disable the software s password protection define new users or delete old users If the users are logged in under their user name the system will only give access to options according to their user rights definition The user list is maintained via the following three buttons Add User Modify and Disable These buttons should be accessible only to personnel like department managers or data administrators The User administration dialog box contains the following elements
240. ll be displayed in the appearing window Activate or exclude a point by clicking on the Exclude option Only those points that have not been marked as excluded will be used when calculating the standard curve Only base points that have been obtained from raw data have been manually entered or have been additionally loaded can be modified Base points obtained from transformation for example can only be excluded e Conc Range The Concentration Range dialog box is displayed Choose between Display all and Display range If Display range is selected and the Min and Max limits are defined only concentration values in the specified range are displayed in the plate layout window View menu The View menu contains the following commands e Select Audit trail to display the audit trail of an external standard curve This option is only available for magellan Tracker e Select Statistics to display the statistics of the obtained values In order to assess whether any drift or changes have occurred with the reader over a period of time it is possible to compare a series of standard curves by means of statistics values If a number of curves are loaded the average the standard deviation and the variation coefficient will be calculated for each of them e Intercepts opens the Intercepts dialog box The Intercepts dialog box displays the result of the defined intercept values 160 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1
241. ll be inserted The default name should be changed immediately in the edit box The name can be inserted or changed also later clicking Rename Transformation from the context sensitive menu Note The name of a transformation is used to represent the result of the calculations and will also be used when the values are displayed in the specific data output menus Calculated values of the transformations are also available as input data for further evaluations Note The transformation name has to be in Latin characters in order to make the transformation available as additional input data for further transformations with multiple input data A number of transformation calculations can be defined when setting up the method A typical example of this is the deduction of the empty value blank from all wells Refer to chapter 13 4 How to Write a Formula for more details 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 73 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard The formula text box above the plate view is used to define these various transformation calculations using raw data and previous transformations as input data On the microplate the wells for which the transformation is to be applied must be selected The transformations edit field contains the following elements Input data drop down The list contains the measurement values the results list from precalculations and all already defined transformatio
242. ll copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION and all of its component parts 4 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including but not limited to any charts images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT the DOCUMENTATION and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION are owned by Tecan or its suppliers The SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION are protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION like any other copyright protected material 5 TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE Use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall be subject to compliance with the following terms and conditions relating thereto The SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall be used exclusively on devices specified in the documentation only the latest version of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall be used the SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall not be modified nor caused to be modified It shall be your responsibility to personally effect any requisite declarations to the authorities with a view to using SOFTWARE PRODUCTS 6 PRECAUTIONS OF USE Before being commercialized the SOFTWARE PRODUCT underwent a series of tests to measure the reliability of results obtained TECAN However taking into account the high number of possible applications for which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT can be used it has not been possible
243. llowing elements are available in each group Y axis group box e Label text field Enter an axis label e Color button Select a color for all elements of the axis e Log scaling check box Select this check box to display the axes of the graph logarithmically does not affect the calculation e Auto select range option button The software will automatically determine minimum and maximum value of the axis e Range option button The Min and Max numeric fields are enabled The minimum and maximum value of the axis can be specified e Grid check box If selected the grid will be displayed on the axis The Color button and the Line style drop down list can be used to customize the grid 84 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Graph Tab Use this tab to define the appearance of the graph Title group box Following elements are available e Label text field Enter a label for the graph e Color button Select a color for the label of the graph Curves group box Following elements are available e Experimental group spin control Select the experimental group to be customized only available if more than one experimental group defined e Color button Select a color for the curve of the selected experimental group e Symbol drop down list Select a symbol for the base points of the selected experimental group e Label text field Enter a label for the curve o
244. log box the name written in the comment field of the General tab is used as label All parameters must be entered to define a new measurement Properties Click the Properties button and all measurement button parameters of the highlighted label in the measurement parameters list are displayed and can be edited Delete button Click Delete or press DEL to delete the highlighted measurement parameter s from the multilabel field Number of cycles Defines the number of kinetic cycles for a multilabel kinetic measurement Interval Defines the kinetic interval or the pause between labels if only one cycle is defined Note Defining multilabel measurements with Safire2 It is not allowed to define absorbance dual wavelength labels On closing the measurement parameter dialog any defined reference wavelength will be set to 0 A message box will inform the user about this change 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 55 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 3 Define Evaluation 4 3 1 The Create Edit Method Overview Window In the Define Evaluation window the user defines the plate layout he inserts transformations and calculations selects the format of the printed report and sets the automated date handling parameters Create Edit a Method nc e W Method layout KA Plate layout Conc Dil Ref values iz des Transformed data ID Num Add new transformation eE NC
245. lready contain measurement data and additional transformations Some data format definitions must be performed in advance to guarantee correct data retrieval For example the individual data must be separated from the data list by specified separators Further options which must be specified are Plate format number of measurements measurement interval and type of data order orientation and physical unit of the values Data import fails if the ASCII file does not contain as many entries as specified by the plate format Once the required options have been defined select the desired file from the files selection field Finally the file appears and the data is retrieved by clicking the Open bution The Open dialog box is a standard Windows open file dialog box with file navigation elements a text field for entering a file name and a drop down list for the selection of a file type asc Additionally the Open dialog box contains the following elements for setting ASCIll Options Format The Format option button defines the expected data option button format e Table well data in rows option button e Table well data in columns option button e Matrix nested option button e Matrix Separated option button Separator The Separator defines which character is used for the group box separation of the data fields of the list or matrix e lf Tabulator is selected the separator will be a tabulator e lf Tabulator is not selected t
246. lue of the standard curve The factor data field is only active if the Extrapolation check box has been selected It defines the new limits for the concentration calculation Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 83 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Intercepts Tab Use this tab to calculate concentrations for selected Y values based on the standard curve Exp group spin If a number of experimental groups is available the control appropriate group can be chosen Input data drop All data available for calculation is displayed in this list down list Intercept name and A name for the intercept must be created first Then the formula list field intercept formula must be defined A numerical value or a formula can be entered Formula input The selection boxes allow for the easy input of formulas operators by providing a variety of functions operators and variables e Variables All variables accepted by the software are available using in the list box e button Click this button to open the Define constants dialog box e Operators All operators accepted by the software are displayed here e Functions All functions accepted by the software are displayed here Example IC50 for standard curve Formula ST1_1 ST1_8 2 value of the smallest standard plus the value of the highest standard divided by 2 Axis Tab Use this tab to define the appearance of the axes X axis group box Fo
247. ly signed methods Only Method and Workspace files can be signed Note This wizard is only available with magellan Tracker Click Attach signature to start the Attach signature wizard After the welcome dialog box the Select a File dialog box appears Select a Method or Workspace file for signing Show In the Show combo box the displayed list of files can combo box be modified according to the selection Possible selections are e All files e Unsigned files e Signed files 8 2 Signa File Click Next and the Sign window appears Signature File EUSA Meaning Review C Approval Custom Comment for test purposes User Name Password Help Cancel lt lt lt Back SIGN 2004 Tecan 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 173 TECAN 8 Attach Signature Wizard In the Signature group box the following options are available Review Can only be signed by a user with the appropriate rights Approval Can only be applied by a user with the appropriate rights if a review signature has already been applied to the record Review and approval cannot be signed by the same user No changes may be made to the file between review and approval Custom Enter a custom signature meaning in the text field The default user settings only allow administrators to attach signatures to reviews and approvals and to modify signed files Comments can be added in the Comme
248. lynomial of order 3 calculation A minimum of 3 base points is required for a polynomial of order 2 calculation whereas a minimum of 4 is required for the polynomial of order 3 calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process The parameters A ap B a and C a can be used in transformations with polynomial of order 2 For polynomial of order 3 the variables A ao B aj C a and D a can be implemented Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed Formula with coefficient values A B and C for polynomial of order 2 or formula with coefficient values A B C and D for polynomial of order 2 Average square deviation Mathematical Description Approximation function f x x gt R order xwW gt 4 x U order 2o0r3 n gt order Where aoraer Ao are determined by minimizing the error function CTT A aeo Ag gt Fx yy i The solution is unique if order 1 Xx ae X rank order 1 order ae x l Sa eX AANV let which is true if l 13 5 8 Cubic Spline 13 5 9 Akima 2013 08 The adjacent base points will be joined through the polynomial of order 3 calculation The determination of the parameters is performed through the use of the not a knot condition A minimum of 3 base points is required for this calculation
249. m the calculation Data is then shown in brackets Select the Mask check box again to include the value again The direction buttons are used to select another well on the plate while leaving the dialog box open Closes the Edit dialog box The Graph Multilabel dialog box displays the data of the selected wells The raw data versus well IDs is displayed Context Sensitive Menu of Multilabel Graph By right clicking the graph a context sensitive menu Is displayed Crosshair cursor Copy to Clipboard Save as bitmap Print Printer setup Zoom to 100 Properties Help A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on particular points on the graph Copies the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Saves the graph as a bitmap file Opens the Print dialog box from which the graph can be printed Opens the Printer Setup dialog box in which the printer settings can be defined Sets the graph display back to 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph select this command to change the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized This button opens the magellan help dialog box 166 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Graph Kin
250. magellan supports the import of various sample ID list formats see chapter 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID List generated by pipetting software applications It is also possible to generate sample ID lists for the corresponding analysis plates by allocating names to the individual wells Up to three sample IDs per well can be defined Barcodes can be read or well numbers can be generated automatically Workspace wsp A Workspace is created whenever a measurement is performed Run a Method or Obtain raw data without method and contains measured and calculated data as well as all method settings The Workspace stores all of the information gathered during a measurement run the used method with measurement parameters raw data evaluation settings printed report setup automated data handling etc A Sample ID List can also be included Data display settings numbers graphs colors etc can be defined in the workspace In the control bar pane of an open wsp file on the left hand side all available data is listed The selected data is displayed in the plate layout in the information window or in a separate graph window according to the type of selected data In the Edit method tab of a workspace method settings can be changed for the currently opened workspace which results in a re calculation of data but has no influence on the saved method file itself Standard Curve std A measured standard calibration curve can be saved as a
251. mated Data Handling The Data export dialog box contains the following elements Available data list A list of all available data is displayed depending on the method definition lt and gt buttons Data for exporting can be selected simply with drag and drop or by clicking the data in the Available data window and then the arrow pointing towards the Selected data window Data can be deselected by operating the reverse procedure Up and Down The order of the selected data can be changed by buttons selecting an item and pressing the button Up to move it up or Down to move it down Selected data list This list shows all selected data which has been transferred from the Available data field list Export options Click this button to open the Export Options dialog box button Export Options The Export Options dialog box contains the following elements Direction group box The user can define whether the plate data is extracted horizontally line by line or vertically column by column and written in this order to the file e Horizontal option button The data is collected in rows e Vertical option button The data is collected in columns Result group box Select how to export the data in the form of a matrix or of a continuous list e Matrix nested option button Data of all selected data sets is arranged in a single matrix This matrix contains the first columns of all data sets followed by the second columns of all d
252. mber are required After the serial number has been entered in the register magellan dialog box fill out the registration form to start the license number request The completed registration form is sent together with the individual HUID to Tecan Austria The HUID number is generated by the software and is inserted into the registration form automatically It is related to Windows given system drive number After receiving the serial number and the license number you have to start the registration wizard again and enter both numbers The Register magellan wizard confirms the license number and summarizes the user information Click the Finish button to complete the registration procedure magellan s functions will then remain fully available to the user 2 6 1 Registration Wizard The registration wizard starts with the Welcome dialog box which contains a short description of the wizard Click Next and the Serial Number dialog box appears 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 37 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Serial and License Number Order a Serial Number for magellan To purchase magellan and to receive a serial number select the option Order magellan to obtain a valid license The Registration Form window will then appear see chapter Registration Form below Register Magellan pm t Enter your Magellan senal number Order Magellan to obtain a valid license magellan Has
253. me available Tecan Austria GmbH therefore reserves the right to change specifications at any time with verification validation and appropriate approvals We would appreciate any comments on this publication rm Manufacturer Tecan Austria GmbH Untersbergstr 1A A 5082 Grodig Austria T 43 6246 8933 F 43 6246 72 770 www tecan com E mail office austria tecan com Copyright Information The contents of this manual are the property of Tecan Austria GmbH and are not to be copied reproduced or transferred to another person or persons without our prior written permission Copyright Tecan Austria GmbH All rights reserved Printed in Austria Declaration for EC Certificate Provided upon request magellan Intended Use See 1 2 Intended Use of magellan About this Manual magellan is a universal data reduction package used to analyze data generated from microplate assays It is designed for professional use only This manual instructs how to e Install the software e Operate the software Remark on Screenshots The version number displayed in screenshots may not always be the one of the currently released version Screenshots are replaced only if content related to application has changed Trademarks The following product names and any registered or unregistered trademarks mentioned in this document are used for identification purposes only and remain the exclusive property of their respective owners 2013 08 I
254. n Zoom to 100 button Zoom mode button Plate Layout Window 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Performs an undo of the last action Click Undo or press CTRL Z to undo a previous action Repeats the action which was performed before the undo step Click Redo or press CTRL Y to redo an action that was undone Plate Layout mode only All unused wells of the plate are marked This will set the plate layout view to 10 This will set the plate layout view to 100 In case the well plate consists of a large number of wells the individual well assignments cannot be displayed in the 100 zoom mode Use the Zoom mode button to zoom into the marked area If activated the user can select an area to zoom in by clicking and dragging a frame over the desired layout area Click the right mouse button to zoom out to 100 display The Plate Layout window shows the defined parameters and or procedures depending on the selection in the control bar see chapter below Control Bar of Create Edit Method Tab Parameters and procedures are e Method Layout plate layout concentration dilution and reference values e Precalculation polarization FLT spectra and cuvette data reduction e Transformed Data add new transformation e Kinetic kinetic data reduction e Kinetics Transformation add new kinetic transformation e Concentrations standard curve e Conc Transformation add new concentration transformation e Evaluate data
255. n Procedure Depending on the settings the calculation follows the procedure below 1 Precalculation 1 1 G Factor calculation polarization calculation blank reduction intensity total intensity and anisotropy calculation 1 2 Cuvette data reduction 1 3 Spectra calculation Check if data and evaluation settings fit together Raw data statistic calculation Transformation calculation Kinetic parameter calculation Kinetic transformation calculation Concentration calculation Concentration transformation calculation Cutoff range determination 0 QC Validation 1 Statistic calculation 2 OONDPAN The procedure is repeated if e QC Validation eliminated values using the eliminate functions e Interpolation parameters in the transformations are required Equal values for transformations in kinetic and multilabel measurements will be suppressed For calculations with different dilutions the Mean concentrations will be discarded In case the evaluation procedure is aborted through errors results calculated until that point can be displayed In case some values are found to be FALSE the following Occurred Errors dialog box will appear Message text field The error message and a short explanation is displayed in a text field Save as file button Click the Save as file button and the error protocol can be stored in an ASCII file In case the curve fit failed depending on the user right a question is displayed where t
256. n be edited See below for further information The whole plate or a part of the plate can be selected to be automatically filled with sample IDs After selecting the corresponding wells selecting the Autofill option displays the Autofill Selection dialog box See below for further information Note When editing a Sample ID list it is possible to use Drag amp Drop Use the left mouse button to select and drag items Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Edit well 2013 08 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard The Edit Well dialog box can be accessed via the context sensitive menu or the tool bar button Sample IDs for all wells on a microplate can be defined A maximum of three sample IDs per well is possible The desired sample IDs for the marked well have to be entered in the Edit Well dialog box This has to be repeated for every well that shall be filled with sample IDs The navigation functions of the Edit Well dialog box can be used for comfortable working Click OK to close the dialog box and the sample IDs for the latest marked well are saved The Edit Well dialog box contains the following elements Left Right Up and Down buttons On Enter move in vertical direction check box Edit sample IDs text fields Autoincrement check box The direction buttons can be used to select another well on the plate while leaving the dialog box open and saving t
257. nected also a whole plate can be scanned Note Usually a scan of 2 corners is sufficient In case of a strip plate we recommend to use 4 corners Select the number of corners and continue with the measurement parameters Createfedit plate geometry Scan plate O Enter well position 2 comers Top left well _ 4 comers Distance from top Whole plate Distance frorn lett Measurement Bottom right well parameters Distance from top Fill the wella in the edges with an appropriate Distance from lett solution e g fluophar Help SCAN VIEW SUMMARY 2006 Tecan Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Click the button Measurement parameters to setup the measurement example when connected to an Infinite F500 Measurement parameters Readmode C Absorbance 2 Fluorescence intensity Grid C Fine Medium O Rough Scanning a Black Plate Measurement parameters Wavelength Meas wavelength Read Humber of reads Settle time 492 nm 20 If you scan a black plate you have to fill in an appropriate reagent into the upper left well in this case A1 and the lower right well here H12 in case of 2 corners and in case of 4 corners into the upper left well upper right well here A12 lower left well here H1 and lower right well here H12 Click OK to close the measurement parameter di
258. new password The old password has to be entered The new password must comply with the defined password rules and has to be entered twice to prevent typing errors Old passwords cannot be reused The new password will expire after a defined period of time See chapter 11 4 5 User Administration Options 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 33 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Login Once user administration has been activated the Login dialog box will appear each time magellan starts Magellan Orie eR OF LF eo afo o magellan Tracker W 6 4 Usemame Password m 3 2007 Tecan The Login dialog box contains the following elements Username text box Enter your UserID Password text box Enter your Password Click the GO button to close the dialog box and the user is logged in Only those user actions can be performed that correspond to the user s rights Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box and magellan is terminated The user account will be disabled after the maximum number of consecutive unsuccessful logins has been reached see chapter 11 4 5 User Administration Options Login Options Application Locked If the application has not been in use for the specified maximum of time user defined only in magellan Tracker it will be locked The password must be entered to unlock the application 34 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1
259. ng options can only be modified by a user with the appropriate right These options are then valid for all users e Language e Demo mode allowed e Suppress not monotone warning for standard curve e Favorites e Accepted HUIDs Note In magellan Standard the data path can be set by the user in magellan Tracker the data path is a general setting valid for all users 198 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 3 1 Default Data Paths This tab defines the default paths the different file types used in magellan are to be saved in These predefined paths are set upon the software installation of magellan and can be changed in the corresponding data fields of the Paths tab Options Paths Copy Plate View Miscellaneous Default paths Workspace Sample ID list Export nd Settings val Users Documents T ecan agellanasc Ld Standard curve Bitmap C Documents and Settings 4 Users D ocuments Tecd Change default data path The Paths tab contains the following elements Default paths A text field for each of the following file types is text fields displayed containing the corresponding default paths e Workspace e Method e Sample ID list e Export for measurement data exported to ASCII files e Standard curve The path for standard curves is always the same as the path for workspaces e Bitmaps for bitmaps created
260. nhanced Data Displayed in Status Bar When the GCM Enhanced is connected via the magellan software some of the data is displayed in the magellan status bar at the bottom of the application window This data is updated periodically every 30 seconds Depending on the on the GCM Enhanced configuration and the selected mode magellan displays either the current CO2 and O2 concentrations or the current CO2 concentration only For further information about GCM Enhanced configurations refer to Infinite200 PRO manual lf GCM Enhanced is in standby GCM Standby is displayed If connection to the GCM Enhanced is lost e g because the module has been turned off or unplugged while magellan is running GCM Module Error is displayed To remove the error plug in or turn on the module Disconnect the Infinite 200 PRO reader and reconnect reader and GCM Enhanced with the magellan software via Connect 188 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Support 10 6 GCM Enhanced Data Displayed in Measurement Status Dialog When the GCM Enhanced is connected via the magellan software the current CO2 and O2 concentrations are displayed in the Environment group box during a measurement Depending on the GCM Enhanced configuration and the selected mode magellan displays the current CO2 and O2 concentrations or the current CO2 concentrations or O2 concentrations only During endp
261. ns as well as the averages If Mean data is selected as Input data for Transformations then transformations will be assigned to the first replicate of an identifier only Formula text box fx Formulas can be entered by typing or by selecting the needed function from the Functions amp Constants list box Formula drop down This list contains some standard formulas see Notes list below and all formulas which have been incorporated into the current method A formula may therefore be selected from this list or a new formula can be added Formulas for transformations can be entered using the appropriate variables operators and multiple functions Confirm button Formula edit mode only Green hook Assigns the transformations to the selected well Click Confirm button or press ENTER key to assign the formula definition to the well and change to Select mode Cancel button Formula edit mode only Red cross Click the Cancel button or press the CANCEL key to leave the Edit mode without assigning the formula definition to the well Available data drop Select from this list the appropriate data if more than down list one set of input data shall be used for calculations The data set will appear in the formula text box within apostrophes followed by an exclamation sign To complete the definition enter the identifiers name or refer to the corresponding value within the well E g Raw data BL1 The list contains the measurement value
262. nstructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 281 TECAN Index Numbers refer to pages A About MAGE AN cccccccecseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 221 abs argument cccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 Add INES isis ansieadustanpunstuneatineevactaviinveendsesoi wins 225 Add New Transformation ccccccsseeeeeeeees 73 Add Modify Rolle ccccccsesseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeaeees 208 Add Modify User magellan Standard 218 Add Modify User magellan Tracker 206 Administrator ccceeccceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeteneesens 13 PAGING S E P E E E E 249 and logical expression cccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Application Examples cccccccseseeeeseeeeeens 257 Application Locked ccccsssseeeeseeeeeees 34 213 Application Specialist ccccccssseceeeeeseeeeees 13 Approval scenerii kaian dassenecanc canada 174 Arbitrary Cycle Kinetic ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 Archive Files cccccccseeeeeeeceseeeeeeeneeteneees 191 area under the kinetic curve 0 ccceseeeeeees 79 ASCII File Export cccccsssseeeessseeeeeeeeaeees 148 Assign Alias inescce cteaccessendesacnceecdenabeedsscccbace 58 62 ASTM delimiter definition ccccccseeeeeeeees 99 ASTM Export Settings ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 ASTM file cccniutatntanucnederevchesteutenctcaiiens 99 100 101 ASTM File Export cc
263. nstructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 3 TECAN Product Name infinite Tecan and the Tecan Logo are registered trademarks of Tecan Group Lid Mannedorf Switzerland DNA Expert is a registered trademark of Techcomp Ltd Hong Kong China Agilent is a registered trademark of Agilent Technologies Inc Santa Clara CA USA AIR LIQUIDE is a registered trademark of AIR LIQUIDE S A Paris France Aseptisol is a registered trademark of BODE Chemie GmbH amp Co KG Hamburg Germany Bacillol is a registered trademark of BODE Chemie GmbH amp Co KG Hamburg Germany Costar Corning and NBS are registered trademarks of Corning Incorporated Corning NY USA Greiner uClear Lumitrac and Fluotrac are registered trademarks of Greiner Labortechnik GmbH Frickenhausen Germany HTRF is a registered trademark of Cisbio International France Invitrogen is a registered trademark of Invitrogen Corporation Carlsbad CA USA Lysetol and Gigasept formerly Lysetol are registered trademarks of Sch lke amp Mayr GmbH Norderstedt Germany Microcide is a registered trademark of Global Biotechnologies Inc Portland Maine USA Microman is a registered trademark of Gilson Inc Middleton WI USA Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation Santa Clara CA USA Invitrogen and PanVera are registered trademarks of Invitrogen Corporation Carlsbad
264. nt text box In the User Name text field the user name of the currently logged in user must be entered In the Password text field the password of the currently logged in user must be entered Click Finish to confirm the entered information and sign the record Note Depending on the standard operating procedures of the company using this software this signature may be viewed as legally binding Therefore it is very important that the users keep their passwords secret 174 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 9 Batch Processing 9 Batch Processing 9 1 Introduction magellan supports batch processing with the Tecan Connect stacker and supported Tecan readers CAUTION Do not use microplates with covers when using the Connect stacker to perform batch processing 9 2 Microplate Requirements for Batch Processing The use of plate types is limited according to the specifications of the connected instrument See the respective Instructions for Use for details Any common microplate ranging from 6 to 1536 well formats conforming to the ANSI SBS standards ANSI SBS 1 2004 ANSI SBS 2 2004 ANSI SBS 3 2004 and ANSI SBS 4 2004 may be used with the Connect stacker for batch processing Microplates with covers cannot be used with the Connect PARAMETERS CHARACTERISTICS Overall plate height From 7 3 mm to 20 mm Footprint Length 127 76 mm 0 5 mm Width 85 48 mm 0 5 mm
265. ntensities at those wavelengths is calculated and available as result Area to calculate the area below the spectra curve between two defined wavelengths Custom option button a user defined formula can be entered Intensities at specified wavelengths can be used in formulas Results list box summarizes all defined formulas Add button the current selection is added to the list of results Delete button the selected result is removed from the list Edit button the data name of the selected result can be defined The Normalize parameters dialog box contains the following elements Normalize parameters Input data Smoothed spectra Normalize to Cancel Max intensity Intensity at WL nm Hel Elp Use this option to normalize the spectrum to the intensity at a given wavelength or to the maximum intensity of the spectra graph of each well Input data text box shows the input data to be processed Normalize to select between maximum intensity or insert customized intensity A peak is defined as the position of the maximum value of the spectrum Overflows and maxima at the left or right border of the spectrum are not treated as peaks It is very important to sufficiently smooth the spectrum before finding a peak Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 71 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard TECAN The Peak parameters dialog box contains the following e peak area
266. ntrol amp Settings Click the Instrument Control button in the Wizard List dialog box and the Instrument Control dialog box appears Instrument Control Instrument Setup amp Service Movements Change instrument Temperature control Define filter slides Injector control Plate geometry editor Dispense only Buildin Test Connect Depending on the instrument connected different instrument and setup amp service options are enabled or disabled 3 1 Instrument Options 3 1 1 Movements This opens the Movements dialog box in which it is possible to control the movements of the plate carrier and the filter slides In the Movements dialog box specific In and Out buttons can be used to move the plate carrier or filter slides into the reader or out of it 3 1 2 Temperature Control Only available for instruments equipped with temperature control In the Instrument Control dialog box click the Temperature Control button This option allows the user to establish the temperature inside the reader This dialog is also accessible via the Start Measurement dialog box before starting a measurement See chapter 6 6 Start Measurement with a Predefined or Favorite Method 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 41 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings Temperature Control Current temperature z F eu Current temperature 34 9 AE Target temperatu
267. nts There are three possible states Successful Warning and Failed Error If any errors are reported please contact your local dealer for support After the check is finished it is possible to generate a report containing the information displayed by the IQ tool In addition to the information of the IQ tool the report contains a signature field so that the report can be saved and printed for auditing purposes Click the Report button in File gt Report to generate a report The report can be saved as a PDF file as well as other file types Click Cancel or Exit to close the Installation Qualification program Note The installation qualification should be repeated each time magellan is installed updated to a newer version or the underlying system Is updated or modified 1 5 3 Operation Qualification OQ In addition to the installation qualification check Tecan also recommends that the calculation abilities of magellan are tested For this purpose the installation medium of magellan contains a workspace and report file Open the OQ workspace file for the installed magellan version and print the report The newly printed report has to be identical to the corresponding OQ pdf report except of course for the time and date information If the two reports differ please contact your local dealer for support 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 19 1 Introduction TECAN 1 5 4 System
268. nvalid Graph Kinetic Lamp low Layout Plate Layout Max slope hr Max slope min Max slope sec Maximum Mean slope hr Mean slope min Mean slope sec Mean conc 7 Measurement data Measurement parameters Measurement type Method Minimum 2 8 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 response Reduced data calculated with polarization measurements Reduced data calculated with polarization measurements Value is invalid no calculation possible Graph of kinetic measurements No values from measurement because of absorbance instrument error Defines where samples or controls are placed on the microplate Kinetic Parameter Maximum slopes of the kinetic curves per hour Kinetic Parameter Maximum slopes of the kinetic curves per minute Kinetic Parameter Maximum slopes of the kinetic curves per second Kinetic Parameter Maximum value of the kinetic curves Kinetic Parameter Average slopes of the kinetics curves per hour Kinetic Parameter Average slopes of the kinetics curves per minute Kinetic Parameter Average slopes of the kinetics curves per second Concentration calculated from the mean of the replicates of the input data Dual wavelength absorbance measurement Data measured using the measurement filter Defines measurement mode wavelength plate size shaking etc The measurement type can be endpoint measurement kinetic measurement multilabel measu
269. od tab the kinetic parameters are set equal for all wells The Summary dialog box provides an overview of all defined parameters of a selected well Information tree Left right up and down buttons Expand All Shrink All OK The information tree gives an overview of all defined well based parameters of the selected well The tree is filled according to the available information e g if sample ID list information is available the sample ID the pipetting status etc are displayed If raw data is available additional information can be displayed depending on the measurement settings and the connected instruments for example for kinetic measurements the time points are displayed The direction buttons can be used to select another well on the plate while leaving the dialog box open Click this button to display the information tree expanded to the highest level or to shrink to the first level Closes the Summary dialog box The Details dialog box displays the multiple reads per well results of one well File menu Edit menu View menu Help menu Save amp Exit is selected to save all changes and close the dialog box The Edit menu contains the following commands e Click Copy to copy the single values into the clipboard which then can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function e Select Recalculate to force the recalculation of the statistic data at the bottom of the dialo
270. of Contents 1 PEER OGG U OUD scene cececenepecnsensancnseusevacsessenceunaesanncassuocteeassanmeccsnocaanaeet 13 1 1 Area of Application siccesecenesescevecsesccensseessrdeewencsenevtncsiecewsecheeeweciecceets 13 1 2 Intended Use of magelllan cccccssscseseeeeseeeeeeeneeeeseeeeseeeneeeesenens 14 1 3 User PRO TNG ee E a Ea 14 1 3 1 Professional User Administrator L Vel c1cccseeeeseeee 14 1 3 2 End User or Routine USCS 0 cccccccccccceecseecceecctecenecenesseesens 14 1 4 CCUG AN OUTS veces tran trauicnavecnentedeencsedacnnectcedoneriiestietinenientavesmvesivencen 15 A TOI e ana vate eee ee 15 1 4 2 System Requirements sccccscccseeccseccseeccnsessueeseessusesaeeees 15 1 4 3 Reader Compatibility ccccccccsecccseseceecccneeecsescssneessseeeeaeees 17 1 5 Software Installation ProCeCure ccesscceeseeeeeseeseeeseseeeeseneeeeees 18 1 5 1 Automatic Software Setup PLOQrain cccsccccesecseeeeneenneeees 18 1 5 2 Installation Qualification IO eccccecceseccccnseensesceceeesnseeeneess 19 1 5 3 Operation Qualification OQ iicccccseecceesseeeeeeeateeeessaeeeseans 19 L54 OyVSlem ROCOV 6 eee eee ence ene oe ae ee en ener ener 20 1 5 5 Automatic Software Removal cccccscccsseeecsesessnseenaesesenes 22 Start Working with magellan scccccssseeseeseesenseseeneeseeneees 23 2 1 SOR MCI ACE srs a IE 23 2 1 1 Folder HandiiNg 1 ccsccccscccsescnseecnneecauccsusensuscs
271. offs Definitions in magellan Control bar Evaluate data Cutoff definition e Input data Mean conc UA mL Limits 22 18 Positive gt 22 gt intermediate gt 18 gt negative Non competitive test 5 QC Validation Definitions in magellan Control bar Evaluate data QC validation e Input data Single conc UA mL Validation condition 1 NC1_1 lt 8 Validation condition 2 NC1 2 lt 8 NC1_1 Negative Control first replicate first experimental group NC1_2 Negative Control second replicate first experimental group Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 15 Glossary of Terms 15 Glossary of Terms Term Definition Anisotropy Average single conc 7 Basis Basis Blank Reduction parallel Blank Reduction perpendicular Clipboard Correlation coeff Cutoff limit Cutoff results Cutoff definition Dilution factors Dilution series G Factor Goodness of fit Graph Data calculated with polarization measurements Concentration calculated by averaging the single concentrations Kinetic Parameter Basis OD RFU RLU value of the onset calculation Kinetic Parameter Basis value of the onset calculation in Reduced data calculated with polarization measurements Reduced data calculated with polarization measurements The clipboard is the medium by which programs under Windows exchange data with each other Data can be sele
272. oint measurements the Environment group box is displayed in the top right edge of the application window During kinetic measurements the Environment group box is displayed below the Time group box on the right side of the microplate below the kinetic graph 10 7 Precautions before Starting a Measurement Heating must switched on before using the GCM to maintain a stable gas atmosphere The plate carrier compartment should be closed until the target concentration is reached When reconfiguring the Mode setting of the GCM Enhanced wait at least 30 seconds before starting the measurement so that magellan can update the GCM Enhanced data properly 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 189 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 Miscellaneous Icon Click the miscellaneous icon in the wizard window and select between the following actions definitions Miscellaneous Magellan Tracker V 6 4 Instrument control File handling Options User administration About magellan 2007 Tecan 11 1 Instrument Control See chapter 3 Instrument Control amp Settings 11 2 File Handling 11 2 1 Archive Files The Archive Files group box gives an overview and complete control of file backup It lists all the files workspaces methods sample ID lists or temporary files saved by magellan 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 191 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon TU Fil
273. ol e Constants e Results 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 163 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 17 Color Scale Dialog Box If values contained within the analysis plate are presented in different colors the Color scale dialog box is displayed The colors allow for a fast overview of the measurement results of the individual wells The colors as they are used depend on the settings defined in the color scheme 7 4 18 Context Sensitive Menu of a Well By right clicking on a well on the plate layout when having selected the tab Edit Method a context sensitive menu is displayed offering the following commands Summary Details Edit Edit kinetic settings Copy kinetic settings Paste kinetic settings Graph Multilabel Graph Kinetics Graph Multilabel kinetics Graph Spectra Graph Dilution Series Mask Unmask selection Show Hide layout Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 The Summary dialog box is displayed The Multipoint Measurement dialog box is displayed to show the single measurement points per well The Edit dialog box is displayed for Raw Data only Opens the Kinetic parameters dialog box and offers the ability to modify the kinetic settings for the selected well s Copies the kinetic settings of the selected well s into the clipboard Assigns the kinetic settings from the clipboard to the selected well s
274. ol measurements exceeds 4SD A run is rejected if 1 control measurement exceeds the mean plus 2s and another exceeds the mean minus 2s The two control results need not be consecutive Control rule to test whether four consecutive control measurements exceed the same control limit of either x 1SD or x 1SD A run is rejected if 4 consecutive control measurements exceed the mean plus 1s or the mean minus 1s control limit A run is rejected if 10 consecutive control measurements fall on the same side of the mean However if one of these results falls directly on the mean then the run is not rejected Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 3 Toolbar Menu Edit The Edit menu contains the following selections Copy to Excel In the Edit menu click Copy to Excel or press CTRL X The Copy to Excel command allows the user to export data directly into an MS Excel worksheet The necessary options regarding the copying of the data to Excel can be defined in the Options dialog box Refer to chapter 11 3 2 Copy Export Options First the relevant wells must be selected with the mouse If more than one non adjacent well field must be selected press the Control key while clicking the requested fields If no wells are selected all wells will be copied Once all wells are selected the Copy to Excel function transfers the well data into an Excel worksheet
275. oncX gives the difference between the calculated and the original concentration of the well Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 4 8 Spectra Functions smooth numPts Smoothes with the given number of points minimum Delivers the minimum as data pair wavelength intensity maximum Delivers the maximum as data pair wavelength intensity normalize w Normalizes by using the intensity at the given wavelength peak threshold wlStart wlEnd peakindex percLimit Delivers the peak as data set intensity wavelength width area Peaks lower than the threshold will not be found Peak search is done in the given wavelength range peakIndex 1 returns max peak peakIndex 2 gt returns min peak peakIndex 0 1 2 returns peak at the given index percLimit is a percentage used for calculating width and area numPeaks threshold wlStart wlEnd Delivers the number of peaks found in the given wavelength range Peaks lower than the threshold will not be found derive degree Calculates the derivate of the given degree Valid degrees are 1 and 2 e g derive 2 intensity function Delivers the intensity of either a data pair or a peak e g intensity minimum wavelength function Delivers the wavelength of either a data pair or a peak e g wavelength maximum width function Delivers the width of a peak e g width peak0 5 450
276. ontal list alternating SCO Sorted list Al BLL 0 101 0 0004 io i i a2 llari 2lo102 00m3 Sample onented list s E Exp Groups Layout Rinw data All experimental groups Blank reduction _ Cuol resul l 2 Cutotf results 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 95 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Limitations group box Page Setup Tab TECAN select between the following options Identifiers select or unselect which identifiers should be displayed in the list Exp Group select between all experimental groups or enter the Experimental group number you want to displayed in the list Cutoff results select between all cutoff results or select from the list which results should be displayed in the list In the Page Setup tab general settings are defined Display Header Footer group boxes Print Page group Margins group box e Print Header check box If selected the header will be printed e Print Footer check box If selected the footer will be printed e Header option buttons Every page prints the header on every page First page only prints the header only on the first page Except fist page prints the header on all pages except the first one e Footer option buttons Every page prints the footer on every page First page only prints the footer only on the first page Except fist page prints the footer on all pages except the first one e
277. or detailed description refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard The Create edit a method wizard is used to define or edit methods Methods contain all necessary parameters for measurement evaluation and data handling according to the performed assay Methods are saved as mth files refer to chapter 2 2 Components amp Terms Basic Logic of magellan zi Icon Change Current User 28 If the user administration is active refer to chapter 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker and to chapter 11 5 User Administration magellan Standard click this icon to log out the current user and to login a new user With magellan Standard user administration is optional With magellan Tracker user administration is obligatory Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan gt Icon Miscellaneous click on the Miscellaneous icon to select the following options e Instrument control Options P D File handling Pti User administration IMA About magellan e Instrument control provides quick access to several instrument functions to service and setup options See chapter 3 Instrument Control amp Settings e File handling is used to move files to an archive location to convert files from or to another magellan version and to import raw data from an ASCII file See chapter 11 2 File Handling e Options is used to customize certain default settings as path
278. or magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 177 TECAN 9 Batch Processing 9 4 3 Start Batch Processing To run a measurement using the Tecan Connect stacker click Use stacker in the Start Measurement dialog box of Start Measurement wizard refer to chapter 6 6 Start Measurement or Create Edit a Method wizard refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard and click Start to start a stacker run Start Measurement Measurement Measurement parameters Workspace 2 Stacker method wep sale Measurement mode Absorbance Measurement wavelength 492 nmi Method 52 Stacker_method mth Modify layout Number of reads 1 Plate definition file GRE 96ft pdf Sample ID list Insert Unit OD Instrument Use stacker Curent 33 5 C Please note You are uzing the stacker with Platetype GAE SEE pdt Greiner J6 wel Flateheight 14 5 mm Skirtheight 2 5 mm lt a 0r Cancel 2006 Tecan 9 4 4 Control Stacker Movements 178 To control the movements of the Connect stacker click the Miscellaneous icon in the Wizard List dialog box and select Instrument control Click the Movements button in the Instrument control dialog box Depending on the type of instrument connected Movements dialog box may vary Movements Excitation4bsorbance filter slide Stacker In Cemo Out Emission filter slide Restack now In Cemo Out Mirror carriage lf a Connect stacker is conn
279. or magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 255 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 6 Calculation of Dilution Series 13 6 1 Detection of Dilution Series The following criteria have to be fulfilled to force magellan to detect a dilution series on the layout e Sample s with a minimum of four replicates e Usage of at least four different dilution factors for the single replicates of a sample magellan checks the whole layout and picks all found dilution series 13 6 2 Curve Parameter Calculation Curve parameters are calculated for every found dilution series using the Four Parameters Marquardt algorithm In case of a failure the calculation is redone using the Four Parameters algorithm Please refer to chapter 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types for more detailed information about the algorithms mentioned above 13 6 3 Calculation of IC Values First the maximum intensity Imax and the minimum intensity lmin of every dilution series is picked Calculation of IC intensity If the 0 value is set to intensity Intensity 0 o IQ IC 100 0 max If the 0 value is set to Min intensity of dilution series T L ICx b o max fe 100 0 Calculation of dilution at ICx Using the curve parameters calculated in step 12 6 2 and the calculated IC intensity the resulting dilution is calculated A L dilution C C_ 8 La 256 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TEC
280. or must be created Caution If the User Administrator password is forgotten User Administration settings cannot be changed and magellan must be completely reinstalled Note We recommend to create at least two User Administrators 32 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan After clicking OK the User Administration dialog box appears User Administration Groups Group Hame Magellan Administrator Add Group Magellan_Application_ Specialist Magellan_O t agellan_Operator Aan Users User Name Full Hame Groups Admin Administrator Magellan Administrator Magellan App Add User Modify User Users and groups can be added edited or disabled and user rights can be defined Options for login password and email can be edited See chapter 11 4 User Administration magellan Tracker and chapter 11 5 User Administration magellan Standard Change Password Initial Password magellan Tracker only When a user logs in for the first time the password assigned by the administrator has to be changed After entering the User name and Password and clicking OK the message Your initial password is only valid once You have to change the password appears Click OK the Change Password window forces the user to enter a new password Password Expiration magellan Tracker only When the password expires the user will be prompted to enter a
281. ore starting to work with magellan we suggest reading the document Notice Anomalies magellan for any malfunctions in the application User Interface The main type of the user interface in magellan is the wizard Standard magellan wizards represent workflow modules which are step by step guides for performing complex procedures Occasionally menus are available in the heading bar The Menu offers a conventional way of using the software the relevant menu item is selected from the main menus All subsequent actions are started instantly or a dialog box is displayed where further selections or entries can be made Folder Handling In magellan it is possible to create a user specific folder structure for saving files methods workspaces standard curves and sample ID lists in any folder of the Windows Explorer Create Edit a Method Save in O C Documents and Settings All Users Documents T ecan M agellan mth Application Da A Remarks i gt Desktop O Favorites A Method Shared Docurr B Shared Mu Shared Pic Shared Vic 3 Tecan i gt Det gt LooFile 5 Magell O as gt mtl E sm vi G ws Fa Pee gt lt Filename Method3 mth File remarks Organize favorites Method password Run this method now SAVE D 2007 Tecan New folders can be created by right clicking and selecting New folder from the context sensitive menu Files and folders can be moved easily f
282. orescence Intensity Absorbance Luminescence C Fluorescence Polarization Read barcode Move plate out after measurement Comment to this measurement Ratio Mode aK tect Hee 176 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 9 Batch Processing Note The option Read barcode can be selected if either the reader or the Connect stacker has a barcode reader module Measurement Parameter Stacker Tab Measurement Parameter SAFIRE II Simulation Plates Don t read top most plate Restack after last plate Optimal gain Measure for all plates O Use gain calculated from 1st plate Demo mode Number of plates These settings will be ignored if no stacker is used Cancel Help The Stacker tab of Measurement Parameter window contains the following elements Plates group e Don t read topmost plate Select Don t read topmost plate if this plate has been used as a cover The topmost plate will not be processed and will be moved to the output stack e Restack after last plate Select Restack after last plate to return all plates to their original order in the input stack after all of the plates have been processed Optimal gain group e Measure each plate Measure the gain on each plate e Use gain calculated from 1 plate Measure the gain only on the first plate and use this gain for all following plates 2013 08 Instructions for Use f
283. ort Connect Cancel 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 179 TECAN 9 Batch Processing After selecting the simulated instrument a drop down list will appear offering several options depending on the instrument selected above see screenshot above For the Infinite 200 for example these options are e Filter F200 normal or F200 enhanced or F200 FP Option e Monochromator M200 normal or M200 enhanced In the Additionally connect to field select ConnectSimulator to simulate the Connect stacker for batch processing Click OK to confirm selections For a more detailed description on defining parameters for the respective instrument please refer to the instructions for use for the connected or simulated instrument 9 5 2 Prepare for Batch Processing for Infinite Series Readers Read Barcode D Y Plate 1 A Flate definition GRE 384st Greiner 384 Flat Transparent s C Plate with cover Read Barcode Use a part of the plate The Read Barcode checkbox appears in the Plate program element of the magellan software if the Infinite Series reader has a barcode reader or if a Connect stacker is connected and has a barcode reader For more information about the Barcode Scanner option for the Infinite Series reader refer to the Instructions for Use of the corresponding instrument 180 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 9 Bat
284. owing elements Status text field Display in wells group box Pause button Break button Plate View display Cycle text field Graph display Previous cycle group box The text field is updated during the measurement and contains a measurement status information Select the mode of representation of data in the wells Values option button The measured value is displayed in the well If more than one value is measured for example polarization measurement all values are displayed in one well Graph option button The option is enabled if a kinetic graph can be displayed The graph is shown as soon as more than one value is available To pause a kinetic measurement run at the next possible moment click the Pause button In the Pausing Kinetic dialog click the Plate out Plate in button to move the plate transport out of or into the instrument Click the Continue button to go on with the kinetic run Pausing Kinetic Kinetic rin i pausing Press button Continue to continue kinetic run Plate out CONTINUE Click this button to break the measurement at the next possible time point The Plate View display shows a schematic display of the microplate According to the Display in wells option the contents of the wells are customized The wells are updated as fast as the instrument delivers data Some instruments support row wise or even well wise data transmission other instruments only plate wise da
285. password must be changed at the next login 206 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Click OK and the Modify User dialog box appears B Modify User Update User The users profile can be updated by changing the full name password and role associations The user name cannot be modified User Name Toes Full Hame Tom Example C Administrators Magellan_Operator Change picture kel Magellan Application Specialist Q Magellan Administrator Delete picture Roles fe Change Password aaa The Modify User dialog box contains the following elements Full Name Enter the full name of the user Roles Select from one of the existing user groups The rights associated with that group are assigned to the user Change picture User s picture can be added or changed Delete picture Delete the user s picture Change A new user s password can be defined Note that the Password administrator needs not to provide the old password To modify a user click Modify User in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box In the Modify User dialog box proceed as described above 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 207 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 4 2 Add Modify Role Click Add Role in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box and the Create New Role dialog box appears Define a unique Role Name Note that this n
286. plications It supports a basic user administration e magellan Tracker software is designed to support FDA 21 CFR part 11 regulated environmenis It offers all functionality to become compliant with the FDA Regulation 21 CFR part 11 and with the European In Vitro diagnostic directive 98 79 EC 1 4 2 System Requirements TF minimum Recommended Windows XP 32 bit Windows compatible PC with a 2 GHz Dual Core Pentium compatible processor running at 1 GHz Windows Vista 32 bit Windows compatible PC with a Pentium compatible processor running at 1 5 GHz 2 GHz Dual Core Windows 7 82 or 64 bit Windows compatible PC with a Pentium compatible processor 2 GHz Dual Core running at 1 GHz Windows 8 32 or 64 bit Windows compatible PC with a 2 GHz Dual Core Pentium compatible processor running at 1 GHz Operating Windows XP 32 bit SP3 Windows 7 64 bit SP1 System Edition Professional Edition Professional Windows Vista 32 bit SP2 Editions Business Enterprise Ultimate Windows 7 32 bit SP1 Windows 7 64 bit SP1 Editions Professional Ultimate Enterprise Windowss 32 bit Windowss 64 bit Editions Pro Enterprise RT NOT supported 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 15 TECAN Minimum Recommended Memory Windows XP 512 MB RAM 1 GB RAM 1 Introduction Windows Vista 32 bit 1 GB RAM 2 GB RAM Windows 7 82 bit 1 GB
287. priate reference value has to be typed in mP units It is recommended to use a reference blank for the G factor calibration The reference blank check box has to be activated and the appropriate identifier which has been defined in the plate layout has to be selected from the list box In the Sample blank reduction group box it has to be determined if the blank reduction is applied to the samples measurement values or not If the blank reduction is selected a blank reduction is performed before the calculation of the polarization values The option Automatically precalculate polarization data can be disabled for further custom evaluation of parallel and perpendicular raw data The Polarization Settings dialog box contains the following elements Automatically Select this option in order to use automatic precalculation precalculate of polarization data This option cannot be enabled for polarization data multilabel measurements check box G factor group box A G factor must be established when measuring with polarization e Use option button and text field lf the G factor is known it can be directly entered in the text field attached to the option button e Confirm at runtime check box If this box is selected the user is prompted to confirm or modify the G factor e Request from instrument check box If this box is selected the G factor is read directly from the reader and cannot be entered manually e Calibrate option button
288. put data text box shows the input data to be processed Blank reduction option button select if a blank reduction should be performed on the selected experimental group Reduce all by dropdown list select to define the identifier to be used for blank reduction A spectrum containing a lot of noise can be smoothed A smooth factor can be set in the options part This factor defines the degree of smoothing Input data text box shows the input data to be processed Smooth factor to define the smooth factor Wavelength pick is used to extract intensities at specific wavelengths and calculate results like ratios It is mandatory to set the options The Wavelength pick parameters dialog box contains the following elements Wavelength pick parameters Input data Smoothed spectra WL nm 400 Calculate Ratio i Area O Custom Data name Formula Cancel Intensities at a specific wavelength can be extracted ratios and areas can be calculated and customized formulas can be entered Input data text box shows the input data to be processed Pick Wavelengths option button an intensity at a specific wavelength can be added to the list of calculated results 70 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 Normalize check box Peak check box 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Calculate Ratio option button two wavelengths can be specified The ratio of the i
289. quired number of non alphanumeric characters except for Administrator fo Minimum required number of numeric digits 0 Password expires after the specitted number of days g0 Passwords have to contain a specific minimum number of characters Passwords can be defined to contain non alphanumeric characters and or numeric digits Password cannot be reused Minimum password length Specify the required number of characters Minimum required number of non alphanumeric characters Specify the required number of non alphanumeric characters Minimum required number of numeric digits Specify the required number of numeric digits Password expires after the specified number if of days User passwords expire after a configurable number of days The user must then choose another password Specify the required number of days range 1 to 36500 days Allow empty password Select this checkbox if it is allowed to have an empty password for a user except for the administrator 214 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon When the password expires the user will be prompted to enter a new password Change Password User Hame Old Password New Password Confirm New Password miid The old password has to be entered The new password must comply with the specified password rules and has to be entered twice to prevent typing errors Email Opt
290. r Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 17 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Onsets Tab 78 Using the maximum slope option the maximum slope maximum increase decrease achieved in the selected interval will be determined Under the Points option the number of combined points has to be entered At the beginning the slope will be calculated from the center point of the 1 and the n point from the first n points Then the interval will be moved one point further and the process is repeated This process will continue over all points within the selected interval The result will be determined as the largest absolute value of these individual slopes The kinetics data made available through this method includes the maximum slope per second per minute and per hour as well as the time span from the first measurement to the maximum slope in seconds Use the Onsets tab to determine the time to reach a certain point OD RFU Polarization value The Onsets tab contains the following elements Input data drop Select the input data to be processed down list Time to onset If the Time to onset check box is selected an absolute check box value for the onset can be entered in the following text field e Text field An absolute value for the onset must be entered e Basis mean of the first n points option button and text field If the option button is selected the points text field is active and the desired number of points
291. r Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard 4 5 Multiplate Methods When connected to a Tecan instrument from the Infinite series or to a Safire instrument multiplate methods can be defined using magellan version 6 0 or higher When connected to an instrument from the Infinite series the number of plates to be measured can be set in the measurement parameters editor during method definition see the Instructions for Use for i control Measurement parameters Infinite 200 p a Lab Ware Se gt Plate COS96ft Corning 96 Flat Transparent Fluorescence Intensity Plate w PartofPlate amp Part of Plate CA Well N Cuvette ea Measurements Absorbance U Absorbance Scan O Fluorescence Intensity H O O OOe8e e F Fluorescence Intensity Scan Y Luminescence mn Luminescence Dual Color p 7 Fuoretconco Intensity e Wavelength Read KN Actions Excitation 485 nm 9 Number of reads Temperature Emission 535 nm 20 Settle time w Mode Gain i infection Top Bottom Manual gain amp Dispense O Onti Move Plate Integration al _ p t Move Cuvette Lag ii ee Integration time Label Kinetic y iple Reads per We Multiple Reads per Well Nane Eaa bd dente oe wwe eee G Kinetic Cycle Number of plates 5 lt CHOOSE MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS gt c Tecan 2004 When connected to a Safire instrument
292. r cannot change those specifications The Operator must be trained by the Administrator For a detailed description of the user rights of an Operator refer to chapter 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker respectively to chapter 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard magellan Tracker is designed for use with the operating systems and Microsoft Office versions specified in chapter 1 4 2 System Requirements If additional programs are installed functionality in accordance with IVD for Europe and FDA Regulations cannot be guaranteed Note magellan is designed to be used with one computer it is not intended to be integrated into a network 1 2 Intended Use of magellan magellan Standard software is a reader control and data reduction software for analyzing data generated from microplates using a Tecan absorbance fluorescence luminescence and or AlphaScreen AlphaLISA microplate reader The software is intended for endpoint kinetic multilabel fluorescence lifetime and spectral scanning assays magellan software is intended for professional use according to the software specifications described in the manual Instructions for Use for magellan magellan Tracker software offers all functionality for compliance with the FDA regulation 21 CFR part 11 for electronic records and signatures in addition to the functionality of magellan Standard magellan Tracker software is also intended for in vitro diagnostic use in Europe according to the
293. racker Filename list In the Filename list the sample ID list to be edited has to be selected A Remarks field next to every file name contains if entered a short description of the sample ID list All sample ID lists available in the standard sample ID list directory which fulfill the filter criteria selected in the show combo box will be displayed Print Preview A preview of the selected sample ID list is displayed and button a printout can be started 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 109 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Note After the magellan 30 day demo license has expired printing will not be possible 5 2 1 Create New Sample ID List In the Select Plate Type window the number of sample IDs per well and the used plate type can be selected The Import from external sample ID list option allows to browse for different types of sample ID files and to import them into magellan Note Some sample ID lists may contain additional information such as concentrations and dilutions which may affect evaluation of the measurement data Select plate type Plate type Settings Sample IDs per well Plate type from method Method rth Standard plate types O Plate type from pdf file horiz Table Import from external Sample IDs list 2 vert Table Matrix 7l Cancel 1 Back on Eee eee gt l 2007 Tecan The Select plat
294. rail of the sample ID list only available in magellan Tracker See 4 4 Saving the Method Audit trail for further information The Save amp Finish button is only enabled when a document has been modified The modified document can be saved under its current file name or under a different name Click Save amp Finish to save the sample ID list and close the Create Edit a Sample ID List wizard Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 127 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 1 Introduction In the Wizard List window click Start Measurement to open the wizard Click Continue LD on the welcome page and the Select a file dialog box appears Select a File Obtain Raw Data Run Strip Layout Use Predefined Method Show Files from this instrument vw Start Favorite Remarks Status MAKE YOUR SELECTION 2007 Tecan Obtain Raw Data Is used to generate raw data quickly by setting the required measurement parameters This wizard is designed to create a new workspace to set the measurement parameters and to obtain measured values Run Strip Layout Enables the user to create one strip method from different methods and to run this combined method Use Predefined Is used to perform measurements based on already Method defined methods The wizard creates a new workspace that contains the selected method which consists of all measurement parameters and def
295. rd curve numeric selection field lf there is more than one experimental group for LogitLog and Four Parameters the Min and Max value can be selected for each curve individually e Weighting select Use weights to use one of the following weighting methods Automatic using variance Automatic using relative weight Manual See chapter 13 5 14 Weighting for Four Five Parameter Fit Marquardt Polynomial Fit e Weighting dialog select More button if Automatic using variance is selected gt Error handling dialog is displayed Define the weighting factors which should be used if one of the two error cases All replicates are equal or only one replicate is left occurs which give a variance of 0 and therefore would lead to an calculation error e Min Max text fields Min Max allows the user to define the minimum or the maximum limit of the standard curve for LogltLog and Four Parameters If the Include option is selected 0 0 will be added as standard point This is only available if Linear has been selected as the axis division for both axes Extrapolation applies the concentration calculations to those base points which lie outside of the permitted range as well as to those which lie within the range for example an extrapolation factor of 3 forces a concentration calculation of values between min 2 max min and max 2 max min where min and max correspond to the minimum and maximum concentration va
296. re Temperature control on Plate in Target temperature ar ble Apply Current The current temperature is displayed in the corresponding temperature field Click the Refresh button to update the current temperature Target To start or stop the temperature control select or clear the temperature check box and enter the target temperature To set the temperature of the instrument click the Apply button The temperature is sent to the instrument but the dialog box is still displayed Click OK the target temperature is sent to the instrument and the dialog box disappears 3 1 3 Heating Dialog Temp Control for Infinite Series Readers Heating Parameter Target Temperature 25 0 fae C Eji Curent Temperature E v Auto Target This command is used to set the target temperature of the temperature instrument manually Select or enter the Target temperature and click Set Click On Off to start stop instrument heating Current Click the Read button to display the current temperature of temperature the instrument or click the Auto check box to have it read automatically Click Off to stop heating Click the down button Z to display the heating graph and click the up button A to collapse Click the close button to exit the Heating dialog box 42 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 3 Instrument Control amp Settings 3 1 4 Lamp Las
297. rement Wizard Fill pattern option This option allows the users to decide between allocating buttons every new strip to a new row or column or allocating it to the next available well in the plate e Partial If this option is selected the strips will be allocated to complete new rows or columns in the plate e Continuous If this option is selected the strips will be allocated to the next available well in the plate Final layout The graphical display shows the layout of the composition graphical display of strip methods The way in which wells are transferred from the Layout of currently loaded method area to the Final layout area depends on the settings of the option buttons Strip orientation and Fill pattern Layout of currently The graphical display shows the layout of the currently loaded method loaded method Double clicking on the last available well graphical display will add the strip method at this position to the plate This will be displayed in the Final layout area on the left side Replicates which are not selected are automatically added This step can be repeated by loading another strip method 6 4 Use Predefined Method 2013 08 Select Start measurement from the wizard list Click Continue on the welcome page and the Select a file dialog box appears Select Use Predefined Method and select the required method from the Filename list Select a File Obtain Raw Data Run Strip Layout Use Pred
298. rement or well kinetic measurement Methods contain of the measurement parameters and the evaluation definition Running a method leads to a workspace that contains the measured and calculated data Kinetic Parameter Minimum value of the kinetic curves 2013 08 TECAN Term 15 Glossary of Terms Definition Multiple Reads per Well Measurement MultPt NoCalc Original Concentrations Overflow Pipetting status QC Validation Strip Method Names Polarization Raw data Reference data Results statistics RFU parallel RFU perpendicular Sample ID List Sample IDs Single conc 7 2013 08 A variety of readers have the ability to run a number of measurements within the same well The average of the individual values will be determined for use in the evaluation and if required chosen values can be masked from the calculations of the mean value The standard curve is not monotone and delivers more than one concentration at the given input data No value returned from the calculation Concentrations of the standard curve defined in the method Overflow occurred during measurement in this well If a sample ID list is imported from a pipetting software the pipetting status can be displayed The QC validation criteria are defined in the method and stipulate whether a measurement Is valid or invalid The criteria can for example indicate if the measurement values lie too far apart from e
299. rkspace filename check box e Workspace pathname check box e Filter wavelength value s check box e User prompts check box e Current user name check box e Measurement parameters check box e Multiplate plate information check box e Workspace audit trail check box magellan Tracker only e Workspace signatures check box magellan Tracker only Settings can be logged as a default for future use Settings can be reset to the previously defined default 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Example Raw data kinetic cycle 1 timestamp 0s 111213 21 22 23 Raw data kinetic cycle 2 timestamp 33 s 81 82 83 91 92 93 Matrix nested Matrix Separated Matrix XFluor style horizontal horizontal with lt gt 1 2 3 11 81 12 82 13 83 timestamps A 111213 21 91 22 92 23 93 Os B 212223 111213 lt gt 1 2 3 21 22 23 A 818283 33 S B 818283 81 82 83 91 92 93 Table well data in Table well data in Table well data in rows horizontal with columns horizontal columns vertical timestamps 11 12 13 21 22 23 11 21 12 22 13 23 Os 33s 81 82 83 91 92 93 81 91 82 92 83 93 1181 12 82 13 83 21 91 22 92 23 93 Export of Multiple Reads per Well Data 2013 08 Note When multiple reads per well data are available it is possible to export the single values of such a measurement beside the averages by selecting the Data name Multiple Reads per Well in the export data list A separate data block in fix format is
300. rocess the data provided by magellan Before data can be exported the data must be selected in the Data Export dialog box via Edit method tab Data handling Data export Select the folder where the exported data shall be stored Enter a file name asc Upon clicking Save in the Save as dialog box the data sets specified in the Data Export dialog box will be saved as an ASCII file The Save as dialog box is a standard Windows dialog box with file navigation elements a text field for entering a file name a drop down list for the selection of a file type asc and Save and Cancel buttons ASTM File Export LIS In the File menu click ASTM File Export to export data to in ASTM format to compatible Laboratory Information Systems Select the data to be exported from the Data Export dialog box via Edit method tab Data handling Data export Sample Tracking Export Excel Export Method Export 148 In the File menu click Sample Tracking Export to export data to the Sample Tracking system Select the data to be exported from the Data Export dialog box via Edit method tab gt Data handling Data export In the File menu click Excel Export to export data to Excel Select the data to be exported from the Data Export dialog box via Edit method tab gt Data handling Data export In the File menu click Method Export In some cases the user will request to save the method definition of a workspace as a m
301. rom one folder to another by drag and drop or cut copy paste respectively in the same manner as in Windows Explorer Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 23 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan File Type Symbols magellan uses the following symbols for methods workspaces standard curves and sample ID lists in the file view window Method Standard curve BS Workspace Password protected method sample ID list ie magellan Standard magellan Tracker 24 Default paths for saving newly created files can be set via Wizard list main page gt Miscellaneous button gt Options button gt Paths tab If the user administration is activated users can define individual default paths When the Create edit a method Create edit a sample ID list Evaluate results wizards or Use predefined method of Start measurement wizard are started the specified default path is opened automatically Users can create new folders in any folder of the Windows Explorer during the saving process i None Remarks MA Methodi 9 Methodz Shared Pictures EI Shared Video Tecan C Det 3 LogFiles Elf Magellan D ase O mth emp E v6 4 GB wsp H Magellanl S Pate Fi Reader e lt In the Save window the folder specified by the default path of the method workspace standard curve or sample ID list is opened automatically whenever a new file is created If an already existing fi
302. rs E System devices Tecan controlled devices m Universal Serial Bus controllers 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 185 TECAN 10 Gas Control Module GCM Enhanced Support 10 3 Connecting to GCM Enhanced Once the VPC driver is installed and the GCM Enhanced is connected to the PC the GCM Enhanced appears in the Additionally connect to section of the Connect to dialog box Connect to Instrument a x Connect to Instrument Name Type Alias Fort Infinite O0Pro READER F200 Pra USBO Additionally connect to Instrument Hame GCM enhanced E COM4 Show simulated instruments Reconnect to the selected instrument at nest start up OK Cancel 10 4 Data Logging magellan starts logging data provided by the GCM Enhanced when a measurement is started and from then on every 30 seconds until the measurement is finished The data is written into a log file called GCM log_YYYY MM DDThh mm ss txt YYYY MM DDThh mm ss stands for date and time of log file creation Log file name example GCM log_2012 01 011T12 34 56 txt magellan creates a separate log file for each measurement The location of the log file depends on the operating system e OnWindows XP computers this log file is stored in C Documents and Settings All C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Tecan Logfiles Magellan Version Instrument Serial Number e On Windows Vista
303. rted and click the Open button The Windows Open dialog box is closed and the file is loaded Confirming the Sample ID List Setting dialog box with Next will open the Import Edit a Sample ID List plate window with the sample IDs displayed The Import button can also be accessed via the Insert Sample ID List dialog box which is available in the Start Measurement window Insert button and Evaluate Results plate view Edit toolbar menu 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 117 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Caution Make sure that the correct ID list has been selected otherwise the results will be assigned to another list Note When importing tpl dd1 or custom format sample ID lists additional information that modifies the evaluation definitions can be included Note When importing sample ID lists with dilutions the dilution must not be more than 1 1e 12 magellan Standard and magellan Tracker Easy Files esy These files consist of lines which contain the sample ID and the well name well name alpha numeric max 3 characters sample I D aloha numeric max 20 characters The lines are separated by CR LF Example C01 B01 A01 0001 H02 0002 G02 0003 F02 0004 E02 0005 Interpretation When magellan is processing an esy file e Number of sample IDs is set to 1 e Sample ID is set as sample ID in well 118 Instructions for Use for magellan No 3006640
304. ructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 157 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard at F i i i dL EXPERT S KNOW HOW DEFINE KINETIC DATA REDUCTION WELL SPECIFICALLY Select Edit kinetic settings from the right mouse context menu when a well is selected The Kinetic Data Reduction dialog is displayed see chapter 4 3 8 Kinetic Kinetic Data Reduction for further details For the selected well particular parameters can be defined which can also be copied to other well s select Copy kinetic settings from the right mouse context menu click in the well s where the settings have to be copied to and select Paste kinetic settings Changing the Kinetic Data Reduction settings in the Method tab will overwrite the well specific definitions Graph Enzyme Kinetics Dialog The Enzyme Kinetics Graph dialog box enables the user to display the enzyme kinetics graph Context Sensitive Menu of Enzyme Kinetics Graph By right clicking on the graph a context sensitive menu is displayed Crosshair cursor A crosshair cursor is displayed in order to assist in placing the cursor on particular points on the graph Copy to Clipboard Copies the graph into the clipboard as a bitmap the bitmap can be transferred to any Windows application by using the paste function Save as bitmap Saves the graph as a bitmap file Print Prints the graph Printer setup Displays the Printer Setup dialog box in which the prin
305. s Edit an existing workspace and save it with the same name Yes lt D cp Z O Sign workspaces Sign an existing workspace for review approval Yes Z O O O O O Z O Edit signed workspaces Edit a signed workspace and save it with the same name Yes Continue evaluation when error Continue calculation after errors have occurred Yes lt D op Zz O Modify raw data samples Edit or mask measurement data of samples Z O Z O Yes Modify raw data standards Edit or mask measurement data of standards controls blanks Yes Import raw data Import raw data from ASCII file in an existing workspace Yes Z O Z O Modify evaluation Change evaluation method settings in an existing workspace Yes Yes Z O Reevaluate with another method Reevaluate an existing workspace with another method Yes Yes Z O Modify layout Change measurement parameters concentration and layout before starting a measurement Yes lt MO ep Z O Standard curve Create standard curve files Create a new standard curve and save it with a new name S O Edit standard curve files Edit an existing standard curve and save it with the same name Yes Yes No 7 7 MO ce Sign standard curve files Sign an existing standard curve for review approval Reserved for future use 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 211 TECAN 1
306. s Select one of the options Create new sample ID list or Edit an existing sample ID list When Create new sample ID list is selected the Select plate type page appears in which the plate type and sample IDs per well or the import settings can be set Then the Import edit a sample ID list page appears where the sample ID for the wells can be entered individually or automatically using the Autofill function Finally in the Save as page the created or modified sample ID list is saved 5 2 Create Edit a Sample ID List In the wizard list click Create edit a sample ID list After the welcome page select Create new to create a new sample ID list or select Edit to edit an existing sample ID list from the file selection window The File Selection window contains the following elements a Create new When the Create new option was selected a new option button sample ID list can be created The user will be guided to the Select plate type window where plate type and number of sample IDs per well are defined b Edit option button When the Edit option was selected the Import edit a sample ID list window is displayed where an existing sample ID list can be modified Sample IDs can be inserted in the wells Show combo box In the Show combo box the displayed list of files can be modified according to the selection e All files e My files This option is available if the user administration is enabled always enabled in magellan T
307. s the results from precalculations and all up to this moment defined transformations Functions drop down Lists all mathematical and Boolean functions for the list definition of formulas Options button Use this button to customize the behavior when selecting wells in the edit mode It is possible to select between the following options e Identifier average name e Identifier replicate name e Plate well name Constants button Click this button to open the Define Constants dialog box where constants for calculation can be defined 74 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Note If a blank is set in the Plate Layout the formula to calculate the blank reduction is offered in the combo box x BL1 The symbol x refers to the current value within a well BL1 is the average value of the blank wells Note lf a multilabel measurement with two labels is defined different formulas to reduce the multilabel data are offered in the combo box Label1 x Label2 x predefined ratio calculation Label2 x Label1 x predefined ratio calculation Label1 x Label2 x predefined difference calculation Label2 x Label1 x predefined difference calculation Lable1 x Label1 BL1 Label2 x Label2 BL1 predefined ratio caculation with blank reduction Lable2 x Label2 BL1 La
308. s 60 Define Constants cccccecceeceeceeeeeeeeeees 76 125 Define Evaluation cccccccccccsseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 56 Define Filter SIide S sisisirsuisussoriariunstiniotusuvsrisusta 43 Dilution Series ss csacancevseatieccsasseersasensdeardanceesasans 162 E Edit Constants ccccccseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 136 Edit user prompts ccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 136 Edit Well cccccccsssesecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeees 115 eliminate arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 008 239 eliminatePerc arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 239 eliminateRange arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 240 Email Options cccccseeeceeeesseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 215 Enzyme KINetiCS cccccssseeeceeseeeceeeseeseeeeees 80 Enzyme Kinetics Grapn cccccccsseeeeeeeees 158 Be ANS AN ea wrtsretensadatienun ost smenenlte ee iamendansioaviane 86 Evaluate Results ccceeeceeeeeseeceeeeeees 143 171 Excel 0 8 gee een ee ene meee a eee eee 148 exp argument ccccccceeeeeecceeseecseseeeseaeeees 236 Export OAS ll cnsostecatenssctecdauieeacenese eadeenatiwsessemecessceeecacae 92 BO EGC flees ceentestceenc sanction ected esecunteatarenaasscesee 93 F File Handling cdiicwtietionicimdenadsh vases cheneaksivnnuausiniwash 224 File Selection Criteria ccccccssseeeeeeseeeeeeees 144 file type symbols cccccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeeeees 24 File Types Used with magellan
309. s for use Current Temperature text field The current temperature of the instrument is displayed Target Temperature text field The target temperature set in the Temperature Control dialog box is displayed Temperature Control button Click this button to open the Temperature Control dialog box See chapter 3 1 2 Temperature Control In a text field all configured measurement parameters are listed and can be double checked Important information is displayed Read this information and start appropriate actions before running the method A warning is displayed if the layout is defined for wells that will not be measured Click Start to start the measurement A workspace will be created automatically which contains all previously entered information and will collect all measurement values While the measurement is being executed a measurement status dialog box appears indicating the progress of the measurement Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard If you run a multiplate method the Run Measurement dialog box appears after clicking Start Run measurement Measurement of plate of 2 Sample ID s list STOP PAUSE RUN mj u P Ts It contains the following elements Measurement of Displays the number of the currently processed plate plate Sample ID List Insert the appropriate sample ID list for the selected plate Sample ID lists h
310. selected IC 50 r IC 50 Graph dilution series Graph Standard Curve Dialog Open this dialog via the control bar or by clicking Curve on the toolbar to display and edit the Standard Curve This dialog box has its own menu with options to save the standard curve change the analysis type or compare a number of curves The graph can be exported as a bitmap which can then be incorporated into documents of other software applications The Graph Standard Curve dialog box contains the following elements File menu The File menu contains the following commands 2013 08 New is selected to create a new standard curve the X and Y values can be defined in a dialog box Enter measured values Y Value and concentration X Value If the Exclude option is selected the corresponding point will not be incorporated into the calculation of the graph On completion click the OK button Open is selected to open a previously saved standard curve A standard curve saved in the file format std can be opened On execution of this command the graph will be displayed together with the already displayed standard curves Close If a number of curves are open individual curves can be closed using this option The relevant curve must be selected from the available list and closed by clicking the OK button Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 159 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard e Save Save as is selected
311. ser Prompts s wecsorencsdecetswneseksycceneuensncscneaarduce 102 User RIQhts cccccccseecceeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 210 219 table of default rights cccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 209 User Rights magellan Standard 219 User Rights magellan Tracker 0 209 W Weighting Four Five Parameter Fit Marquardt Polynomial Fit ccccseececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 255 Welcome Dialog DOX cccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 31 Well Summary cccccseececeseseeseeeseeeseaeeeeees 116 Westgard rules c cecessesesesesesesesvereeesereren 152 Wizard Standard Elements ccccccseeceeceseceeeeseeeeeeeees 30 WES eee en ce cee oe 27 Workspace OVEIVIEW ccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 145 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 285 TECAN End User Software License Agreement IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a legal entity and Tecan Austria GmbH Tecan for the proprietary software product identified above which includes computer software SOFTWARE PRODUCT and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation DOCUMENTATION This SOFTWARE PRODUCT is made available to you only on the terms and conditions of this EULA By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT which ever occurs first yo
312. spaces wsp e Standard curves std Note The menus and toolbars available vary depending on the type of file currently opened The magellan main window contains the window area and a status bar at the bottom of the page Depending on the data selected a toolbar e g plate view graph and a menu bar plate view evaluate results in the header are displayed 2 2 1 Method mth 2013 08 With the Create edit a method wizard methods are created which combine all of the necessary parameters for the measurement evaluation and data handling of an assay measurement parameters evaluation settings a printed report setup data export setup number format and automated data handling settings They do not however contain any measurement data refer to chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Methods accelerate data evaluation and can be customized for assays which are processed regularly When a new method is created at first all wells of the plate layout will be empty When defining the layout transformations etc the identifiers formulas etc are displayed in the corresponding wells Data can be analyzed with different methods Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 25 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan 2 2 2 Sample ID List smp 2 2 3 2 2 4 With the Create edit a sample ID list wizard sample ID lists are created which contain the alphanumeric IDs of each sample in the microplate
313. st higher limit and 18 as the second lower limit In Labels enter the test interpretation Positive Intermediate and Negative into the individual boxes Use the drop down color palette to assign a color Positive Red Intermediate Blue Negative Green The screen contains the following Input data Mean cone UA ml Cutoffs Colors Labels Positive termediate Negative E E T E Em Co E E a Formula input C Competitive Test Variable Operators Functions J y w and Cutoff results selection Click Cutoff results selection to select the identifier types for which the cutoff results must be shown Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 267 TECAN 14 Application Example Define QC Validations In the control bar click QC Validations from the Evaluate data item Validation criteria for the test must be defined so that the validity of the test results is guaranteed In this example the following requirement must be fulfilled The calculated IgM concentration of both negative controls must be under 8 UA mL In the Input box select Single conc UA mL In the first row type NC1_1 lt 8 or enter the formula using the available variables operators and functions Note Ci NC1_1 means Negative control of experimental group 1 replicate 1 In the second row type NC1_2 lt 8 The QC Validations dialog box is now displayed as follows Validation
314. std file and used for subsequent evaluations of other measurements refer to chapter 4 3 Define Evaluation Control Bar of Create Edit Method Tab 2 2 5 File Types Used with magellan 26 The following file types are used with magellan By default all file tyoes associated with magellan are stored in subdirectories in the appropriate directory All Users Documents Tecan Magellan The subdirectories are displayed in the table below Type of File File Extension Directory magellan Workspace wsp magellan wsp Method mth magellan mth Sample ID List smp magellan smp Export Files asC magellan asc Standard Curve std magellan wsp Plate Definition pdf pdfx Reader pdf Reader pdfx Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2 Start Working with magellan Note The difference between plate definition files with pdf extension and pdfx extension is that Infinite Series instruments use the pdfx format files whereas all other Tecan instruments use pdf files 2 3 User Interface Wizard List After launching magellan the Wizard List appears Wizard List Magellan Tracker V 6 4 What do you want to do ata measurement The Start Measurement wizard helps you to perform a measurement Evaluate results 7 Ou can either use a method or obtain raw cata Atach signature gt Createfedit a sample ID list Create fedit a method Exit Magellan gt 2007 Tecan
315. t the defined cell e Append to current worksheet option button This option will append the data to the current worksheet If Excel is not open when selecting this option it will be started and a new workbook will be created inserting the requested data into the first worksheet e Use Insert into Template to export data into a predefined Excel template Path and name of the Excel template must be entered clicking the button The corresponding cell position must be indicated Set as default Using this option the settings can be logged as a default button for future use Restore default Using this option the settings can be reset to the button previously defined default 4 3 15 Data Handling Printed Report In the control bar expand Data handling and select Printed report This dialog box provides options for defining the printed report The Printed report dialog box provides formatting features for hardcopy printouts to customize the contents and the appearance of the printout Output for reporting or presentation needs can be created The settings for the reports are grouped in four tabs which represent certain formatting areas 1 Data Selection tab 2 Page Setup tab 3 Header tab 4 Footer tab 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 93 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Data Selection Tab TECAN The Data Selection tab provides a list of data available for printing Print as group
316. t 0 1 FALSE The following expressions are used in the program and as an example can be written in the following manner if statement then Term A else Term B The statement The statement must be either true or false and written in brackets If the statement is arrived at by means of logical operators and or then the whole expression must be written here and enclosed in brackets Terms A and B If the statement is true Term A will apply and if the statement is false Term B will apply lt is not always necessary to include the else expression If it is not present in the equation no response will be given in the event of a false result The if then else expression can also be used with Boolean terms for QC Validation Example Check whether the value of a well lies within a defined range If the result is yes the well will be represented by the value 0 0 if the result is no the value 1 will be used if x gt 0 005 and x lt 0 0 then 0 0 else 1 0 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 235 13 Calculations TECAN 13 4 4 Basic Functions abs argument exp argument frac argument int argument Log argument In argument Ig argument round argument 236 This function gives the absolute sum of the argument Therefore 1 x where x lt 0 and x where x gt 0 Example abs 1 1 abs 1 1 This function raises the Euler e value
317. t Using this option the settings can be reset to the button previously defined default Caution A suitable export delimiter must be selected The export delimiter and decimal character should not be the same TAB is set as the default delimiter but another symbol can be selected 92 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Export to Excel The Export to Excel dialog box contains the following elements Target group box The option buttons define where to position the transferred data within Excel This option is also valid for automatic Excel export e New workbook option button Transferred data will be stored in the first worksheet of a new workbook A new file will always be created no matter if Excel is started or not e New worksheet option button Transferred data will be put into a new worksheet within an open active Excel workbook If Excel is not open when selecting this option it will be started and a new workbook created including the requested data into the first worksheet e Insert into worksheet at cell option button and cell coordinates text field The first value of the transferred data will be placed into the cell indicated default is cell A1 of an open active Excel worksheet If Excel is not open when selecting this option it will be started and a new workbook will be created inserting the requested data into the first worksheet a
318. t dialog box will appear after Save is clicked Start Measurement Measurement Measurement parameters Workspace 17102005 001 wsp Measurement mode Absorbance Measurement wavelength 492 nm Method Quantiative_example mth Modify layout Reference wavelength 620 nm Read mode Normal Sample ID list Insert Unit OD Instrument Curent 37 0 C Target 370 C Plate In Temp control Movements Please note START gt 2004 Tecan Click Start to start the measurement A workspace will be created automatically which contains all previously entered information and will collect all measurement values While the measurement is being executed a measurement status dialog box appears indicating the progress of the measurement After the measurement is completed the Results dialog box appears in which all the results and calculations can be viewed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 273 TECAN 14 Application Example 14 2 4 Evaluate the Result Evaluate results enables you to view and evaluate raw data The evaluation parameters can be viewed and data can be re evaluated This section guides you through the Evaluate Results wizard using the example workspace file created by running the quantitative ELISA method Note Example files automatically appear in the Method List in magellan Standard For magellan Tracker these files are available in the default data p
319. ta transmission When injection or dispensing is performed the currently used well is automatically highlighted in a different color If a kinetic measurement is performed the Cycle text field displays the current cycle number and the maximum number of kinetic cycles If a kinetic or multilabel measurement is performed the kinetic or multilabel graph of the currently selected well is displayed in a larger size at the right side of the Measurement Status dialog box As long as the transmission of the data of the current cycle was not started the Raw data text field contains the value of the previous measured cycle of the currently selected well As long as the transmission of the data of the current cycle was not started the Temperature text field contains the temperature of the previous measured cycle 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 141 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard Time group box The Elapsed time text field displays the time span since the start of the measurement The Exp run time text field displays the time span expected for the whole measurement Scaling of the y axis in the graph is possible by selecting either Auto select range or Select range MIN MAX Note It is possible to select multiple wells on the plate to view the selected kinetic curves in a graph When performing kinetic measurements the retrieved data is saved automatically every 30 min in the magellan log f
320. ta made available through this method includes minimum maximum value and the time span from the first measurement to the minimum maximum value in seconds Example With a kinetic of 5 cycles and a fixed number of 3 points following averages are taken average of 1 2 and 3 kinetic value average of 2 3 and 4 kinetic value average of 3 4 and 5 kinetic value The minimum maximum value is determined from these 3 averages The area under the curve is calculated using the formula given below n l Z X Ya I Cag A y Gin 5 i j l 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 79 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Available Data Tab A list of the results is displayed in the Available output data tab This gives an overview of the results of the selected calculations The Available output data tab contains the following elements Data field The data field lists values as selected in the previous tabs of the Kinetic Calculation Parameters dialog box This data field is for pure display of the listed output data only and provides no edit functions Enzyme Kinetics Tab Use this tab to establish the evaluation of enzyme kinetics according to the model of Michaelis and Menten This tab is only available if standards are on the plate and either transformations or slope calculations are defined The Enzyme kinetics tab contains the following elements Input data drop Sel
321. tained by pressing the SHIFT key together with the number 6 key but not on the numerical keypad Example x 3 The value of the well will be increased to the power of three lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than Greater than or equal to Equals Is not equal to Assigned to 234 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations Note The difference between equals and assign to For example If x 0 000 then x 1 000 If the current value of x is equal to 0 then set the value of x to 1 13 4 3 Formula Functions The expressions and and or can be incorporated into the same equation through the use of logic functions The result from a logical equation will be either TRUE or FALSE and is therefore a Boolean value The individual equations must be enclosed in brackets Logical Expressions and or if then else 2013 08 In equations of this nature the result will be TRUE if both expressions are found to apply otherwise a result of FALSE will be given Example Where the value held by the well is 0 3 x gt 0 0 and x lt 1 TRUE x gt 0 0 and x lt 0 1 FALSE In equations of this nature at least one of the expressions involved must be found to apply in order that a result of TRUE can be given Example where the value held by the well is 0 3 x gt 0 0 or x lt 0 1 TRUE x gt 0 4 or x l
322. tations A response at a dose x value of zero keep in mind that x 0 does not appear on logarithmic plots Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 251 TECAN 13 Calculations D response at an infinitely high dose C is the point of symmetry on the curve 1C50 and below this point the curve is a mirror image B is a measure of the steepness of the curve at the inflection point in fact it is within a possible change of sign the slope of the curve written in its Logit form Notice that the curve is always decreasing if A gt D or increasing if A lt D 13 5 11 Four Parameters Four parameter approximation needs to fulfill the same base point requirements as LogitLog The resulting curve will be produced using the Nelder and Mead Downhill Simplex method This method produces an increasingly more accurate approximation of the result throughout the interval The four parameter method requires considerably more time to be processed As with LogitLog an S shaped curve is produced A minimum of four base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process The parameters A B C and D can be employed as parameters in the transformations The approximation is always applied to the unscaled base point values In the Standard Curve dialog box following additional information is displayed Coefficient values A B C and D Average square devia
323. teCV NC1 15 3 The calculated CV of the individual values of the negative control shall be below 15 After the elimination at least 3 replicates must be left to get TRUE as result countDeleted arg1 arg2 240 This function checks if there are enough valid values available and returns TRUE or FALSE arg1 The identifier whose quantity is to be checked arg2 The lowest number of replicates that must be available Example countDeleted NC 1 2 This function works in conjunction with the Eliminate functions in equations The Validation contains the following line if NC1 gt 0 5 then eliminateRange NC1 0 0 5 2 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations If the average of the negative control lies above 0 5 then all replicates that lie outside of the range should be omitted This elimination will be processed once If values for elimination are found a new calculation will follow making sure that the average lies under 0 5 and a result of TRUE will be given At this point it is not yet certain that the necessary number of replicates is available This is then determined using the countDeleted function within an else statement if NC1 gt 0 5 then eliminateRange NC1 0 0 5 2 else countDeleted NC1 2 The equation process of the second run following the elimination uses the else statement The countDeleted function then checks whether the given identifier in
324. tely Settings button The button opens the Sample ID List Settings dialog box where the number of sample IDs per well can be selected Edit button The Edit button opens the Edit Well dialog box The sample IDs of the marked well can be edited See below for further information Autofill button The whole plate or a part of the plate can be selected to be automatically filled with sample IDs After selecting the corresponding wells click Autofill to open the Autofill Selection dialog box See below for further information Delete button The whole plate or part of the plate can be selected This function deletes the sample IDs of the selected wells immediately No dialog box asks for confirmation Click Delete or press the DEL key to delete the sample IDs in the selected wells Undo button Performs an undo of the last action Click Undo or press CTRL Z to undo a previous action Redo buiton Repeats the action which was performed before the undo step Click Redo or press CTRL Y to redo an action that was undone Print format Select the layout for printing the sample ID list e horiz Table e vert Table e Matrix Print preview Opens the print preview of the printed sample ID list 10 button This will set the plate layout view to 10 100 button This will set the plate layout view to 100 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 113 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Zoom che
325. ter settings can be defined Zoom to 100 Sets the graph display back to 100 if the zoom factor has been changed by selecting rectangular regions of the graph Enzyme Kinetics Opens the Enzyme Kinetics Data dialog box The Data Enzyme Kinetics Data dialog box displays the result of the defined enzyme kinetics analysis Properties select this command to change the graph display properties The graph title the axis styles the curve style etc can be customized Help Opens the magellan help dialog box 158 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 Evaluate Results Wizard 7 4 11 Control Bar Concentrations Select single concentration mean or average single concentration to view the results calculated according to the standard curve single conc Unit Concentration of individual replicate Mean conc Unit The mean value of replicates is used for calculation of concentration If replicates with different dilutions are defined the mean concentration will not be available Average single conc Unit For each replicate the concentration is calculated Then the concentrations are averaged Additional concentrations single mean and average concentration if available Graph Standard Curve Click this option to open the Graph Standard Curve dialog box Intercepts If concentration transformations have been defined the results of the concentration transformations can be
326. ter value for the automated incrementing of the sample ID has to be entered Vertical check box The Vertical check box can only be accessed if the Autoincrement check box is selected If this check box is selected the sample IDs will be entered and numbered in vertical direction If it is cleared the sample IDs will be entered and numbered in horizontal direction The Well Summary dialog box can be accessed via the context sensitive menu This dialog box delivers an overview of all defined Sample IDs and the Sample ID list related settings of a selected well The Summary dialog box contains the following elements Information tree The information tree gives an overview of all defined well based parameters of the selected well The tree is filled according to the available information For sample ID lists the sample IDs the pipetting status etc are displayed Left Right Up and The direction buttons can be used to select another well Down buttons on the plate while leaving the dialog box open Expand All This button displays the information tree expanded to the Shrink All highest level or shrunk to the first level Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard Paste in ASCIll Format The Paste in ASCIl Format function can be accessed via the context sensitive menu This function pastes the contents of selected data in ASCII format from the clipboard in
327. the Axis tab define the labeling and the scaling of the axis as shown below Data Analysis type Intercepts Axis Graph X axis Label Concentration UA ml Color EE C Log Scaling Auto select range Range Grid Y axis Label Blank reduction Color O C Log Scaling Auto select range Range Grid Color l Style On the Graph tab define the graph title curves font and graph display Data Analysis type Intercepts Axis Graph Title Labe IgM ELIS Color E X Curves Label Grp 1 Color Ld C Hide curve Symb My Line width 1 Size Medium Font Display Small Legend Intercepts Medium OL Base points Error bars Large 266 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Define Cutoffs 2013 08 14 Application Example In the control bar select Cutoff definition from the Evaluate data item to define the limits for the qualitative evaluation The test kit description contains the following instructions Interpretation of the test results IgM lt 18 UA mL Negative 18 UA mL lt IgM lt 22 UA mL Intermediate IgM gt 22 UA mL Positive Use the following procedure to define the appropriate cutoffs In the Input data box select Mean conc UA mL The Cutoffs table represents a scale indicating the high and the low end for the Limits and Labels In Limits type 22 as the fir
328. the Define Identif button to define additional identifiers The Define Identifiers dialog box appears see below for further details Exp group lf the plate is made up of more than one test then there selection field needs to be more than one experiment group In the Experiment group selection field define which experiment the wells belong to ID Num The ID Number is used to assign the same ID to replicates group box that belong together The ID Number is only available for samples and standards e ID Num selection field The ID Num option allows the user to mark those replicates that are associated with the same ID This can be used if the replicates have been assigned to different areas of the plate e Arrow buttons The ID will be calculated automatically If a number of wells is marked the direction in which the IDs are assigned to the wells vertically horizontally can be established using the arrow buttons 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 61 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Replicates group Determines the number of replicates for the selected box identifier type Two option buttons allow the decision whether multiple or individual values are to be defined e Fix number option button Only enabled for standards and samples where IDs can be used If this option button is active a number can be entered in the corresponding text field This number defines how many replicates
329. the Identifier list a list of the standards from the Exp Group 1 appears In the corresponding Concentration box of ST1_1 type the number 5 and in the Unit box type UA mL In the corresponding Concentration box of ST1_2 type the number 10 The unit only needs to be defined once and is valid for all standards Type the values for the ST1_3 to ST1_6 in the same way The screen showing the plate layout and the concentration is displayed Create Edit a Method a ay Method layout Y Plate layout Cone Dil Ref values ji ie Transformed data Blank reduction poyjew ypa ayeas gt Add new transformation i 2 Concentrations Standard curve Zy Conc transformed d Add new conc transformati ig gt Evaluate data Cutoff definition QC Validation Cs Data handling Data export Printed report Automated data handling RS Miscellaneous User prompts Number format Method notes 10 _ 100 Zoom Select Identifier v a Identifier Conc a Sma 5 2 Se 10 3 S13 20 4 5T1_4 40 5 Ens 80 6 ST1_6 160 L E SM1_5 SM19 SM1_13 SM1_21 SM1_25 SM1_33 SM1_37 fs 272 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 272 22 22 20 1 NC1 14 z 2 2 1 SM1_10 SM1_14 18 sm1_22 sm1 7 f n 7 1 2 1 2 12 1 2 Unit UA ml 2 2 n 7 i i NC1 14 SM1_22 SM1_26 O Autofill 8 22 22 22 2 22 22 22 22 22 1 aln 1 afn SM1_35 EE D 2 2 2 2 2 2 12 2 2 2 12 a n 1 afn x
330. tion 1 5 Software Installation Procedure 1 5 1 Automatic Software Setup Program magellan is installed by an automatic software setup program All necessary components are installed automatically Start Setup exe to begin the installation procedure e Inthe first InstallShield Wizard window the components which are required prior to installing Magellan are shown Click Install to continue e A Welcome Window appears with information about the software and the installation process Click Next to continue e The next window displays the License Agreement Read the License Agreement and click agree to accept it and continue e The Customer Information window appears next If you have already purchased the software enter now your serial number and click Next If you do not yet have a serial number click Next as well to continue the setup You can register later see chapter 2 6 Licensing magellan e The Destination Folder window appears next The default installation path is displayed Click Browse to change the default destination path if desired Click Next to continue e The Language Selection window appears next Choose your preferred language e Inthe Use For Regulated Environments window select magellan Standard or magellan Tracker depending on which version you have ordered to install the software Click Next to continue e The setup program is now ready for installation Click Next to start installation e Click
331. tion wing ways are possible to assign the selected identifier to the wells Double click when making the selection of the well Select the wells on the microplate and then click the Fill selection button or click the right mouse button and select Fill selection in the context sensitive menu on the Well Assignment dialog box Select the wells on the microplate and then double click the identifier in the identifier list box of the well assignment dialog 60 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard After assigning the definitions the display in the modified wells will change Example of a labeled well SM1 4 1 line sample experimental group number of 1 sample ID number of 4 1 14 2 line number of replicate is 1 total number of replicates is 14 x BL1 3 line primary empty filled with the transformation formula after Transformations are defined and selected reduce the value of this well x by the mean of the blanks refer to chapter 13 4 How to Write a Formula 1 000 or 3 line Concentration dilution or reference value if Conc Dil Ref values is selected in the control bar dilution factor value of 1 0 The Well assignment dialog box contains the following elements Identifiers In this group box corresponding identifiers for the marked group box wells have to be selected e All available identifiers are listed in a drop down list e Click
332. tion d Absolute value of the correlation coefficient r correlation of data and fit Restrictions for the Process Application Refer to chapter 12 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types LogitLog for further information Mathematical Description Approximation function f 1 x OR A D y B 1 C Method First a LogitLog approximation is calculated The parameters A B C D are optimized by the Downhill Simplex algorithm a minimization algorithm that needs only function evaluations but no function derivation The algorithm stops if an accuracy of 0 001 is reached success or the maximum number of 10 000 iterations is exceeded failure before the given accuracy is reached Bibliography Nelder J A and Mead R 1965 Computer Journal vol 7 pp 308 313 xe D 252 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 13 Calculations 13 5 12 Four Parameters Marquarat The four parameter approximation needs to fulfill the same base point requirements as LogitLog The resulting curve will be produced using the Levenberg Marquardt method This method produces an increasingly more accurate approximation of the result throughout the interval The four parameter method requires considerably more time to be processed As with LogitLog an S shaped curve is produced A minimum of four base points is required for this calculation If necessary extrapolation can also be implemented in this process
333. tive when it is more than 15 below the average A result is declared as open if it lies between these two values Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN QC Validation 2013 08 13 Calculations The validation serves to examine the validity of the test The result must always be a logical statement TRUE or FALSE BL1 gt 0 005 and BL1 lt 0 120 If the average value of the empty value falls within the range of 0 005 to 0 12 a result of TRUE will be declared eliminateRange NC1 0 005 0 12 2 If a minimum of two negative controls fall within the range of 0 005 to 0 12 a result of TRUE will be declared abs PC1 NC1 gt 0 25 The distance between the averages of positive controls and the negative controls must be greater than 0 25 If this is the case a result of TRUE will be declared Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 245 13 Calculations TECAN 13 5 Standard Curve Analysis Types 13 5 1 Definitions Given n base points X1 Y1 Xn Yn X1 lt lt Xn Name Formula correlation n 7 B coefficient gt 2 i l r Sa Eo average square d FED deviation vit T goodness 1 d of fit 13 5 2 Analysis Type Parameters The analysis type parameter e g the slope A and the intercept B for linear regression can be used in calculation The available parameters are described below If there is more than one exp
334. to carry out said tests in a real environment Therefore you are strongly advised to verify and to validate results obtained before using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in a real work situation every time it is used in a new application Should there be any doubt as to the results or in the case of erroneous results you are requested to immediately contact Tecan For the perfect use of SOFTWARE PRODUCTS you are reminded that You must have the requisite knowledge you must in a regular fashion write protect and backup in particular to protect the data files from incidents such as deletion overwriting virus infection etc 7 LIMITED WARRANTY The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is under warranty for a period of 90 days as of the date of delivery thereof During said period Tecan shall use reasonable efforts to deliver as quickly as possible and by any means it chooses an updated version of the program free of any significant defect appeared The provisions mentioned above determine the extent of the warranty granted to you 8 RESTRICTED LIABILITY Tecan shall be subject to an undertaking to exercise due care Said undertaking shall concern the supply of the software conforming to the functionalities described in the documentation thereof no guarantee whatsoever being given either with regard to results obtained or the fitness of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT for your purposes You shall be solely liable for the use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and results obtained In p
335. to magellan The function allows transferring data from other software applications for example Excel Notepad into the magellan plate layout First the relevant data must be selected in the other software application and copied to the clipboard The rows must be separated by linefeed the columns by tab stops This is automatically done in Excel when selecting multiple cells The Paste in ASCll Format function pastes the copied data in ASCII format from the clipboard into the wells Data is always inserted starting at position A1 5 2 3 Import a Sample ID List Sample ID lists that have been created using other programs or sample ID lists that have been defined using other forms of analytical equipment have to be imported into magellan before being used Important stor Some sample ID lists may contain additional information such as concentrations and dilutions which may affect evaluation of the measurement data Click Import button in the Sample ID list settings dialog box to browse for existing external sample ID files The Windows Open dialog box appears The window offers a list of File names that match the selected File type The File type can be chosen from an associated drop down list The following external file tyoes are supported e Easy Files esy e Tecan files tpl e DD1 Files dd1 e Hamilton Files pro e APL Files apl e Gemini Files csv e Custom Format Files txt Select the requested file to be impo
336. to save a standard curve for further evaluations A standard curve can be saved as a Std file The file can be included in the method by switching to the Data tab If the user has selected Save and the curve had previously been saved it will simply be stored without displaying any prompts If this is not the case the user will be invited to enter a name for the new curve e Export is selected to export a standard curve as a bitmap file e Print is selected to print the standard curve This command will print the Current graph e Printer Setup Selecting this options displays the Printer Setup dialog box e Exit is selected to exit the standard curve dialog box If any modifications have been made for example a change of interpolation process a new Calculation will be performed Note Standard curves added by New or Open are for comparison only After closing the Standard Curve dialog box the curves will be removed Edit menu The Edit menu contains the following commands e Select Copy to copy the graph to the clipboard as a bitmap which can be transferred to any Windows application by using the copy paste function e Select Properties to modify the analysis type axes title etc e Select Standard Curve to open the standard curve dialog box In this dialog box standard points may be excluded or included Upon selecting the relevant curve from the available list and clicking the OK button all of the base points wi
337. trail button can then be selected 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 223 TECAN 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker 12 2 File Handling The measured data is always saved directly after the measurement 12 2 1 Saving a File A file created and saved in magellan Tracker is indicated with a sign in its file name The added sign can only be seen in the appropriate subdirectory of magellan Example method 1 mth workspace 1 wsp samplelDlist 1 smp 12 2 2 Changing a Method or Workspace File Every time a method or workspace file is modified and saved the number behind the in the file name is automatically increased e g first version of a workspace name 1 wsp edit and save the new version to get name 2 wsp After the next change name 3 wsp is created All versions of a file are listed in the appropriated subdirectories of magellan Note When transferring Tracker files it is necessary to transfer all versions of the file 12 2 3 Opening a File Only the last saved version of a file is available in the wizards of create edit a method create edit a sample ID list evaluate results and start measurement To view a previous version of a file open the Audit trail in the saving page of the file select the preferred version of the file by clicking once on the number and click Save previous version as button Rename the file and add some file remarks or A
338. trument cccccseecneceneecseeecaeesseeesanessaeessnesanees 43 3 2 2 Define Filter SNCACS ccccccccccccseeccneecesnseesneeseeesessnecsesesenes 43 323 ISOC anspor LOCK x ariere 43 3 2 4 Optimize Z Position 0 eee ccsecccsecccssecccsneecseeeeseeessaeeessneeseaeeeeas 44 3 2 5 Plate Geometry EQUION ccccccecccsseeccseeeesnsecsseeecseeessnsesenes 44 3 3 OG NOS ogien 50 Create Edit a Method Wizard ccccccceeseeceneeeesseeeeneeeeseseanees 51 4 1 oligere Ule l c i ee ee 51 4 2 Define the Measurement Parameters ccccesceeseeeeeeeseenseeeseeeees 52 4 2 1 Measurement TYD S cccccccccccseenseenseeceenuccsscsescceseceseees 53 4 2 2 Measurement Parameters cccccccccsecssccseccsecseccuensesseeeees 54 4 3 Define Evaluation sistinitiettttninttiminin SRO 56 4 3 1 The Create Edit Method Overview WINdOW 10 0 00 56 4 3 2 Method Layout How to Define a Plate Layout 60 4 3 3 Method Layout Conc Dil and Ref Valu s 100c000 65 4 3 4 Precalculation Polarization Data Reduction cc100008 68 4 3 5 Precalculation Spectra Data REQUCTION 1ccccccseeceeeees 69 4 3 6 Precalculation Cuvette Data REQUCTION cccccceeeeeeeees 73 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation 10c00008 73 4 3 8 Kinetic Kinetic Data REQUCTION ccccceecneeeeeeeeeeenneeeenens 76 4 3 9 Kinetics Transformations Add New Kinetics Transformations
339. trument e My files This option is available if the user administration is enabled always enabled in magellan Tracker e Signed files only available for magellan Tracker e Example files only available if they have been installed Filename list Select the method to be edited from the Filename list A Remarks field next to every file name contains if entered a short description of the method All methods available in the standard method directory will be displayed see chapter 11 3 1 Default Data Paths 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 51 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Print Click the Print Preview button to open the Print Preview Preview dialog box where a preview of the settings of the selected button method is displayed and a printout can be started Note If the proper instrument for the selected file is not connected the Instrument Mismatch dialog box appears The dialog offers two options e Connect to the proper instrument e Convert the measurement parameters to those compatible with the connected instrument This option is not available if the measurement mode is not supported by the connected instrument for example a Sunrise does not support Fluorescence measurements It is highly recommended to review the measurement parameters Note After the magellan 30 day demo license has expired printing and saving will not be possible 4 2 Define the M
340. u agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree with the terms of this EULA you are not authorized to use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The SOFTWARE PRODUCT and the DOCUMENTATION are protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licensed not sold 1 GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the non exclusive and non transferable right to use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in accordance with the instructions and procedures in the DOCUMENTATION for your own internal purposes only You may install and use the number of copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on the number of terminals connected to the number of devices as specified in the documentation to this EULA in accordance with the software installation procedure described in the documentation You may either make one copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT solely for archival purposes in support of your use of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a single computer or transfer the SOFTWARE PRODUCT to a single hard disk provided that you keep the original only for backup or archival purposes You may not reproduce or distribute the SOFTWARE PRODUCT in any other way including rental or leasing The SOFTWARE PRODUCT shall be used exclusively with the devices specified in the documentation and must not be used on any other devices 2 LICENSE FEE The license fee for the right to use the SOFTWARE PRODUC
341. uate with another method Modity layout Create standard curve files Edit standard curve files Print unsigned workspaces Run not approved methods Magelan Administrator Create sample td lists Edit sample td lists Sign sample td lists Modify signed sample td lists Create methods Edit methods Sign methods Modity signed methods Aun unsigned methods Setup favorites Define multilabel measurement Define kinetic transformations Define concentration transformations Define alias Create workspaces Edit workspaces Sign workspaces Edit signed workspaces Continue evaluation when error Modify raw data samples Modify raw data standards Import raw data Modify evaluation Reevaluate with another method Modify layout Create standard curve files Edit standard curve files Sign standard curve files Modify signed standard curve files Archive files Define filter slides Modify general options Print unsigned workspaces Run not approved methods Save plate definition file Save spin profile Users Create sample id lists Edit sample id lists Sign sample id lists Modify signed sample id lists Create methods Edit methods Copy to Clipboard The text can be copied to a word processing program for printing 216 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon 11 5 User Administration magellan Standard C
342. uation screening can be defined The Define QC Validation window is opened It is used to verify the validity of a test e Data export item e Printed report item e Automated data handling item e User prompts item e Number format item e Method notes item The Define User Prompts window enables the assignment of data keywords comments or prompts to each measurement which can then be incorporated into a printout The Number format window allows the user to define the number format for the displayed raw data or transformed data In the Method notes it is possible to enter a description of the method Control Bar Create Edit Method Tab Context Sensitive Menu By right clicking on any transformation kinetic transformation and concentration transformation on the control bar a context sensitive menu for the marked transformation is displayed The following commands are available Menu Rename transformation Insert transformation Remove transformation Description A different name can be assigned to the selected transformation Used to define a new transformation Used to delete a transformation Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 59 4 Create Edit a Method TECAN Wizard 4 3 2 Method Layout How to Define a Plate Layout In the Control bar expand Method layout and select Plate layout The Plate view Well sare i and the Well Assignment dialog box are displaye
343. udit trail comments and open the file with the Create Edit a Method wizard Note If you want to compare a method with its previous versions a printout must be made because two print preview windows cannot be opened simultaneously 224 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 12 Additional Features for magellan Tracker 12 2 4 Opening a File Created on Another PC Add HUIDs In the licensing process of magellan three numbers are involved e Serial number of the software e HUID Hardware Unit Identification Number and e License number refer to chapter 2 6 Licensing magellan The HUID of a Personal Computer is configured during magellan registration and all files created and saved on this PC are linked to this special HUID If there is the need to work with magellan Tracker files which were created on another PC the HUID of this other PC must be accepted When a user with the right to Modify general options tries to open a document sample ID list method workspace from another PC i e with a different HUID number the user is automatically asked to add that number to the list of Known HUID numbers If the button Accept HUID is clicked the HUID number will be added to the list and the document will be opened without further interactions Hence this HUID number is always accepted To view the list of accepted HUID numbers of other PCs click Miscellaneous icon in the wizard list startin
344. ue 72 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Note For the Safire instrument the calibration factor for each wavelength has to be defined For the Safire instrument only the check box for calibration has to be selected The calibration spectrum is stored in the instrument and the calibration is done automatically This check box is not available for the Infinite M200 because calibration is always performed automatically 4 3 6 Precalculation Cuvette Data Reduction If you are using an Infinite M200 with Cuvette option you can define methods with a combination of plate and cuvette measurements For the cuvette Absorbance ratio Absorbance scans and Absorbance kinetic measurements can be defined Using the Precalculation cuvette data reduction dialog it is possible to define formulas to get single values from a scan or a kinetic measurement Examples For scan Formula x 698 x 600 gives you as result the ratio between the value at 698 nm and the value at 600 nm For kinetic Formula x 5 x 0 means that the value of the 6 kinetic cycle is reduced by the value of the 1 kinetic cycle 4 3 7 Transformed Data Add New Transformation In the control bar expand Transformed data All defined transformations are displayed in the control bar To define a new transformation click Add new transformation The new transformation with a default name wi
345. up can be modified Users The user list shows all existing users and which group they are member of Add User A new user can be created Modify User Full name user level group or password of an existing user can be changed 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 205 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Lock User A user account can be enabled disabled The button is visible only if a username is selected Audit Trail All modifications of the user administration database e g creation of groups users change of rights change of options are recorded in the user management audit trail written by the user management server Options General login password or email options can be modified Summary A detailed description of all existing users and user groups as plain text 11 4 1 Add Modify User magellan Tracker Click Add User in the Manage Users and Roles dialog box and the Create User dialog box appears Create User x Create User Please enter the user name password and full name of the user to be created User Name Toe Full Name Tom Example sis Password ES E Confirm Password pee The Create User dialog box contains the following elements User Name A unique user name has to be entered when a new user is created This name cannot be modified afterwards Full Name Enter the full name of the user This can be changed later Password Enter the initial password The
346. ure that the measurement values lie within a valid interval and delete any rogue values Three differing elimination functions can be employed when defining the validity intervals The identifier that is to be influenced by the function is always the first parameter required when defining the elimination criteria All three elimination functions produce a logical result TRUE is given when there are enough valid measurement values available and FALSE is given when less than the requirement are valid Invalid measurement values will be labeled with an exclamation mark eliminate arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 The validation interval will be defined using a defined value This function eliminates values that lie outside of the validation range defined in arg2 arg1 Identifier name NC1 PC1 arg2 Value used to represent the range dependent upon arg4 arg3 Number of valid individual values that must be available in order that an average can be generated If too few values are available following the elimination a result of FALSE will be given Note For arg3 a value of 2 or higher has to be defined 1 is not accepted arg4 Represents the selection of whether testing will use the range average arg2 to average arg2 argument of 1 or it will be checked whether the individual values lie below average arg2 argument of 0 In this case argument of 0 there is no lower limit The elimination function here determines the
347. used method and its settings Every modification of the method results in a re calculation of all data when changing back to the Evaluate Results tab These changes can be saved in the workspace however will not be applied to the originally inserted method file itself See chapter 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard for further information Note The Edit method tab is displayed only if the currently working user has the appropriate rights cf chapter 11 4 4 User Rights magellan Tracker and chapter 11 5 4 User Rights magellan Standard Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 7 6 2013 08 7 Evaluate Results Wizard Saving the Evaluated Results Click Next on the Results dialog box to reach the Save in dialog box of the Evaluate Results wizard Evaluate Results Save in Filename ELISA File remarks demo example Audit trail comment Name Remarks Status G9 29052007 001 wep Unsigned Save in group box Audit trail comment group box Save button Export Audit Trail button Signatures button Sign this workspace now C Sign this workspace now SAVE gt gt 2007 Tecan The Evaluate Results dialog box has the following elements Filename text field a default name for the file will appear but can be changed if desired File remarks text field enter remarks as necessary Audit trail comment text field enter comments to the
348. user rights in the magellan software magellan Administrator has access to all features of the magellan software but cannot change user rights magellan offers password protection to prevent misuse of the software and to restrict access to parts of the software based on user rights Caution To prevent the misuse of user rights and falsification of data it is recommended that the User Administrator does not have magellan rights i e does not belong to a magellan User Group Ideally the User Administrator should belong to the IT department z Select miscellaneous in the wizard window and click the User administration icon Zi The Manage Users and Role dialog box is displayed s Manage Users and Roles Administrators l a SUH Magellan Administrator eS Modify Role Magellan_Application_ Specialist Magellan _Operator Users Users Username Full Name Roles Y Admin Administrator Administrators Magelan Adm Y Tokx Tom Example Magellan_Application_Special 2 Modify User fe Change Password ig Audit Trail E Summary Close Users and roles can be added and modified user rights can be defined Options for login password and email can be customized The Manage Users and Role dialog box contains the following elements Roles The Roles list shows all existing user groups user levels Add Role A new group with corresponding rights can be created Modify Role Rights of an existing gro
349. usf Delete Print fonat Part creview 10 100 Zoom 1 2 3 4 85 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SL s ae Edi carols IDs Cue CD En l on L On Erim mira in verital direction 3 lt U E reuse D P PESAGA 112 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN Toolbar Buttons 2013 08 5 Create Edit a Sample ID List Wizard On top of the window a Toolbar is displayed Settings Edit Autofill Delete Undo Redo Print format Print preview and Zooming can be accessed clicking the corresponding button see below for details In the main area of the window the Plate View displays a schematically layout of a microplate Rows are marked alphabetically columns numerically If anew sample ID list is to be created no sample IDs are assigned to the wells A well can be selected by clicking in the well All required sample IDs have to be entered either manually or using the buttons in the tool bar or can be read by the handheld barcode scanner for sample IDs The sample IDs can be defined and edited in the defined microplate type Up to three sample IDs can be entered in each well Sample IDs can be moved or copied When a method has been selected on the left side a List of all Samples from the plate layout is displayed Only samples without replicates are shown in the list The sample IDs can be entered either in the list or on the plate All changes are shown immedia
350. version and can only be enabled by users with Modify general options rights Options Start at startup Wizard list dialog box Favorites dialog box Demo mode allowed Move plate in after startup Suppress not monotone waming for standard curve Set next counter value Total counter 1 Counter with daily reset 6 ae Language Select English Regulated environments Additionally accept files fram PCs HUID Add HUIDs Automatic archiving Enable archiving C Users voli Tau a Options and default settings audit trail Hep 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 193 TECAN 11 Miscellaneous Icon Automatic e Enable archiving check box select this check box to archiving activate automatic archiving group box e Click the file browser button to browse for the archiving directory Note It may happen that a selected archive directory becomes invalid e g a network drive In such a case magellan will not explicitly warn the user but will make an entry in the System Audit Trail s log file 11 2 3 Import Raw Data In the File handling dialog box click Import raw data to import measurement data in ASCII asc format A number of ASCII options make sure that the corresponding files can be opened and that the data is converted correctly By using the ASCII File Import function the user can process ASCII data files in magellan which a
351. w to Define a Plate Layout Assign Alias to the Required Well Control Bar of Create Edit Method Tab The Control Bar on the left of the screen provides a number of options which should be executed in the suggested sequence Depending on the kind of measurement and the connected reader type some of the options may not be available and therefore are hidden When selecting an item in the control bar the corresponding dialog or plate view is displayed in the Plate Layout window pane on the right side of the screen All available options will be marked with a checkmark once they have been defined For any kind of transformation the transformation name is displayed 58 The Control bar Create edit method tab contains the following elements Method layout group Precalculation Transformed data group Kinetic group e Plate layout item The Plate layout window is opened displaying the plate layout and the Well assignment dialog box e Conc Dil and Ref values item The Concentration Dilution Reference definition dialog box is opened displaying the dilution concentration or reference value of each well The standard concentrations can be established as well as the dilution factors and the reference values An Autofill function provides easy assignment of concentrations in case of distinctive mathematical relations of the concentrations between the individual wells e Polarization data reduction for fluorescence polari
352. welcome page check box the welcome page of the wizard is not displayed when opening a wizard The wizard starts at the second of its windows Start at startup Selecting the Favorites dialog box check box defines that group box instead of the Wizard List the Favorite dialog will show up after the start of the magellan software Group box e Demo mode allowed check box Select this option in order to allow connecting to a simulated instrument This option is helpful if already measured data shall be evaluated Then no instrument is needed e Move plate in after startup check box If the checkbox is selected and an instrument is connected the plate carrier is moved in automatically after startup e Suppress not monotone warning check box Select this option to suppress the not monotone warning This option is useful if in a standard curve several points are taken in a flat area and it is very likely that monotony is not given i e the flat part of a logarithmic curve or other curve where a limit is approached Note This option is disabled in magellan Tracker Set next Two options are offered counter value e Total counter spin control enables to set the counter group box to any value Displays the number which will appear in the name of the next workspace file created e Counter with daily reset spin control enables to set the counter to any value Displays the current number of workspace files that have been created
353. window appears after selecting Obtain Raw Data Measurement parameters Infinite 200 Lab Ware 4 yy Plate 1 Nothing selected Plate i he Plate definition GRE384ft Greiner 384 Flat Transparent v Paet of Eee BRA Part of Plate P we C Plate with cover Use a part of the plate e Warning The plate range z E contains no 2 Sy wY Part of Plate Es action Measurements Absorbance 1 ne ORC EE SE Fluorescence Intensity Y Luminescence Luminescence Dual Color E o Actions Temperature K Shaking fe Injection amp Dispense 2 Move Plate Kinetic G Kinetic Cycle Kinetic Condition rr Ls Miscellaneous e Comment v DaS CHOOSE MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS gt Tecan 2004 Define the measurement parameters following the list on the left side Click Choose Measurement Parameters to finish the definition Refer to the i control instructions for use for further information 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 131 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 3 Run Strip Layout TECAN The Strip Method option allows the user to create one method composed of strips from different methods containing different parameters and to run this combined method Observe the criteria for combining strips of methods The methods involved must be defined with e exactly the same measurement parameters e transformations concentration and
354. xample positive pos negative neg intermediate Limits text fields The limits can be entered as a constant value or as a formula Formulas can be entered directly into a field or via the Formula input fields A maximum of up to nine limits may be defined Formula input Formulas to be entered into the Limits field can be group box composed by using the variables operators and functions below Refer to chapter 13 4 How to Write a Formula for further details e Variables drop down list All available variables are displayed e button Click this button to open the Define constants dialog box e Operators drop down list All available operators are displayed e Functions drop down list Available functions can be selected Competitive Test Competitive tests allocate a positive result to low values check box and a negative result to high values In the evaluation the limits will run from top to bottom and the corresponding results symbol will be allocated when a value is found to be equal to or less than the limit In view of this the Low High arrow will be reversed Cutoff results Click the Cutoff results selection button to open the selection button Cutoff Results Selection dialog box Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Cutoff Results Selection Use this window to select whether a qualitative result for a certain identifier type
355. xcel options E New workbook O New worksheet Insert into worksheet at cell O Append to current worksheet The Copy tab contains the following elements Matrix format The user also has the following opportunities to define group box how he would like the data to be displayed e Rows in horizontal order option button Rows of data from the microplate will be copied in horizontal order e Rows in vertical order option button Rows of data from the microplate will be copied in vertical order This results in a transposed matrix e lf the Add row column labels check box is selected the row and column information like in XFluor is added when copying data 200 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 Copy to clipboard options group box Copy to Excel options group box 11 Miscellaneous Icon A format for the decimal point of numbers must be selected for the transferred data Point x xxx option button Example 7 893 Comma x xxx option button Example 7 893 The option buttons enable to define where to position the transferred data within Excel New workbook option button Transferred data will be stored in the first worksheet of a new workbook A new file will always be created no matter if Excel is started or not New worksheet option button Transferred data will be put into a new worksheet within an open active Excel workbook If Excel is not open when sel
356. y lt Empty infinite W1000 Instrument Favorite StartFavorite mth Select on cancel _ The Organize Favorites dialog box contains the following elements Methods Lists all available methods The filename and corresponding list remarks if entered are displayed Set button selecting a method icon click Set to add the selected method to the Favorites After selecting a method from the Methods Filename list and 134 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard Remove Select a method icon and click Remove to delete a method from button the Favorites Infinite With the Infinite M1000 M1000 Pro instrument it is possible to M1000 start a measurement run with a favorite method directly via the M1000 Pro instrument s Start button Instrument To define a favorite method click the Select button and select a Favorite method This method will remain the favorite one as long as group box another method is selected 2013 08 Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 135 TECAN 6 Start Measurement Wizard 6 6 Start Measurement with a Predefined or Favorite Method Click Make your selection respectively Show Summary in the Select a file dialog box to open the Start Measurement dialog box Before the instrument starts to measure the user has to if defined answer the report prompts and or to confirm or change the
357. zation measurements e Spectra data reduction for wavelength scans e Cuvette data reduction for combined plate and cuvette measurements e Add new transformation item The Plate layout window is opened displaying the plate layout and the Transformations dialog input field e Kinetic data reduction item The Kinetics Calculation Parameters window is opened The evaluation of the kinetics measurement data can be defined Instructions for Use for magellan No 30066407 Rev No 1 3 2013 08 TECAN 2013 08 Kinetics transformation Concentrations group Concentration transformation data group Evaluate data group Data handling group Miscellaneous group 4 Create Edit a Method Wizard Add new kinetic transformation item The Plate layout window is opened displaying the plate layout and the Transformations dialog input field only kinetic input data can be selected e Standard curve item The Standard Curve window is opened to set the parameters for the calculation of concentrations and the graphical display of the standard curve of the evaluated data e Add new concentration transformation item The Plate layout window is opened displaying the plate layout and the Concentration Transformations dialog input field only concentrations can be selected as input data e Cutoff definition item e QC validation item The Define Cutoff window is opened In this dialog box the limits for a qualitative eval

Magellan Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents